InteliGen 500 Global Guide PDF

InteliGen 500
Controller for parallel gen-set

applications
SW version 1.0.0
1 Document information 7
2 System overview 13
3 Applications overview 21
4 Installation and wiring 23
5 Controller setup 53
6 Graphical User Interface 157
7 Communication 195
8 Technical data 217
9 Appendix 219
Copyright © 2019 ComAp a.s.

Written by Vladimír Zubák
Prague, Czech Republic
ComAp a.s., U Uranie 1612/14a,
170 00 Prague 7, Czech Republic
Tel: +420 246 012 111
E-mail: info@comap-control.com, www.comap-control.com Global Guide
Table of contents
1 Document information 7
1.1 Clarification of notation 7
1.2 About this Global Guide 7
1.3 Legal notice 7
1.4 General warnings 10
1.4.1 Remote control and programing 10
1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility 10
1.4.3 Dangerous voltage 10
1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints 10
1.5 Certifications and standards 11
1.6 Document history 11
1.7 Symbols in this manual 12
2 System overview 13
2.1 General description 13
2.1.1 The key features of InteliGen 500 13
2.2 True RMS measurement 13
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 13
2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools 14
2.3.2 Configuration parts 14
2.4 PC tools 15
2.4.1 InteliConfig 15
2.4.2 WebSupervisor 15
2.4.3 WinScope 16
2.5 Plug-in modules 16
2.5.1 CM-4G-GPS 16
2.5.2 CM-GPRS 16
2.5.3 CM-RS232-485 17
2.5.4 EM-BIO8-EFCP 17
2.6 CAN modules 18
2.6.1 Inteli AIN8 18
2.6.2 Inteli AIN8TC 19
2.6.3 Inteli IO8/8 19
2.6.4 IGS-PTM 20
2.6.5 IGL-RA15 20
3 Applications overview 21
InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 2

3.1 SPtM 21
3.2 MINT 22
4 Installation and wiring 23

4.1 Package content 23
4.2 Controller installation 24
4.2.1 Dimensions 24
4.2.2 Mounting 24
4.3 Terminal Diagram 26
4.4 Recommended wiring 27
4.4.1 General 28
4.4.2 Grounding 28
4.4.3 Power supply 28
4.4.4 Measurement wiring 30
4.4.5 Magnetic pick-up 37
4.4.6 Binary inputs 38
4.4.7 Binary Outputs 39
4.4.8 E-Stop 40
4.4.9 Emergency stop 41
4.4.10 Analog inputs 41
4.4.11 CAN bus and RS485 wiring 44
4.4.12 USB 49
4.4.13 USB HOST 49
4.4.14 Ethernet 49
4.4.15 AVR Interface 49
4.4.16 Speed governor interface 49
4.5 Plug-in module installation 50
4.5.1 Installation 50
4.6 Maintenance 52
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement 52
5 Controller setup 53
5.1 Default configuration 53
5.1.1 Default configuration 53
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools connection 54
5.2.1 USB 54
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 55
5.2.3 Ethernet 56
5.3 Functions 60
5.3.1 Operating Modes 61

5.3.2 Engine start 63
5.3.3 Stabilization 68
5.3.4 Connecting to load 68
5.3.5 Multiple island operation 73
5.3.6 Parallel to mains operation - SPtM application 74
5.3.7 Parallel to mains operation - MINT application 77
5.3.8 AMF operation 77
5.3.9 Engine cool down and stop 79
5.3.10 Power management 79
5.3.11 Control groups 98
5.3.12 Distributed power management signals 99
5.3.13 Regulation loops 102
5.3.14 Speed/Load control 104
5.3.15 Voltage/PF control 107
5.3.16 Gen-set operation states 109
5.3.17 Alarm management 111
5.3.18 History log 118
5.3.19 Breaker control 119
5.3.20 Exercise timer 122
5.3.21 Rental Timers 129
5.3.22 Service timers 130
5.3.23 Analog switches 130
5.3.24 Additional running engine indications 132
5.3.25 Voltage phase sequence detection 132
5.3.26 Sensor curves 132
5.3.27 PLC 135
5.3.28 Aftertreatment Suppot 142
5.3.29 Geo-fencing 145
5.3.30 Mains decoupling protections 145
5.3.31 Droop 146
5.3.32 Alternate configuration 149
5.3.33 USB host 150
5.3.34 E-Stop 153
5.3.35 ECU Frequency selection 154
5.3.36 Mains import measurement 154
5.3.37 Load shedding 154
5.3.38 Peak shaving 156
6 Graphical User Interface 157

6.1 Graphical User Interface 157

6.1.1 GUI overview 157
6.1.2 Metering screens 170
6.1.3 Alarmlist 172
6.1.4 Setpoints 174
6.1.5 History 177
6.1.6 Administration 178
6.1.7 Trends 187
6.2 Quick help 190
6.2.1 Logging in/off to the Controller 190
6.2.2 Important values 191
6.2.3 Gen-set mode change 191
6.2.4 Password change 191
6.2.5 Display brightness settings 192
6.2.6 State messages 193
6.3 Custom configuration 193
6.3.1 Init or Service screen logo customization 193
7 Communication 195
7.1 PC 195
7.1.1 Direct communication 195
7.1.2 Remote communication 197
7.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 202
7.2.1 SNMP 202
7.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 204
8 Technical data 217
9 Appendix 219
9.1 Controller objects 220
9.1.1 Setpoints 221
9.1.2 Values 555
9.1.3 Logical binary inputs 613
9.1.4 Logical binary outputs 681
9.1.5 Logical analog inputs 741
9.1.6 PLC 776
9.2 Alarms 790
9.2.1 Alarms level 1 790
9.2.3 Fail sensor and other types 837
9.3 AVR interfaces 846

9.3.1 AVR interfaces alphabetically 846
9.4 Speed governor interfaces 856
9.4.1 Electronic engines interface 856
9.4.2 Controller Speed Regulator Output voltage limits 856
9.4.3 Speed governors interfaces alphabetically 856
9.5 Modules 865
9.5.1 Plug-In modules 865
9.5.2 CAN modules 876

1 Document information
1.1 Clarification of notation 7
1.2 About this Global Guide 7
1.3 Legal notice 7
1.4 General warnings 10
1.5 Certifications and standards 11
1.6 Document history 11
1.7 Symbols in this manual 12
6 back to Table of contents
1.1 Clarification of notation

Note: This type of paragraph calls readers attention to a notice or related theme.
IMPORTANT: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or improper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.
Example: This type of paragraph contains information that is used to illustrate how a specific function
works.
1.2 About this Global Guide

This manual contains important instructions for InteliGen 500 controllers family that shall be followed during
installation and maintenance of the controllers.
This manual provides general information how to install and operate InteliGen 500 controllers.
This manual is dedicated for:
Operators
Control panel builders
For everybody who is concerned with installation, operation and maintenance
1.3 Legal notice

This End User's Guide/Manual as part of the Documentation is an inseparable part of ComAp’s Product and
may be used exclusively according to the conditions defined in the “END USER or Distributor LICENSE
AGREEMENT CONDITIONS – COMAP CONTROL SYSTEMS SOFTWARE” (License Agreement) and/or in
the “ComAp a.s. Global terms and conditions for sale of Products and provision of Services” (Terms) and/or in
the “Standardní podmínky projektů komplexního řešení ke smlouvě o dílo, Standard Conditions for Supply of
Complete Solutions” (Conditions) as applicable.
ComAp’s License Agreement is governed by the Czech Civil Code 89/2012 Col., by the Authorship Act
121/2000 Col., by international treaties and by other relevant legal documents regulating protection of the
intellectual properties (TRIPS).

The End User and/or ComAp’s Distributor shall only be permitted to use this End User's Guide/Manual with
ComAp Control System Registered Products. The Documentation is not intended and applicable for any other
purpose.
Official version of the ComAp’s End User's Guide/Manual is the version published in English. ComAp reserves
the right to update this End User's Guide/Manual at any time. ComAp does not assume any responsibility for its
use outside of the scope of the Terms or the Conditions and the License Agreement.
Licensed End User is entitled to make only necessary number of copies of the End User's Guide/Manual. Any
translation of this End User's Guide/Manual without the prior written consent of ComAp is expressly prohibited!
Even if the prior written consent from ComAp is acquired, ComAp does not take any responsibility for the
content, trustworthiness and quality of any such translation. ComAp will deem a translation equal to this End
User's Guide/Manual only if it agrees to verify such translation. The terms and conditions of such verification
must be agreed in the written form and in advance.
Some components of open source software are being used in ComAp’s Software and Documentation to
Integrated Color Unit in controller InteliGen 500. Their use is associated with obligation to disclose conditions
for further distribution and use of the herein listed open source software. ComAp notifies that changes were
made to the used version of the software source code.
By quoting references to the provisions of any licenses for open source software, ComAp fulfils the obligations
arising from license agreement conditions on the individual open source software. Individual components may
not be used to modify or otherwise intervene to the Software and Documentation for ComAp’s Product
Integrated Color Unit in controller InteliGen 500 by the Distributor, End User or any other person.
Used open source software:
Name of
Modificated Type License condition web address
SW
CMSIS- https://github.com/ARM-software/CMSIS-
NO MIT
FreeRTOS FreeRTOS/blob/develop/License/license.txt
FatFS NO BSD http://elm-chan.org/fsw/ff/00index_e.html
MCD- http://www.st.com/content/ccc/resource/legal/legal_
STpackage ST agreement/license_agreement/group0/39/50/32/6c/e0/a8/45/2d/
YES
(HAL, USB) Liberty DM00218346/files/DM00218346.pdf/
SW V2 jcr:content/translations/en.DM00218346.pdf
Apache-
mbedTLS NO http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
2.0
https://github.com/adafruit/Adafruit-GFX-
Adafruit GFX NO BSD
Library/blob/master/license.txt
SIL
Noto Sans Open https://scripts.sil.org/cms/scripts/page.php?site_id=nrsi&id=OFL_
YES
font Font web
License
ISC
heatshrink NO https://github.com/atomicobject/heatshrink/blob/master/LICENSE
License

Name of
Modificated Type License condition web address
SW
https://github.com/pfalcon/ARM-CMSIS-
CMSIS NO BSD BSD/blob/master/CMSIS/CMSIS%20
END%20USER%20LICENCE%20AGREEMENT.pdf
CMSIS
RTOS2
Apache- www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
wrapper YES
2.0 Copyright (c) 2013-2019 Arm Limited. All rights reserved.
(cmsis_
os2.c)
http://lwip.wikia.com/wiki/License
LWIP NO BSD Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
All rights reserved
The full license texts [and/or changes in the source code] are available in an electronic form at ComAp and also
may be sent to you upon your request in a hardcopy against payment of the shipping charge and costs.
For more details relating to the Ownership, Extent of Permitted Reproductions Term of Use of the
Documentation and to the Confidentiality rules please review and comply with the ComAp’s License
Agreement, Terms and Conditions available on www.comap-control.com.
Security Risk Disclaimer
Pay attention to the following recommendations and measures to increase the level of security of ComAp
products and services.
Please note that possible cyber-attacks cannot be fully avoided by the below mentioned recommendations and
set of measures already performed by ComAp, but by following them the cyber-attacks can be considerably
reduced and thereby to reduce the risk of damage. ComAp does not take any responsibility for the actions of
persons responsible for cyber-attacks, nor for any damage caused by the cyber-attack. However, ComAp is
prepared to provide technical support to resolve problems arising from such actions, including but not limited to
restoring settings prior to the cyber-attacks, backing up data, recommending other preventive measures against
any further attacks.
Warning: Some forms of technical support may be provided against payment. There is no legal or factual
entitlement for technical services provided in connection to resolving problems arising from cyber-attack or
other unauthorized accesses to ComAp's Products or Services.
General security recommendations and set of measures
1. AccessCode
• Change the AccessCode BEFORE the device is connected to a network.
• Use a secure AccessCode – ideally a random string of 8 characters containing lowercase, uppercase letters
and digits.
• For each device use a different AccessCode.
2. Password
• Change the password BEFORE the device enters a regular operation.
• Do not leave displays or PC tools unattended if an user, especially administrator, is logged in.
IMPORTANT: Controller issues WrnDefault Credentials (page 795) or SdDefault Credentials (page
822) alarm, if the factory default password and/or access code are used. It is necessary to change
the factory default settings of both password and access code to be able to operate a genset!

3. MODBUS/TCP
• The MODBUS/TCP protocol (port TCP/502) is an instrumentation protocol designed to exchange data
between locally connected devices like sensors, I/O modules, controllers etc. From it’s nature it does not
contain any kind of security – neither encryption nor authentication. Thus it is intended to be used only in closed
private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port TCP/502 to the public Internet.
4. SNMP
• The SNMP protocol (port UDP/161) version 1,2 is not encrypted. Thus it is intended to be used only in closed
private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port UDP/161 to the public Internet.
1.4 General warnings

1.4.1 Remote control and programing
Controller can be remotely controlled. In the event that maintenance of gen-set has to be done, or controller has
to be programmed, check the following points to ensure that the engine cannot be started or any other parts of
the system cannot be effected.
To be sure:
Disconnect remote control
Disconnect binary outputs
1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

Be aware to use proper combination of SW and HW versions.
1.4.3 Dangerous voltage

In no case touch the terminals for voltage and current measurement!
Always connect grounding terminals!
In any case do not disconnect controller CT terminals!
1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints

All parameters are adjusted to their typical values. However the setpoints has to be checked and adjusted to
their real values before the first starting of the gen-set.
IMPORTANT: Wrong adjustment of setpoints can destroy the gen-set.
Note: The controller contains a large number of configurable setpoints, because of this it is impossible to
describe all of its functions. Some functions can be changed or have different behavior in different SW versions.
Always check the Global guide and New feature list for SW version which is used in controller. This manual
only describes the product and is not guaranteed to be set for your application.
IMPORTANT: Be aware that the binary outputs can change state during and after software
reprogramming (before the controller is used again ensure that the proper configuration and
setpoint settings are set in the controller).

The following instructions are for qualified personnel only. To avoid personal injury do not perform any action not
specified in related guides for product.
1.5 Certifications and standards

EN 61000-6-2
EN 61000-6-4
EN 61010-1
EN 60068-2-1 (-20 °C/16 h for std version)
EN 60068-2-2 (70 °C/16 h)
EN 60068-2-6 (2÷25 Hz / ±1,6 mm; 25÷100 Hz / 4,0 g)
EN 60068-2-27 (a=500 m/s2; T=6 ms)
EN 60068-2-30:2005 25/55°C, RH 95%, 48hours
EN 60529 (front panel IP65, back side IP20)
1.6 Document history

Revision number Related sw. version Date Author
1 1.0.0 Vladimír Zubák

1.7 Symbols in this manual
Connector - Resistor
3 x Phases Grounding
male adjustable
Active Resistive
current Contact GSM sensor
sensor RPTC
GSM RS 232
Contactor
AirGate modem male
Controller RS 232
IG-AVRi
Alternating simplified female
current
Module IG-AVRi
Starter
Analog simplified TRANS
modem
Switch -
Current
Jumper manually
measuring
Battery operated
Current
Load Transformer
Binary measuring
output
USB type B
Diode Mains male
Breaker
contact
Ethernet USB type B
Mains female
Breaker male
contact
Voltage
Ethernet Mobile
measuring
female provider
Breaker
Passive Wifi / WAN /
Fuel
current LAN
solenoid
Breaker sensor
6 back to Document
information
Fuse Pick - up
Breaker
Fuse switch Relay coil

Capacitor
Relay coil of
Generator slow-
Coil
operating
Generator
Connector - schematic Resistor
female

2 System overview
2.1 General description 13
2.2 True RMS measurement 13
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 13
2.4 PC tools 15
2.5 Plug-in modules 16
2.6 CAN modules 18
2.1 General description

InteliGen 500 family controllers are comprehensive gen-set controllers for single generating sets operating in
stand-by or parallel modes or for multiple gen-sets applications. A modular construction allows upgrades to
different levels of complexity in order to provide the best solution for various customer applications. The
controllers are equipped with a powerful graphic display showing icons, symbols and bar graphs for intuitive
operation, which, together with its high level of functionality, sets new standards in Gen-set controls.
2.1.1 The key features of InteliGen 500

Easy-to-use operation and installation. The factory default configuration covers most applications
Various customizations are possible thanks to its configurability
Excellent remote communication capabilities
High level of support for EFI engines (most world producers)
High reliability
2.2 True RMS measurement

This controller measures AC values based on True RMS principle. This principle corresponds exactly to the
physical definition of alternating voltage effective values. Under normal circumstances the mains voltage
should have a pure sinusoidal waveform. However some nonlinear elements connected to the mains produce
harmonic waveforms with frequencies of multiplies of the basic mains frequency and this may result in
deformation of the voltage waveforms. The True RMS measurement gives accurate readings of effective values
not only for pure sinusoidal waveforms, but also for deformed waveforms.
Note: The harmonic deformation causes that the Power Factor of a generator working parallel with the mains
cannot reach values in a certain range around the PF 1.00. The higher the deformation, the wider the power
factor dead range. If the requested power factor is adjusted inside the dead range, the controller cannot reach
the requested value because of this fact.
2.3 Configurability and monitoring

One of the key features of the controller is the system’s high level of adaptability to the needs of each individual
application and wide possibilities for monitoring. This can be achieved by configuring and using the powerful
PC/mobile tools.

2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools
InteliConfig - complete configuration and single gen-set monitoring
WinScope - special graphical monitoring software
Note: Use the InteliConfig PC software to read, view and modify configuration from the controller or disk and
write the new configuration to the controller or disk.
The firmware of controller contains a large number of binary inputs and outputs needed for all necessary
functions available. However, not all functions are required at the same time on the same gen-set and also the
controller hardware does not have so many input and output terminals. One of the main tasks of the
configuration is mapping of “logical” firmware inputs and outputs to the “physical” hardware inputs and outputs.
2.3.2 Configuration parts

Mapping of logical binary inputs (functions) or assigning alarms to physical binary input terminals
Mapping of logical binary outputs (functions) to physical binary output terminals
Assigning sensor characteristics (curves) and alarms to analog inputs
Selection of peripheral modules, which are connected to the controller, and doing the same (as mentioned
above) for them
Selection of ECU type, if an ECU is connected
Changing the language of the controller interface
Image 2.1 Principle of binary inputs and outputs configuration
The controller is shipped with a default configuration, which should be suitable for most standard applications.
This default configuration can be changed only by using a PC with the InteliConfig software. See InteliConfig
documentation for details.

Note: You need one of communication modules to connect the controller to a PC with InteliConfig. There is a
special easy removable service module for cases when no communication module is permanently attached.
Once the configuration is modified, it can be saved to a file for later usage with another controller or for backup
purposes. The file is called archive and has the file extension .ail3. An archive contains a full image of the
controller at the time of saving (if the controller is online for the PC) except the firmware. Besides configuration it
also contains current adjustment of all setpoints, all measured values, a copy of the history log and a copy of the
alarm list.
The archive can be simply used for cloning controllers, i.e. preparing controllers with identical configuration and
settings.
2.4 PC tools
2.4.1 InteliConfig
Configuration and monitoring tool for InteliGen controllers. See more in InteliConfig Reference Guide.
This tool provides the following functions:

Direct or internet communication with the
controller
Offline or online controller configuration
Controller firmware upgrade
Reading/writing/adjustment of setpoints
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
Exporting data into a XLS file
Controller language translation
2.4.2 WebSupervisor
Web-based system for monitoring and controlling of controllers. See more at the WebSupervisor webpage.

Site and fleet monitoring
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
On-line notification of alarms
Email notification
Also available as a smart-phone application
WebSupervisor available at: www.websupervisor.net

Demo account:
Login: comaptest
Password: ComAp123

2.4.3 WinScope
Special graphical controller monitoring software used mainly for commissioning and gen-set troubleshooting.
See more in the WinScope Reference guide.

Monitoring and archiving of ComAp controller’s
parameters and values
View of actual / historical trends in controller
On-line change of controllers’ parameters for
easy regulator setup
2.5 Plug-in modules

2.5.1 CM-4G-GPS
GSM/4G module
Wireless integrated solution
Quick and easy installation
Instant alarm SMS notification
System control over SMS
Quad Band GPRS/EDGE modem,
850/900/1800/1900 MHz, FDD LTE: Band 1,
Band 2, Band 3, Band 4, Band 5, Band 7, Band
8, Band 20, all bands with diversity,
WCDMA/HSDPA/HSUPA/HSPA+: Band 1,
Band 2, Band 5, Band 8, all bands with diversity
GPRS multi-slot class 10
2.5.2 CM-GPRS
GSM/GPRS module
Wireless integrated solution

Quick and easy installation
Instant alarm SMS notification
System control over SMS
Quad Band GPRS/EDGE modem,
850/900/1800/1900 MHz
GPRS multi-slot class 10

2.5.3 CM-RS232-485
Communication module with two communication ports.
RS232 and RS485 interface
MODBUS
Serial connection to InteliConfig
2.5.4 EM-BIO8-EFCP
Hybrid current input and binary input/output extension module.
Up to 8 additional configurable binary inputs or
outputs

2.6 CAN modules
2.6.1 Inteli AIN8
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 analog inputs.
Supported sensors:
Resistor 3-wire input
Common resistor: 0-250Ω, 0-2400Ω, 0-10kΩ
Temperature sensor: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100,
Ni1000
Current (active or passive sensors)
±20mA , 0-20mA, 4-20mA
Voltage
±1V, 0-2,4V, 0-5V, 0-10V
Lambda probes
Thermocouples are not supported (the
measuring loop was designed for lambda
probes, what caused non-support of
thermocouples)
Impulse/RPM sensor:
RPM measuring pulses with frequency 4Hz –
10kHz
Impulse
Possibility to measure pulses from
electrometer, flowmeter (measurement of
total consumption, average fuel
consumption)

2.6.2 Inteli AIN8TC
The unit offers flexibility to configure 8 thermocouple inputs.
Supported sensors:
J, K or L thermocouples
thermocouples with and without cold junction
compensation are supported
2.6.3 Inteli IO8/8

The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, and 2 analog
outputs, or 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs via switches inside the controller.
Configuration 8/8
8 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
8 Binary outputs (options: Low side switch (LSS)
or High side switch (HSS))
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10V),
current (0-20mA) and PWM (5V, adjustable
frequency 200Hz-2,4kHz))
Configuration 16/0
16 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
0 Binary outputs
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10V),
current (0-20mA) and PWM (5V, adjustable
frequency 200Hz-2,4kHz))

2.6.4 IGS-PTM
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, 4 analog
inputs and 1 analog outputs.
Configurable 8 binary and 4 analog inputs
Configurable 8 binary and 1 analog output
LEDs indicate the state of binary inputs/outputs
Measures values from Pt100 and Ni100 sensors
Analog inputs (resistance range 0-250 Ohms,
voltage range 0-100mV, current range 0-20mA -
selectable via jumper)
UL certified
2.6.5 IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator.
15 programmable LEDs with configurable colors
red-green-yellow
Lamp test function with status LED
Customizable labels
Local horn output
Maximal distance 200 m from the controller
Up to 4 units can be connected to the controller
UL certified
6 back to System overview

3 Applications overview
3.1 SPtM 21
3.2 MINT 22
3.1 SPtM
The typical scheme of a single parallel to mains application is shown below. The controller controls two
breakers – a mains breaker and a generator breaker. Feedback from both breakers is required.
Image 3.1 Single parallel to mains application

3.2 MINT
The typical schemes of multiple island-parallel application without mains. The controller controls one breaker
only, the generator breaker. Feedback from the generator breaker is required.
Image 3.2 Multiple island-parallel application without mains
6 back to Applications overview

4 Installation and wiring
4.1 Package content 23
4.2 Controller installation 24
4.3 Terminal Diagram 26
4.4 Recommended wiring 27
4.5 Plug-in module installation 50
4.6 Maintenance 52
4.1 Package content

The package contains:
Controller
Mounting holders
Terminal blocks
Note: The package does not contain a communication or extension modules. The required modules should be
ordered separately.

4.2 Controller installation
4.2.1 Dimensions
① Plug-in module
Note: Dimension x depends on plug-in module
Note: Dimensions are in millimeters.
Note: Cutout is in millimeters.
4.2.2 Mounting
The controller is to be mounted onto the switchboard door. Requested cutout size is 187 x 132 mm. Use the
screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller into the door as described on pictures
below.Recommended torque for holders is 0.15 N·m.

Panel door mounting
Note: The final depth of the controller depends on the selected extension module - it can vary between 41 and
56 mm. Mind also a size of connector and cables (e.g. in case of RS232 connector add about another 60 mm for
standard RS232 connector and cable).
Note: These devices shall be mounted in a pollution degree 2 environment enclosure having adequate strength
and thickness with acceptable spacings being provided.
Note: The accessibility of live parts through openings in the enclosure, reliable retention of guards or barriers for
prevention of risk of electric shock, etc., shall be considered in the end product evaluation.
Note: Voltage sensing circuits shall be connected to controlled Overvoltage Category III circuits only in the end
product installation.

4.3 Terminal Diagram
① CURRENT ② GENERATOR ③ MAINS/BUS ④ BINARY ⑤ AVR
MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE VOLTAGE INPUTS INTERFACE
T29 COM T37 N T41 N T45 BIN1 T54 COM
T30 L1 T38 L1 T42 L1 T46 BIN2 T55 OUT
T31 L2 T39 L2 T43 L2 T47 BIN3 ⑥ CAN1
T32 L3 T40 L3 T44 L3 T48 BIN4 T26 L
T33 COM T49 BIN5 T27 COM
T34 L1 T50 BIN6 T28 H
T51 BIN7
T52 BIN8
⑦ CAN2 ⑨ RPM ⑪ BINARY OUTPUTS ⑬ POWER SUPPLY, D+

T23 L T16 RPM GND T05 BOUT1 T01 BATT -
T24 COM T17 RPM IN T06 BOUT2 T02 D+
⑩ SPEED GOVERNOR
T25 H T07 BOUT3 T03 BATT +
INTERFACE
⑧ ANALOG INPUTS T13 COM T08 BOUT4 ⑭ RS485
A
T18 T14 VOUT T09 BOUT5 T56 B
COM
T19 A01 T15 PWM T10 BOUT6 T57 COM
T20 A02 T11 BOUT7 T58 A
T21 A03 T12 BOUT8 ⑮ USB
T22 A04 ⑫ E-STOP ⑯ USB HOST
T04 ⑰ ETHERNET

4.4 Recommended wiring
Current inputs 29 - 32 Current measurement wiring (page 31)
Voltage measurement wiring - SPtM (page 33)

Mains voltage inputs 37 - 40
Voltage measurement wiring - MINT (page 35)
Voltage measurement wiring - SPtM (page 33)
Bus voltage inputs 41 - 44
Voltage measurement wiring - MINT (page 35)
Binary inputs 45 - 52 Binary inputs (page 38)
AVR 54 - 55 AVR Interface (page 49)
CAN1 H, COM, L CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 44)
CAN2 H, COM, L CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 44)
Speed governor 13 - 15 Speed governor interface (page 49)
Binary outputs 07 - 12 Binary Outputs (page 39)
Power supply "+" D "-" Power supply (page 28)
RS485 A, COM, B CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 44)

USB USB B USB (page 49)
USB HOST USB A USB HOST (page 49)
Ethernet RJ45 Ethernet (page 49)
4.4.1 General
To ensure proper function:
Use grounding terminals.
Wiring for binary inputs and analog inputs must not be run with power cables.
Analog and binary inputs should use shielded cables, especially when the length is more than 3 m.
Tightening torque, allowable wire size and type, for the Field-Wiring Terminals:
For Mains(Bus) Voltage, Generator Voltage and Current terminals
Specified tightening torque is 0,56 Nm (5,0 In-lbs)
Use only diameter 2,0 - 0,5 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 90°C minimum.
For other controller field wiring terminals
Specified tightening torque 0,79 nm (7,0 In-lb)
Use only diameter 2,0 - 0,5 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 75°C minimum.
Use copper conductors only.
4.4.2 Grounding
The shortest possible length of wire should be used for controller grounding. Use cable min 2.5 mm2.
The negative " - " battery terminal must be properly grounded.
Switchboard and engine must be grounded at common point. Use as short cable as possible to the grounding
point.
4.4.3 Power supply


Use power supply cable min. 1.5 mm2
Maximum continuous DC power supply voltage is 36 V DC. The controller’s power supply terminals are
protected against large pulse power disturbances. When there is a potential risk of the controller being subjected
to conditions outside its capabilities, an outside protection device should be used.
It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between generator current COM terminal and battery “ - ”
terminal is maximally ± 2 V. Therefore is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals together.
Note: The controller should be grounded properly in order to protect against lighting strikes. The maximum
allowable current through the controller’s negative terminal is 4 A (this is dependent on binary output load).
For the connections with 12 V DC power supply, the controller includes internal capacitors that allow the
controller to continue in operation during cranking if the batter voltage dip occurs. If the voltage dip goes during
cranking to 0 V and after 50 ms it recovers to 4 V, the controller continues operating. This cycle can repeat
several times. During this voltage dip the controller screen backlight can turn off.
Note: Recommended fusing is 4 A fuse.
Note: In case of the dip to 0 V the high-side binary outputs will be temporarily switched off and after recovering
to 4 V back on.
IMPORTANT: When the controller is power up only by USB and the USB is disconnected then the
actual statistics can be lost.
Note: Suitable conductor protection shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 240.
Note: Low voltage circuits (35 volts or less) shall be supplied from the engine starting battery or an isolated
secondary circuit.
Note: It is also possible to further support the controller by connecting the external capacitor and separating
diode. The capacitor size depends on required time. It shall be approximately thousands of μF. The capacitor
size should be 5 000 μF to withstand 150 ms voltage dip under following conditions: Voltage before dip is 12 V,
after 150 ms the voltage recovers to min. allowed voltage, i.e. 8 V.
Power supply fusing

A 4 A fuse should be connected in-line with the battery positive terminal to the controller and modules. These
items should never be connected directly to the starting battery. Fuse value and type depends on number of
connected devices and wire length. Recommended fuse (not fast) type - T4 A. Not fast due to internal
capacitors charging during power up.

Note: Recommended fusing is 4 A fuse.
IMPORTANT: 4 A fuse is calculated without BOUT consumption nor extension modules. Real value
of fuse depends on consumption of binary outputs and modules.
Example: Maximal consumption of binary outputs can be 22 A

2 x 10 A on high current outputs (for 10 seconds)
2 A on all others binary outputs
4.4.4 Measurement wiring

Use 1.5 mm2 cables for voltage connection and 2.5 mm2 for current transformers connection. Adjust
Connection type (page 244), Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 246), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 246),
Nominal Current (page 243), Gen Mains VT Ratio (page 246) and CT Ratio (page 244) by appropriate
setpoints in the Basic Settings group.
IMPORTANT: Risk of personal injury due to electric shock when manipulating voltage terminals
under voltage. Be sure the terminals are not under voltage before touching them.
Do not open the secondary circuit of current transformers when the primary circuit is closed. Open
the primary circuit first.
Mains measurement wiring

Connect CT according to following drawings
Image 4.1 Mains measurement wiring

Current measurement wiring
The number of CT’s is automatically selected based on selected value of setpoint Connection type (page 244)
[3Ph4Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph].
Generator currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is bellow <1 % of CT range.
Use cables of 2.5 mm2
Use transformers to 5 A
Connect CT according to following drawings:
3 phase application:
Image 4.2 3 phase application
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal and
power supply “-” terminal is maximally ± 2 V. There are 2 options how to ensure this:
"Red" option - properly ground both terminals
"Blue" option - interconnect these two terminals
Always apply only one option. Never realize both options on one installation.

Split phase application:
Image 4.3 Split phase application
IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where is
normally connected the third phase.

Mono phase application:
Connect CT according to following drawings. Terminals phase 2 and phase 3 are opened.
Image 4.4 Mono phase application
Voltage measurement wiring - SPtM

There are 4 voltage measurement Connection Type (setpoint Connection type (page 244) [3Ph4Wire / High
Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph]) options, every type matches to corresponding generator connection
type.
Note: For fusing of voltage measurement input use T1A or T2A fuse.
The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on Connection type (page 244) setting:
3Ph 4W – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
3Ph 3W – Ph-Ph voltage
Split Ph – Ph-N voltage
Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage

ConnectionType: 3 Phase 4 Wires
Image 4.5 3 phase application with neutral
Image 4.6 3 phase application without neutral

ConnectionType: Split Phase
normaly connected the third phase.
ConnectionType: Mono Phase
Voltage measurement wiring - MINT

There are 4 voltage measurement Connection Type (setpoint Connection type (page 244) [3Ph4Wire / High
Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph]) options, every type matches to corresponding generator connection
type.
Note: For fusing of voltage measurement input use T1A or T2A fuse.
The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on Connection type (page 244) setting:

3Ph 4W – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
3Ph 3W – Ph-Ph voltage
Split Ph – Ph-N voltage
Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage
Image 4.9 3 phase application with neutral
Image 4.10 3 phase application without neutral

ConnectionType: Split Phase
normaly connected the third phase.
ConnectionType: Mono Phase
4.4.5 Magnetic pick-up

A magnetic speed sensor (pickup) is the most common method of engine speed measurement. To use this
method, mount the pickup opposite to the engine flywheel, connect the cable to the controller as shown on the
picture below and adjust the setpoint Gear Teeth (page 248) according to the number of teeth on the flywheel.
For the details about the pick-up input parameters see Technical data on page 217
IMPORTANT: To ensure proper function use a shielded cable.

If engine will not start:
Check ground connection from pick-up to controllers, eventually disconnect ground connection to one of
them.
Note: In some cases the controller will measure a RPM value even though the gen-set is not running: RPM is
measured from the generator voltage (Gear Teeth = 0). Controller is measuring some voltage value on input
terminals due to open fusing. If RPM > 0 the controller will be put into a Not ready state and the engine will not
be allowed to start.
4.4.6 Binary inputs

Use minimally 1 mm2 cables for wiring of Binary inputs.
Image 4.13 Wiring binary inputs
Note: The name and function or alarm type for each binary input have to be assigned during the configuration.

4.4.7 Binary Outputs
Use min. 1 mm2 cables for wiring of binary outputs. Use external relays as indicated on the schematic below for
all outputs except those where low-current loads are connected (signalization etc...).
IMPORTANT: Use suppression diodes on all relays and other inductive loads!
Note: Every single binary output can provide up to 0,5 A of steady current.

4.4.8 E-Stop
E stop has dedicated terminal T049. Power supply of binary output 1 and binary output 2 (terminals 4 and 5) is
internally connected (in controller) to E-Stop terminal. It means higher security and faster disconnection of these
outputs. More information about E-Stop functions see E-Stop on page 153.
Note: This function has the same behavior as binary input EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 665).
Image 4.14 E-Stop wiring
Note: Recommended fusing is 1.2 A fuse.
Note: Grey dashed line symbolizes internal connection between E-Stop and binary outputs 1 and 2.
Note: For proper functionality of E-Stop, the terminal T049 must be always wired. Terminal can be connected to
battery+ or to terminal T03 (BATT+)

4.4.9 Emergency stop
The Emergency Stop function can be made in two ways:
Connecting a normally closed “mushroom-type” button to the binary input . This is a purely software solution.
A hard-wired solution, where the button also disconnects the power supply from the controller outputs.
Image 4.15 Hard-wired emergency stop
4.4.10 Analog inputs

The analog inputs are designed for resistive automotive type sensors like VDO or DATCON. The sensors are
connected either by one wire (the second pole is the sensor body) or by two wires.
In the case of grounded sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the engine body as near to the sensors as
possible.
In the case of isolated sensors, connect the AI COM terminal to the negative power supply terminal of the
controller as well as one pole of each sensor.

Analog inputs are typically used for: Oil Pressure, Coolant Temperature and Fuel Level. All of these parameters
are connected with relevant protections.
Image 4.16 Grounded sensors Image 4.17 Isolated sensors
Note: Schemes show only analog input connection overview, not actual wiring.
Note: The name, sensor characteristic and alarm types for each analog input have to be assigned during
configuration.
Analog inputs with voltage & current sensors

On each analog input, there is a possibility to connect voltage or current output sensor. Recommended wiring
connections for these measurements are bellow.
Voltage sensors
Image 4.18 Wiring of analog input with voltage sensor

Current sensors
Image 4.19 Wiring of analog input with current sensor
Analog inputs with tristate sensors

It is possible to use tristate sensor with each analog input. Select Sensor option Tristate and use this wiring:
Image 4.20 Tristate sensor
Tristate sensor (binary sensor with fail detection)

Below 750 Ω = Inactive
Between 750 Ω and 2400 Ω = Active
Below 10 Ω or Over 2400 Ω = sensor failure (wire shorted or interrupted)

Analog inputs with binary sensors
It is possible to use binary sensor with each analog input. Select Sensor option Binary and use this wiring:
Image 4.21 Binary sensor
Binary sensor (binary sensor without fail detection)

Below 750 Ω = Inactive
Between 750 Ω and 2400 Ω = Active
4.4.11 CAN bus and RS485 wiring

CAN bus wiring
The wiring of the CAN bus should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
The maximum length of the CAN bus depends on the communication speed. For a speed of 250 kbps, which
is used on the CAN1 bus (extension modules, ECU) and CAN2 bus, the maximum length is 200 m.
The bus must be wired in linear form with termination resistors at both ends. No nodes are allowed except on
the controller terminals.
Shielded cable1 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the CAN bus line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.
The CAN bus has to be terminated by 120 Ohm resistors at both ends use a cable with following
parameters:
Cable type Shielded twisted pair

Impedance 120 Ω
Propagation velocity ≥ 75% (delay ≤ 4.4 ns/m)
Wire crosscut ≥ 0.25 mm2
Attenuation (@1MHz) ≤ 2 dB/100 m
1Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.
Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close the
jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.
Image 4.22 CAN bus topology
For shorter distances (connection within one building)
Image 4.23 CAN bus wiring for shorter distances
Note: Shielding shall be grounded at one end only. Shielding shall not be connected to CAN COM terminal.

For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)
Image 4.24 CAN bus wiring for longer distances
① Recommended PT5-HF-12DC-ST1
RS485 wiring
The wiring of the RS485 communication should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close the
jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.
Standard maximum bus length is 1000 m.

Shielded cable2 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the RS485 line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.
The line has to be terminated by 120 Ohm resistors at both ends.
For shorter distances (connection within one building).
Image 4.25 RS485 wiring for shorter distances
1Protections recommended: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-12DC-ST with PT2x2-
BE (base element) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-012/2 R DJ

2Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)
Image 4.26 RS485 wiring for longer distances
① Recommended PT5HF-5DC-ST1
Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.
1Recommended protections: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-5DC-ST with PT2x2-
BE (base element)(or MT-RS485-TTL) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-006/2 R DJ

On board RS485 description
Balancing resistors
The transmission bus into the RS-485 port enters an indeterminate state when it is not being transmitted to. This
indeterminate state can cause the receivers to receive invalid data bits from the noise picked up on the cable.
To prevent these data bits, you should force the transmission line into a known state. By installing two 620 Ohm
balancing resistors at one node on the transmission line, you can create a voltage divider that forces the voltage
between the differential pair to be less than 200 mili-Volts, the threshold for the receiver. You should install
these resistors on only one node. The figure below shows a transmission line using bias resistors. Balancíng
resistors are placed directly on the PCB of controller. Use jumpers PULL UP/PULL DOWN to connect the
balancing resistors.
Image 4.27 Balancing resistors
Image 4.28 RS485 on board

4.4.12 USB
This is required for computer connection. Use the shielded USB A-B cable.
Image 4.29 USB connection
4.4.13 USB HOST

USB Flash Drive can be connected into USB A connector.
4.4.14 Ethernet
Ethernet Cat5/Cat6 cable fitted with the RJ45 connector can be connected to the ethernet interface.
4.4.15 AVR Interface

The output from the controller work in the following mode:
Output type: Voltage in range of -10 V to +10 V maximum
Maximum load current: 5 mA both sourcing and sinking.
Precision: 1% of set value +/-100 mV.
Resolution/minimum step: 3 mV approx.
Step response: less then 10 ms, measured between 10% and 90%
Output ripple: 30 mV max. at 50% of PWM
Galvanic insulation: YES
Pleas see chapter Voltage control outputs (page 107) (Analog output) for more information about set-up of
controller’s AVR.
Note: For the connection of individual AVRs please refer to concrete AVR manual.
IMPORTANT: Read carefully specific AVR instructions before connecting to controller.
4.4.16 Speed governor interface

The speed governor output is used to control the speed or the power of the engine via the remote speed
controlling input provided by the speed governor. The output from the controller can work in the following modes:
voltage mode -10 to 10 V (10k output resistance can be internally connected by jumper)
Precision: 1% of set value +/-100mV.
Resolution/minimum step: 3 mV approx.
Step response: less then 10 ms, measured between 10% and 90%.

Output ripple: 30 mV max. at 50% of pwm.
Galvanic insulation: NO
5 V PWM mode
PWM amplitude: 5 V.
PWM frequency: 500 to 2900 Hz defined by setpoint Speed Governor PWM Rate (page 347)
PWM Resolution: 14 bit.
Galvanic insulation: NO
Pleas see chapter Speed control outputs (page 105) (Analog output) for more information about set-up of
controller’s Speed governor.
Note: For the connection of individual speed governors please refer to concrete speed governor manual.
IMPORTANT: Read carefully specific Speed governor instructions before connecting to controller.
4.5 Plug-in module installation

4.5.1 Installation
Remove the back cover. To do this, press four holders which are located in corners.

After removing back cover insert the plug-in module. Plug-in module has to be inserted under holders. Start with
holders marked by symbol 1. On the controller are also arrows for better navigation. After inserting plug-in
module under holders 1 press it down to holders marked by symbol 2 which locks the module.
Insert the plug-in module under holders marked by symbol 1.
After locking the plug-in module into holders, place back the back cover (small cover for connectors has to be
removed from back cover). Finally insert the small cover for connectors. Small covers are unique for each plug-
in module.

4.6 Maintenance
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement
The internal backup battery lifetime is approx. 6 years. If replacement of backup batter is needed, follow these
instructions:
Connect the controller to a PC and save an archive for backup purposes (not necessary but recommended).
Disconnect all terminals from the controller and remove the controller from the switchboard.
Remove the back cover and all plug-in modules.
Release the rear cover using a flat screwdriver or another suitable tool.
The battery is located in a holder on the circuit board. Remove the old battery with a small sharp screwdriver
and push with a finger the new battery into the holder.
Put the rear cover back. Use slight pressure to lock the snaps into the housing. Pay attention that the cover
is in correct position and not upside down!
Put back the plugin modules and back cover.
Power the controller on, adjust date and time and check all setpoints.
6 back to Installation and wiring

5 Controller setup
5.1 Default configuration 53
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools connection 54
5.3 Functions 60
5.1 Default configuration

5.1.1 Default configuration
Binary inputs
Number Description Configured function

BIN1 Generator circuit breaker feedback GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 668)
BIN2 Mains circuit breaker feedback MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 672)
BIN3 Emergency stop button EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 665)
BIN4 Access lock keyswitch ACCESS LOCK (PAGE 615)
BIN5 Switch controller to OFF mode REMOTE OFF (PAGE 676)
BIN6 Switch controller to TEST mode REMOTE TEST (PAGE 678)
BIN7 Suppression of alarms SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 680)
BIN8 Free slot NOT USED (PAGE 673)
Binary outputs
Number Description Function

BOUT1 Starter motor control STARTER (PAGE 737)
BOUT2 Fuel solenoid valve FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 715)
BOUT3 Indication of breaker state GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 716)
BOUT4 Indication of breaker state MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 726)
BOUT5 Activation of any devices before start PRESTART (PAGE 732)
BOUT6 Gen-set can be connected to load READY TO LOAD (PAGE 734)
BOUT7 Indication of unconfirmed alarm ALARM (PAGE 695)
BOUT8 Free slot NOT USED (PAGE 731)
Analog inputs
Number Configured sensor Function

AIN1 VDO 10 Bar OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 774)
AIN2 VDO40-120°C COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 771)

AIN3 VDOLevel % FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 772)
AIN4 None NOT USED (PAGE 773)
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools

connection
5.2.1 USB 54
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 55
5.2.3 Ethernet 56
6 back to Controller setup

This chapter contains brief introduction into the specifics of firmware and archive upload and connection of
various PC tools to the controller. If you require detailed information on each PC tool please use the included
Help in those PC tools or download their Reference Guides.
5.2.1 USB
You may connect to the controller using the USB port. In this case standard USB A to B cable should be used.
Connection using InteliConfig
Image 5.1 First screen of InteliConfig - select connect to controller
Image 5.2 Second screen of InteliConfig - select detected controllers

Connection using WinScope
Image 5.3 WinScope screen - select direct connection
5.2.2 RS232/RS485
It is possible to connect to the controller using RS232 or RS485 direct connection (serial port or USB to
RS232/RS485 converter may be used). The following settings need to be checked in the controller:
COM1 Mode (page 466) = Direct
Controller Address (page 252) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool

Image 5.5 Second screen of InteliConfig - select Serial link
Image 5.6 WinScope screen - select direct connection
Note: Winscope supports only 19200, 38400, 57600 speeds.
5.2.3 Ethernet
It is possible to connect to the controller using ethernet port.
Direct connection
When you use direct connection the controller needs to be reachable directly from the PC you use (i.e. one LAN
or WAN without any firewalls and other points that may not allow the connection). The following settings need to
be checked in the controller:

Controller Address (page 252) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool.
IP Address Mode (page 255) can be set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service is available.
Otherwise it needs to be set to FIXED.
IP Address (page 256) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value.
Subnet Mask (page 256) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested.
Gateway IP (page 257) can be set here when it is used.

Image 5.8 Second screen of InteliConfig - select Internet/Ethernet
Image 5.9 WinScope screen
AirGate connection
You can use ComAp's AirGate service that allows you to connect to any controller via internet no matter what
are the restrictions of the local network (if the controller can connect to the internet AirGate service will work).
The following setpoints have to be adjusted:

Controller Address (page 252) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool.
IP Address Mode (page 255) can be set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service is available.
Otherwise it needs to be set to FIXED.
IP Address (page 256) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value.
Subnet Mask (page 256) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested.
Gateway IP (page 257) can be set here when it is used.
AirGate Connection (page 259) has to be set to Enabled.
AirGate Address (page 260) currently there is one AirGate server running at URL airgate.comap.cz (enter
this URL into the setpoint).

Image 5.11 Second screen of InteliConfig - select AirGate

WinScope doesn't support connection via AirGate.
5.3 Functions
5.3.1 Operating Modes 61
5.3.2 Engine start 63
5.3.3 Stabilization 68
5.3.4 Connecting to load 68
5.3.5 Multiple island operation 73
5.3.6 Parallel to mains operation - SPtM application 74
5.3.7 Parallel to mains operation - MINT application 77
5.3.8 AMF operation 77
5.3.9 Engine cool down and stop 79
5.3.10 Power management 79
5.3.11 Control groups 98

5.3.12 Distributed power management signals 99
5.3.13 Regulation loops 102
5.3.14 Speed/Load control 104
5.3.15 Voltage/PF control 107
5.3.16 Gen-set operation states 109
5.3.17 Alarm management 111
5.3.18 History log 118
5.3.19 Breaker control 119
5.3.20 Exercise timer 122
5.3.21 Rental Timers 129
5.3.22 Service timers 130
5.3.23 Analog switches 130
5.3.24 Additional running engine indications 132
5.3.25 Voltage phase sequence detection 132
5.3.26 Sensor curves 132
5.3.27 PLC 135
5.3.28 Aftertreatment Suppot 142
5.3.29 Geo-fencing 145
5.3.30 Mains decoupling protections 145
5.3.31 Droop 146
5.3.32 Alternate configuration 149
5.3.33 USB host 150
5.3.34 E-Stop 153
5.3.35 ECU Frequency selection 154
5.3.36 Mains import measurement 154
5.3.37 Load shedding 154
5.3.38 Peak shaving 156
6 back to Controller setup
5.3.1 Operating Modes

Selecting the operating mode is done through Left and Right buttons on the front panel or by changing the
Controller mode (page 249) setpoint (from the front panel or remotely).
Note: If this setpoint is configured as password-protected, the correct password must be entered prior to
attempting to change the mode.
Note: The mode cannot be changed if Access Lock input is active.
The following binary inputs can be used to force one respective operating mode independent of the mode
setpoint selection:
Remote OFF (page 676)
Remote TEST (page 678)
Remote MAN (page 675)
Remote AUTO (page 675)

If the respective input is active the controller will change the mode to the respective position according to the
active input. If multiple inputs are active, the mode will be changed according to priorities of the inputs. The
priorities match the order in the list above. If all inputs are deactivated, the mode will return to the original
position given by the setpoint.
OFF
No start of the gen-set is possible. If the gen-set is running, it is not possible to switch directly to OFF mode.
First you have to stop the engine. After that the controller will stay in Not ready status and cannot be started any
way. The MCB is closed permanently (MCB Opens On (page 325) = GenRun) or is open or closed according
to whether the mains is present or not (MCB Opens On (page 325) = MainsFail). No AMF or Power
management function will be performed. The buttons MCB , GCB , Start and Stop including the
appropriate binary inputs for external buttons are not active.
Note: When engine is running, it is not possible to switch gen-set to OFF mode
No system start activation is possible. If mains is healthy and MCB is opened, then is MCB tryed to close after
the delay given by setpoint MCB Close Delay. In case of mains fail and option MCB Open On - Mains Fail is
chosen then is MCB tryed to open. In MGCB application is MGCB opened in case is closed. No AMF or Power
management function will be performed. The buttons MCB , GCB , Start and Stop including the
appropriate binary inputs for external buttons are not active.
MAN
The engine can be started and stopped manually using the START and STOP buttons (or external buttons wired
to the appropriate binary inputs) in MAN mode.
When the engine is running and generator parameters are in the limits, GCB can be closed to a dead bus or
synchronization can be started by the GCB button.
Also MCB can be closed and opened manually using the MCB button, regardless of whether the mains are
present or not.
Controller does not respond to external signals and/or conditions. The gen-set is fully in manual control; there is
no automatic way to stop it (except protections). The gen-set stays running until STOP button is pressed.
Controller does not take place in Power management (page 79) in MINT application.
In MAN mode can be the system started by pressing the START button or by activating binary input Start
Button. If there is present Gen-set controller, their system start/stop is activated/deactivated via internal
communication line. In case of MCB application can be controlled only the MCB breaker by pressing the MCB
button or by activating the binary input MCB Button. In case of MGCB application the control of MCB breaker
and MGCB breaker is depending on the setting of Setpoint CB Control In MAN Mode. MGCB breaker can be
controlled also by pressing the MGCB button or by activating the binary input MGCB Button.
AUTO
Gen-set is controlled based on external signal (REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) ) or by conditions (AMF,
Power management system, …).
When one condition deactivates the engine does not stop if another condition for automatic starts is active.
The controller does not respond to buttons Start , Stop , MCB ON/OFF and GCB ON/OFF .

IMPORTANT: If a red alarm is present and the gen-set is in AUT mode, it can start by itself after all
red alarms become inactive and are acknowledged!!! To avoid this situation, adjust the setpoint
Reset To Manual (page 250) to the Enabled position.
System activation is based on external signal (REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) ) or by conditions (AMF,
Power management system, …).
When one condition deactivates will not be deactivated if another condition for automatic starts is active.
The controller does not respond to buttons Start , Stop , MCB ON/OFF and MGCB ON/OFF .
TEST
The behavior of the controller in TEST mode depends mainly on the setting of the setpoints and binary inputs.
TEST mode can be activated via front panel of controller or via binary input REMOTE TEST (PAGE 678).
The gen-set will be started when the controller is put to TEST mode and will remain running unloaded. If a mains
failure occurs, the MCB will be opened and after Open Transfer Min Break (page 350) the GCB will be closed
and the gen-set will supply the load. After the mains have recovered, the delay Mains Return Delay (page 319)
l will count down and if it elapses and the mains is still ok, the controller will transfer the load back to the mains
after Open Transfer Min Break (page 350) and the gen-set will remain running unloaded again until the mode
is changed.
The controller does not respond to buttons Start , Stop , MCB ON/OFF and GCB ON/OFF .
Behavior of TEST mode also depends on setpoints Transfer BusGen To Mains (page 352) and Transfer
Mains To Gen Bus (page 351) and on binary inputs FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 666) and FORCE PARALLEL (PAGE
666).
The system start is activated when the controller is put in to TEST mode.
MCB application - system start is active, if Gen-sets will be started their GCB will be closed in to the parallel
state.
MGCB application - system start is active, if Gen-sets will be started their GCB will be closed but MGCB stays
opened.
If mains failure occurs, the MCB is opened and in MGCB application will be the MGCB breaker closed.
After the mains return, the back synchronisation is activated and system is transfered back to the TEST mode if
the TEST request is still active.
The transfer is depending on the setting see Subgroup: Load Transfer on page 350.
5.3.2 Engine start

Diesel engine
After the command for start is issued (pressing Start button in MAN mode, auto start condition is fulfilled in
AUTO mode or controller is switched to TEST mode), outputs PRESTART (PAGE 732) and GLOW PLUGS
(PAGE 720) are energized for time period given by the setpoints Prestart Time (page 273) and Glow Plugs
Time (page 275).
After Prestart Time (page 273) and Glow Plugs Time (page 275), the output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 715)
is energized and after Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 276) the starter of motor is activated by energizing the
output STARTER (PAGE 737).

When one or more of following conditions are met, the starter output is de-energized:
The engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM (page 273), or
One of Additional running engine indications (page 132) signals becomes active.
The controller remains in the Starting phase until the engine speed exceeds the value of Starting RPM
(page 273), after that it is considered as started and the Idle period will follow.
The maximum duration that the output STARTER (PAGE 737) is energized is determined by the setpoint
Maximum Cranking Time (page 272). If the engine does not start within this period, the output STARTER
(PAGE 737) is de-energized and a pause with length determined by Cranking Fail Pause (page 272) will
follow. PRESTART (PAGE 732) and GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 720) outputs are active during the pause. After the
pause has elapsed, the next start attempt is executed. The number of start attempts is given by the setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 271).
Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 723) remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle Time (page
276).
After the idle period has finished, the output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 723) is activated and the start-up
sequence is finished. The Stabilization (page 68) phase follows.

Image 5.12 Flowchart of start of diesel engine

GAS engine
The setpoint Fuel Solenoid (page 271) has to be switched to the Gas position.
After the command for start is issued (pressing Start button in MAN mode, auto start condition is fulfilled in
AUTO mode or controller is switched to TEST mode), outputs PRESTART (PAGE 732) and GLOW PLUGS
(PAGE 720) are energized for time period given by the setpoints Prestart Time (page 273) and Glow Plugs
Time (page 275).
After Prestart Time (page 273) and Glow Plugs Time (page 275), starts countdown of Sd Ventilation
Time (page 280)
After Sd Ventilation Time (page 280), the starter of engine is activated by energizing the output STARTER
(PAGE 737).
When the engine speed exceeds 30RPM, the outputs FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 715) and IGNITION (PAGE 723)
are energized.
When the engine speed exceeds value of Starting RPM (page 273), the starter of engine is de-energized,
the engine is considered as started and the Idle period will follow.
IMPORTANT: Additional running engine indications (page 132) signals are not evaluated during the
start of a gas engine. The Pickup must be used in any case!
The maximum duration that the output STARTER (PAGE 737) is energized is determined by the setpoint
Maximum Cranking Time (page 272). If the engine does not start within this period, outputs STARTER
(PAGE 737) and FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 715) are de-energized and a pause with length determined by
Cranking Fail Pause (page 272) will follow. PRESTART (PAGE 732), GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 720) and IGNITION
(PAGE 723) outputs are active during the pause. After the pause has elapsed, the next start attempt is
executed. The number of start attempts is given by the setpoint Cranking Attempts (page 271).
Once the engine is started, the Idle period follows. The binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 723) remains
inactive (as it was during the start). The idle period duration is adjusted by the setpoint Idle Time (page
276).
After the idle period has finished, the output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 723) is activated and the start-up
sequence is finished. The Stabilization (page 68) phase follows.

Image 5.13 Flowchart of start of gas engine

5.3.3 Stabilization
When the Engine start (page 63) sequence is finished, the gen-set goes into the stabilization phase. There are
two timers (setpoints) in this phase:
Minimal Stabilization Time (page 278) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished.
Generator voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) and the GCB
cannot be closed even if the generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 279) starts to count down just after the idle period has finished.
Generator voltage and frequency are not checked (respective protections are not evaluated) but, opposite to
the previous timer, the GCB can be closed if generator voltage and frequency are within limits.
In situations where the GCB is closed automatically (AUTO, TEST modes), the closing of GCB or starting of
synchronization will occur in the first moment when the generator voltage and frequency will get into limits and
the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 278) has already elapsed.
In the event that the generator voltage or frequency are not within limits within the Maximal Stabilization Time
(page 279) period, the appropriate protection(s) will be activated and the gen-set will be cooled down and
stopped.
Note: The limits for the generator voltage and frequency are given by setpoints in the Group: Generator
settingsMains Settings (page 304).
Note: The value of the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 278) setpoint has to be lower than the value of
Maximal Stabilization Time (page 279) setpoint.
5.3.4 Connecting to load

When the Stabilization (page 68) phase is finished, the gen-set can be connected to the load.
The command for connecting the gen-set to the load is issued either automatically (AUTO, TEST modes) or
manually by pressing the GCB button. The following conditions must be valid:
The gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 278) timer has elapsed.
The gen-set voltage and frequency are within limits.
Note: The speed governor and AVR must be adjusted properly to achieve these limits as the controller does not
perform any regulation and the regulation outputs have constant values given by the Voltage Regulator Bias
(page 354) and Speed Governor Bias (page 346) setpoints.
There are two ways to connect the gen-set to the load (bus bar). This depends on the state of MCB FEEDBACK
(PAGE 672) and on the measured mains/bus voltage.
Connecting to dead bus

SPtM
If the MCB is open, the bus bar is considered as voltage-free and the GCB is closed without synchronization.
MINT
The measured bus voltage is also taken in account and it must be below 2% of the nominal bus voltage together
with the open MCB (evaluated by MCB Feedback (page 672)) and also others GCB have to be open to close
the GCB without synchronization.

Note: If the group of gen-sets is activated and multiple gen-sets have to start simultaneously and connect to
the empty bus bar, there is an internal logic to prevent closing of more GCBs to the bus bar at the same moment
without synchronization. One of the gen-sets will close the GCB, the others will wait and then they will
synchronize to the first one.
Note: There also is a protection of “Bus power loss sensing”. The “Bus Measure Error” is detected in MINT
application when the voltage on the controller’s bus terminals is out of limits 20 seconds after:
GCB (own) was closed in MAN or AUT mode
MCB (feedback) was closed in AUT mode
Any other GCB in power management group (on CAN bus) was closed.
The alarm is activated after 20s. However, the GCB (own) closing is blocked immediately for safety reasons.
This protection can avoid e.g. potential direct closing of GCB while the controller’s bus conductors are
unintentionally unplugged from the terminals.
Synchronization
Synchronization process
Behavior of synchronization process depends on, which breaker is used for synchronization and in which
Controller mode (page 249) is controller switched.
Note: When the controller starts to synchronize and the main measuring screen is displayed, it will be
automatically change to the synchroscope screen for the entire duration of synchronization. After
synchronization the synchroscope screen is automatically changed back to the main measuring screen. It is
also possible to change screens manually (arrows up and down) after displaying the synchroscope screen. In
this case there is no automatic return to the main measuring screen after synchronization is finished.
Synchronization via GCB in AUTO mode

Gen-set synchronization to the mains (common bus bar) via GCB (available for SPtM and MINT):
if the mains (bus) voltage or the mains (bus) frequency gets out of the limits then the synchronization
continues until the mains fail is confirmed. Then:
In SPtM - MCB is opened and GCB is closed.
In MINT - Bus measurement error alarm is issued and controller goes to slow stop.
if the gen-set voltage or frequency gets out of the limits during the synchronization the synchronization
process is interrupted. The synchronization starts again when gen-set parameters gets restored. the
synchronization timeout starts count down again.
If the synchronization timeout gets elapsed the slow stop protection gets active.
Synchronization via GCB in MAN mode

Gen-set synchronization to the mains (common bus bar) via GCB (available for SPtM and MINT):
Behavior is exactly the same as in AUTO mode - but the synchronization does not start again automatically
when parameters of the gen-set gets out of limits and back. The breaker control button must be pressed
again.
When the GCB button is pressed during the synchronization, then the synchronization process is
interrupted.
Synchronization via MCB in AUTO mode

Gen-set synchronization to the mains (common bus bar) via MCB (available only for SPtM):

if the mains (bus) voltage or the Mains frequency gets out of the limits during synchronization, then the
synchronization process is interrupted and can continue again when mains parameters gets restored after
Mains Return Delay (page 319).
if the gen-set voltage or frequency gets out of the limits during the synchronization, the synchronization
process continues until the generator parameters fail is confirmed.
If the synchronization timeout gets elapsed the Wrn Reverse Synchro Fail (page 810) protection gets
active and GCB stays closed. Synchronization is stopped.
Synchronization via MCB in MAN mode

Gen-set synchronization to the mains (common bus bar) via MCB (available only for SPtM):
Behavior is exactly the same as in AUTO mode - but the synchronization does not start again automatically
when parameters of the mains gets out of limits and back. The breaker control button must be pressed
again.
When the MCB button is pressed during the synchronization, then the synchronization process is
interrupted.
Synchronization types
There are two types of synchronization. Type of synchronization is adjusted via setpoint Synchronization
Type (page 358).
Phase match
The phase match synchronization consists of voltage matching and frequency/angle matching. The maximum
duration of synchronization is given by the setpoint Synchronization Timeout (page 358). If the
synchronization is not successful within this period of time, the STP Synchronization Fail (page 837) alarm
will be issued.
Voltage matching
The gen-set bus voltage is regulated to match the mains/bus voltage with tolerance given by the setpoint
Voltage Window (page 359). The regulation is adjusted by the setpoints Voltage Gain (page 356) and
Voltage Int (page 356).
Frequency/angle matching
The gen-set bus frequency is regulated to match the mains/bus frequency first. The frequency regulation loop is
active (setpoints Frequency Gain (page 347) and Frequency Int (page 348)). Once the frequency is matched,
the regulation loop is switched to match the angle (setpoint Angle Gain (page 348)). When the angle is
matched with tolerance +/- Phase Window (page 359) for a time given by the setpoint Dwell Time (page 359)
and the voltage is matched too, then the GCB or MGCB is closed.
Note: The matching loops will continue to run even if the GCB or MGCB close command has been already
issued until the controller receives GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 668) or MGCB Feedback or a GCB or MGCB fail
alarm occurs. After the feedback has been received, the control loops are switched to load and power factor
loops or load and power factor sharing respectively.
Slip synchronization
The slip synchronizing is based on frequency/angle matching. The maximum duration of synchronizing is given
by the setpoint Synchronization Timeout (page 358). If the synchronizing is not successful within this period
of time, the Sync Timeout alarm will be issued.
The Gen-set frequency is regulated to match the mains/bus frequency + Slip Frequency (page 360) value and
the window is set by setpoint Slip Frequency Window (page 360). When the generator frequency reaches

(Mains/Bus Frequency + Slip frequency) value regulation loop is stopped (output is frozen at the actual value). If
the generator frequency remains inside the window for the time longer than setpoint Dwell Time (page 359) the
controller will allow GCB closing. The controller calculates periodically so called preclosing angle (based on the
actual value Slip Frequency (page 570) and CB closing delay given by the setpoint CB Latency). When the
preclosing angle is reached the controller issues CB closing command. The breaker will close and CB feedback
confirms that to the controller. When the breaker is closed the controller goes to parallel and activates regulation
loops again (parallel to Mains regulation loop).
Image 5.14 Slip synchronization
If the generator frequency goes out of the window (either because generator frequency changes or Mains/Bus
frequency changes or setpoint Slip Frequency Window (page 360) changes) the controller will reactivate
regulation loop and try to reach the target value again. The sync timeout timer runs regardless of this. If the
generator frequency reaches the target frequency again the regulations are frozen and if the generator frequency
remains in the window for the time longer than setpoint Dwell Time (page 359) the controller will continue in the
standard sequence as seen in the previous case. *If the sync timeout elapses the controller will immediately
stop synchronization.

The window is limited by the actual measured Mains/Bus frequency if one of the window limits is below this
value (e.g. for setting where setpoint Slip Frequency (page 570) is set to 0.1Hz and setpoint Slip Frequency
Window (page 360) is set to 0.5Hz).
Slip synchronization has a dead band. When the dead band is reached the frequency regulation is disabled.
Once it is disabled it will be enabled again only when the frequency goes out of the slip frequency window. Dead
band is introduced to allow the controller to detect the match.
Image 5.17 Slip synchonization - deadband

Note: Due to the nature of this function it is possible that in limit cases the gen-set controller will regulate the
generator frequency outside of protection limits. Example: Mains/Bus frequency is high but within its protection
limits (e.g. 50.9Hz, limit is 51Hz). Slip Frequency (page 360) is set to 0.5Hz. This will cause regulation loop of
the gen-set controller to push the gen-set frequency to 51.4Hz and eventually the controller will issue
overfrequency delay. It is recommended to set the setpoint Slip Frequency (page 360) as low as possible that
still enables succesfull synchronization. This minimizes the risk of this problem happening. Furthermore when
slip synchronization is used it is recommended to set Mains/Bus Frequency protection limits to more rigid
values than the generator frequency protection limits. In this case the setpoint Slip Frequency (page 360) can
be set to 0.1Hz and the Mains/Bus Frequency overfrequency protection limit is set to 50.9Hz instead of 51Hz.
This will ensure that problematic state cannot be reached.
Note:
5.3.5 Multiple island operation

This chapter describes the situation where multiple gen-sets are running parallel to each other but not with
mains. This situation will occur either when:
The common bus bar is dead due to opened MCB or there are no mains at all and the group of gen-sets has
been activated, or
The group was running parallel to mains and the MCB has been opened.
IMPORTANT: The controller in MINT application does not control the MCB! Only the MCB position
is evaluated from the binary input MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 672) and the position is the basic source of
information for switching between island and parallel to mains operation.
If the bus bar is empty, the first gen-set will close its GCB without synchronization. Following gen-sets will
synchronize to the already energized bus bar. In the event that multiple gen-sets start simultaneously and the
bus bar is empty, the system will prevent closing of multiple GCBs to the bus bar without synchronization.
Instead of this, one of the gen-sets will close the GCB and energize the bus bar and the others will wait and then
synchronize to the bus bar.
When a stop command is received, e.g. from the power management or binary input REMOTE START /STOP
(PAGE 677) is deactivated or the STOP button is pressed, the GCB will be opened and the gen-set will go to cool
down phase.
Behavior of controllers is adjusted via Power management (page 79) settings. Please see this chapter for
more information.

5.3.6 Parallel to mains operation - SPtM application
After the gen-set has been synchronized to the mains, the parallel to mains operation follows. It consists of the
following phases:
Ramping the power

Power up
The first phase of the parallel to mains operation is the ramping of the gen-set up to the desired power level. The
speed of the ramp is given by the setpoint Load Ramp (page 353). The setpoint adjusts the ramp time for a
change from 0% to 100% of nominal power.
Power down
When a stop command is received the gen-set load is ramped down before opening the GCB. The ramp speed
is given by the setpoint Load Ramp (page 353) and the end level is given by Unload MGCB Open
LevelGenerator Unload GCB Open Level (page 352).
When the GCB button is pressed, the gen-set load is ramped down before opening the GCB as well. But after
the GCB has been opened, the gen-set remains running until a stop command comes or the GCB is pressed
again to reclose the GCB.
Load control
Load control ensures that the gen-set keep the certain load in parallel to mains operation (MCB Feedback
(page 672) and GCB Feedback (page 668) = active).
There are available two modes of load control. Type of control is adjusted via setpoint Load Control PTM
(page 230).
Note: In both modes, the lower level of the power is always limited by the setpoint Minimal Power PTM (page
305). If the requested load (given by the active load control mode, e.g. Baseload, Import/Export) is below this
limit the requested load is limited to the level adjusted by this setpoint.
Baseload
Load Control PTM (page 230) = Baseload. Genset produces amount of the power given by setpoint Baseload
(page 233). The rest of power is supplied from the mains or exported to the mains (depends on proportions of
load and Baseload (page 233) setpoint). Even in baseload control mode can be the Import/Export limited. This
function can be activated by setpoint Import/Export Limitation (page 235) = Enabled. Then the request for the
power of the genset operating in baseload can be limited to prevent the Import/Export go below the limit given by
setpoint Import Load (page 234).
Example: Baseload = 1000 kW, load = 700 kW, Import load = 100 kW. Then the Baseload request will be
limited to 600 kW to prewent the Import power go below 100 kW.
Example: Baseload = 1000 kW, load = 700 kW, Import load = -100 kW. Then the Baseload request will be
limited to 800 kW to prewent the Import power go below -100 kW (actually it is limitation of the export).
Import/Export
Load Control PTM (page 230) = Imp/Exp. Gen-set produces the certain amount of power to keep constant
import/export from the mains regardless the demand of the load. The requested import/export is given by
setpoint Import Load (page 234). If the value of the setpoint is >0 the power is imported from the mains, if
setpoint value is <0, then thepower is exported to the mains.

PF control
PF control ensures that the gen-set keep the certain reactive load in parallel to mains operation (MCB
Feedback (page 672) and GCB Feedback (page 668) = active).
There are available two modes of PF control. Type of control is adjusted via setpoint PF Control PTM (page
231).
Base PF
The power factor on the gen-set is kept on the level given by the setpoint Base Power Factor (page 233)
regardless the load demand. The rest of demanded reactive power is supplied from the mains. Values >1 means
that capacitive reactive power is supposed to be imported from mains, values <1 means that inductive reactive
power is imported from the mains.
Import/Export
Gen-set produces the certain amount of reactive power to keep constant PF imported from the mains regardless
the demand of the load. The requested power factor import is given by setpoint Import PF (page 234). Values
>1 means that the gen-set is pushing the capacitive power to the system (sytem Gen-set - Load- Mains) ,
values <1 means that the gen-set is pushing the inductive power to the system.
Transfers of load
Type of transfer of load between mains and gen-set and vice versa is adjusted via setpoints Transfer BusGen
To Mains (page 352) and Transfer Mains To Gen Bus (page 351).
Types of transfers
Transfer of the load from generator to mains and vice versa without parallel work and
Open synchronization (one breaker opens and second is closed - checking feedbacks). The
setpoint Open Transfer Min Break (page 350) sets the minimal duration of break.
Transfer of the load from generator to mains and vice versa with synchronization and
parallel work. The maximal time of parallel work is given by setpoint Close Transfer Max
Close Only
Duration (page 350).
In case of synchronization fail, MCB stays close and gen-set is stopped.
Transfer of the load from generator to mains and vice versa with synchronization and
parallel work. The time of parallel work is given by setpoint Close Transfer Max
Close Primarily
In case of synchronization fail, open transfer is done.
Transfer of the load from generator to mains and vice versa with parallel work and soft
loading/unloading of the gen-set. This function is proceeded like the closed transfer, but
there is time limitation of loading/unloading of the gen-set adjusted via setpoint Load
Ramp (page 353). The transfer is succeed only when the gen-set is fully
Soft Transfer
loaded/unloaded (level of load when mains is considered as unloaded - gen-set is loaded
is adjusted via setpoint Mains Unload MCB Open Window (page 353)), level of load
when gen-set is considered as unloaded is adjusted via setpoint Unload MGCB Open
LevelGenerator Unload GCB Open Level (page 352)).

Transfer of load in MAN mode
Behavior of transfer of load in MAN mode is adjusted via setpoint CB Control In MAN Mode (page 238). For
details see the setpoint description.
Transfer of load in AUTO mode

Behavior of transfer of load in AUTO mode is affected by binary inputs FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 666), FORCE
PARALLEL (PAGE 666) and REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677).
When more binary inputs are activated at the same time, their priority is shown in the list below:
FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 666) (highest priority).
REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677).
FORCE PARALLEL (PAGE 666) (lowest priority).
Note: AMF function has the highest priority (if it is enabled).
Logical
binary AUTO mode TEST mode
input
When activated: The gen-set is started anyway due to the
starts gen-set TEST mode.
the transfer of load from mains to When activated:
FORCE
generator is done the transfer of load from mains to
ISLAND
When deactivated: generator is done
(PAGE 666)
the transfer of load from generator to When deactivated:
mains is done the transfer of load from generator to
cooling and stopping of the gen-set mains is done
When activated:
The gen-set is started anyway due to the
starts gen-set
TEST mode.
if mains parameters ok - synchronize,
REMOTE When activated:
run in parallel
START /S if mains parameters ok -
if mains parameters not ok - run in
TOP (PAGE synchronize, run in parallel
island
677) When deactivated:
When deactivated:
unloading, of the gen-set, opening
unloading (if gen-set was in parallel),
GCB
cooling and stopping of the gen-set
When activated: The gen-set is started anyway due to the
check mains parameters - if not ok no TEST mode.
action, if ok the procedure follows When activated:
FORCE starts the gen-set, synchronize, check mains parameters - if not ok
PARALLEL parallel operation no action, if ok the procedure follows
(PAGE 666) in case of mains fail - gen-set is synchronize, parallel operation
stopped (if AMF function is disabled, When deactivated:
otherwise it goes to island operation) unloading, of the gen-set, opening
When deactivated: GCB

Logical
binary AUTO mode TEST mode
input
unloading, cooling and stopping of the
gen-set
Type of transfer of load between mains and gen-set and vice versa is adjusted via setpoints Transfer BusGen
To Mains (page 352) and Transfer Mains To Gen Bus (page 351).
5.3.7 Parallel to mains operation - MINT application

If the MCB is closed (MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 672) is present) and the gen-set has been synchronized to the bus
bar, the parallel to mains operation will follow. It consists of the following phases:
Ramping the power

Power up
The first phase of the parallel to mains operation is the ramping of the gen-set up to the desired power level
derived from the #System BaseLoad (page 235) or up to the load given by load sharing with other gen-sets
connected to the bus bar. The speed of the ramp is given by the setpoint Load Ramp (page 353). The setpoint
adjusts the ramp time for a change from 0% to 100% of nominal power.
Power down
When a stop command is received the gen-set load is ramped down before opening the GCB. The ramp speed
is given by the setpoint Load Ramp (page 353) and the end level is given by Unload MGCB Open
LevelGenerator Unload GCB Open Level (page 352).
When the GCB button is pressed, the gen-set load is ramped down before opening the GCB as well. But after
the GCB has been opened, the gen-set remains running until a stop command comes or the GCB is pressed
again to reclose the GCB.
Load control
If MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 672) is active (parallel to mains operation) the load of group of the gen-sets is
controlled to reach the power defined by setpoint #System BaseLoad (page 235). Each loaded gen-set takes
equal part (relative to their nominal power) from #System BaseLoad (page 235) requested value. The load is
regulated locally in each controller by load control regulation loop, load-sharing regulation loop is not active. The
setpoint #System BaseLoad (page 235) is also used for determining which gen-sets have to run or not. Control
is adjusted via setpoints Load Gain (page 348) and Load Int (page 349).
PF control
If MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 672) is active (parallel to mains operation) the value of PF (power factor) of group of
the gen-sets is controlled to reach the PF defined by setpoint #System Power Factor (page 236). The PF is
regulated locally in each controller by PF control regulation loop, VAr-sharing regulation loop is not active.
Control is adjusted via setpoints PF Gain (page 356) and PF Int (page 357).
5.3.8 AMF operation

The “AMF function” represents the automatic start in the event that the mains have failed and stop after the
mains have been restored. The automatic start can be enabled or disabled by binary inputs AMF START BLOCK

(PAGE 615) or MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 671).
Note: The AMF function works only in AUTO mode.
Mains failure detection

The mains are considered as faulty when one or more of the following conditions are valid:
The mains voltage is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains Undervoltage (page 321) and Mains
Overvoltage (page 320) for a time period longer than Mains < > Voltage Delay (page 321).
The mains frequency is out of the limits given by the setpoints Mains Underfrequency (page 322) and
Mains Overfrequency (page 322) for a time period longer than Mains < > Frequency Delay (page 323).
The MCB close command was not successful and the alarm Wrn MCB Fail (page 809) was not reset.
Phase rotation is incorrect.
The mains import is higher than limit given by setpoints Overload BOC (page 304) for a time longer than
Overload Delay (page 304).
The mains current is higher than limit given by setpoint Short Circuit BOC (page 305) for a time longe than
Short Circuit BOC MPR Delay (page 305).
The IDMT protection is activated due to overcrossing the IDMT curve set by setpoints IDMT Overcurrent
Delay (page 306).
Healthy mains detection

The mains are considered to be healthy when all of following conditions are valid:
The mains voltage is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains Undervoltage (page 321) and Mains
Overvoltage (page 320).
The mains frequency is within the limits given by the setpoints Mains Underfrequency (page 322) and
Mains Overfrequency (page 322).
The alarm Wrn MCB Fail (page 809) is not active (if MCB feedback is active). This condition is not required
if MCB is open (MCB feedback is inactive).
Phase rotation is correct.
The AMF procedure

When the mains failure is detected, the following steps are performed:
If the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 325) is set to Mains Fail, the MCB is opened.
The timer for automatic start of the gen-set Emergency Start Delay (page 319) begins to count down.
After the timer has elapsed, the gen-set is started.
Note: The automatic start of the gen-set due to AMF function can be disabled by the binary inputs AMF START
BLOCK (PAGE 615) or MAINS FAIL BLOCK (PAGE 671).
If the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 325) is set to Gen Run, the MCB is opened once the generator
voltage is within limits (after Minimal Stabilization Time (page 278) elapses).
Note: If the mains are restored to health and the gen-set is still not connected to the load, the controller
interrupts the startup process and closes back the MCB.
Note: Signal Gen Run is sent to InteliMains controller through internal distributed signal.

After Open Transfer Min Break (page 350) elapses, the GCB and MGCB (in case of MGCB application) is
closed and the gen-set begins to supply the load.
After the mains restored to normal, the timer Mains Return Delay (page 319) begins to count down.
Transition of load back to mains is adjusted via setpoint Transfer BusGen To Mains (page 352). Behavior
of transition is also is affected by binary inputs FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 666), FORCE PARALLEL (PAGE 666)
and REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677). See more in Transfer of load in AUTO mode (page 76) chapter.
IMPORTANT: Controller has this behavior only in AUTO mode!
5.3.9 Engine cool down and stop

The cool down phase follows after the stop command has been issued and the GCB has been opened.
Duration of the cool down phase is determined by the setpoint Cooling Time (page 281).
Cooling is performed either at nominal speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are evaluated) or
at idle speed (generator voltage and frequency protections are not evaluated). Selection of the speed is done
by the setpoint Cooling Speed (page 280).
The cool down can be finished manually in MAN mode by pressing the STOP button.
If a new start request comes, the cool down will be interrupted and the gen-set will go back to the
stabilization phase. If the cooling was at nominal speed, the stabilization timers will not count down again so
the GCB is ready to be closed (after 2 seconds delay).
When the cool down is finished, the output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 715) is de-energized and STOP SOLENOID
(PAGE 738) is energized. The engine will stop within the time period determined by the setpoint Stop Time
(page 281). If the engine does not stop within this time, the alarm Wrn Stop Fail (page 811) will be issued.
The output STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 738) is energized until the engine is stopped, but at least for the duration of
Stop Time (page 281). If the Stop Time (page 281) has elapsed and the engine has still not stopped, the STOP
SOLENOID (PAGE 738) is de-energized for 5 s and then energized again for Stop Time (page 281) and this
repeats until the engine is stopped.
Stopped gen-set evaluation

The gen-set is considered as stopped when all of following conditions are valid:
The engine speed is lower than 2 RPM.
The generator voltage in all phases is lower than 10 V.
None of Additional running engine indications (page 132) signals is active.
5.3.10 Power management

IMPORTANT: Power management is relevant only for MINT application.
IMPORTANT: The gen-set will take part of the power management (= will be active) only if the
controller is in AUTO mode!
The Power management function decides how many gen-sets should run and selects particular gen-sets to run.
The power management is applicable in cases multiple gen-sets run in parallel to mains or in the island
operation. The function is based on the load evaluation in order to provide enough of available running power.
Since it allows the system to start and stop gen-sets based on the load demand, it can vastly improve the
system fuel efficiency. In other words, an additional gen-set starts when the load of the system raises above
certain level. The additional gen-set stops, when the load of the system drops down below a certain level. The
process of determining gen-set start and stop is done in each controller; there is no "master slave" system.

Therefore, the system is very robust and resistant to failures of any unit in the system. Each of the controllers
can be switched off without influencing the whole system. Except the situation the respective gen-set is not
available for the power management.
The power management evaluates so called load reserve. The load reserve is calculated as difference between
actual load and nominal power of running gen-sets. The reserve is calculated as absolute value (in kW / kVA) or
relatively to the nominal power of gen-set(s) (in %). The setpoint #Power Management Mode (page 333) is
used to select the absolute or relative mode.
The automatic priority swapping function focuses on efficient run of gen-set in regards to running hours and gen-
set size.
IMPORTANT: The function of the controller is designed to handle the maximum sum of nominal
power at 32000 kW (or 3200,0 with decimal number).
Example: There are 20 gen-sets each with 1000 kW of nominal power. The sum of the nominal power is
20000 kW. Therefore the decimal power format in 0.1 kW cannot be used because the sum exceeds 32000.
Therefore power format in kW needs to be chosen.
Basic power management

The setpoint Power Management (page 332) enables and disables the gen-set to be active within the power
management and makes automatic load dependent starts and stops. If the power management is disabled, the
start and stop of the gen-set do not depend on the load of the group. If the gen-set remains in AUTO mode, the
running condition depends only on the Logical binary inputs REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677).
The Logical binary inputs REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) requests the system to start or stop. If the input is
not active, the system stops with delay #System Stop Delay (page 335) after the input has been deactivated
and will not start again if in AUTO mode. If the input is activated again, the delay #System Start Delay (page
334) starts to count down. Once the delay elapsed, the system is activated and can be started by the power
management. In other words, the power management is activated only if the Logical binary inputs REMOTE
START /STOP (PAGE 677) is activated, the option of setpoint Power Management (page 332) = ENABLED and
the AUTO mode is selected.
Note: The gen-set performs load and VAR sharing whenever it is connected to the bus bar i.e. it is independent
on whether the controller is in AUTO or MAN mode or whether the power management is active or not.
Function of power management can be temporarily blocked after REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) activation a
count down of #System Start Delay (page 334). The delay is given by setpoint Power Management Delay
(page 332). In this delay all gen-sets where power management is enabled are running. After this period
elapses, only the gen-set(s) needed according to the Power Management calculation stay running and the rest
is stopped.
Principle of power management

Internal conditions based on remaining load reserves and priorities are evaluated once a delay is elapsed. If the
load reserve is insufficient the gen-set is started after delay given by the setpoint #Next Engine Start Delay
(page 340) is elapsed. Once the gen-set runs the controller evaluates stopping conditions based on load
reserves and priorities. If the reserve is sufficient enough to stop a particular gen-set, it is stopped after delay
given by the setpoint #Next Engine Stop Delay (page 340) is elapsed. All the time the system stop condition –
i.e. the Logical binary inputs REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) deactivated – is evaluated as well. Once the
delay given by the setpoint #System Stop Delay (page 335) has elapsed all gen-sets in AUTO mode are
stopped. Following figure depicts the system activation and deactivation logic.

Setpoint #Overload Next Start Delay (page 341) is used in case that #Overload Next Start Protection (page
341) is enabled and gen-sets are running at #Overload Next Start Level (page 341) or more of their nominal
power.
Load reserve
The power management is based on the load reserve concept. The load reserve is defined as a difference of the
running nominal power of the group within power management and the total load of the system. There are two
ways how to determine the load reserve. The absolute power management allows the system to keep the load
reserve higher or equal to value in kW given by a relevant setpoint. The relative power management assures
that load reserve is kept higher or equal to relative portion in % of the nominal power of group (i.e. running gen-
sets active in power management) given by a relevant set-point. Depending of the situation, load reserves are
calculated differently in two cases:

Case #1
This case is used in island operation.
Reserve Actual Reserve Start condition Stop condition

ARstrt = ∑PgNom - ∑PgAct ARstrt < ARstp >
Absolute kW
ARstp = ∑Pg*Nom - ∑PgAct #LoadResStrt #LoadResStop
RRstrt = [(∑PgNom - ∑PgAct) / ∑PgNom].100% RRstrt < RRstp >
Relative %
RRstp = [(∑Pg*Nom - ∑PgAct) / ∑Pg*Nom].100% #%LdResStrt #%LdResStop
Case #2
This case is used in parallel to mains operation.
Reserve Actual Reserve Start condition Stop condition

ARstrt = ∑PgNom - BaseLoad ARstrt < ARstp >
Absolute kW
ARstp = ∑Pg*Nom - BaseLoad #LoadResStrt #LoadResStop
RRstrt = [(∑PgNom - BaseLoad) / ∑PgNom].100% RRstrt < RRstp >
Relative %
RRstp = [(∑Pg*Nom - BaseLoad) / ∑Pg*Nom].100% #%LdResStrt #%LdResStop
List of abbreviations:
ARstrt .. Actual Absolute reserve in kW or kVA - for engine start calculation.
ARstp .. Actual Absolute reserves in kW or kVA - for engine stop calculation.
RRstrt .. Actual Relative reserve in % - for engine start calculation.
RRstp .. Actual Relative reserves in % - for engine stop calculation.
ΣPgNom .. Sum of Nominal power of all gen-sets on the bus.
ΣPg*Nom .. Sum of Nominal power of all gen-sets on the bus apart of the one, which is going to be stopped.
ΣPgAct .. Sum of Actual power of all gen-sets on the bus = system load.
BaseLd .. Baseload is given by the setpoint #System BaseLoad (page 235)
Note: System starting sequences may be very different due to their complexity (i.e. gen-sets which do not take
part in power management, various nominal powers etc.). Each system should be considered individually.
Starting sequence
As written above, the power management is based on the load evaluation in order to provide enough of available
running power. An additional gen-set starts when the load of the system raises above certain level to keep the
load reserve big enough. Following figure depicts the situation when an additional gen-set is requested to join
the already running gen-set(s) to the bus.

Image 5.18 Start sequence of power management
As shown above, the load of the system has increased above the level defined by the start condition – i.e. the
load reserve is not sufficient as required by the appropriate setpoint. Further explanation is provided in chapters
Absolute power management (page 84) and Relative power management (page 87).
The level is illustrated by the green dashed line. If the load reserve keeps insufficient for longer time than defined
by the setpoint #Next Engine Start Delay (page 340), the next gen-set is actually started. The standard
starting sequence follows. Once the synchronization procedure is done, the GCB breaker is closed and the gen-
set power is ramping up. Once loaded, the system load reserve is raised and becomes sufficient again. Please
note the sum of nominal power of all gen-sets on the bus is increased by the nominal power of the additional
gen-set.
Stopping sequence
As it is written above, the power management is based on the load evaluation in order to provide enough of
available running power. An additional gen-set stops when the load of the system drops below certain level to
avoid inefficient run of the gen-set. Following figure depicts the situation when a gen-set is requested to stop
due to the power management.

Image 5.19 Stopping sequence of power management
As shown above, the system load has decreased below the level defined by the stop condition – i.e. the load
reserve is over a limit given by the appropriate setpoint. Further explanation is provided in chapters Absolute
power management (page 84) and Relative power management (page 87).
The level is illustrated by the red dashed line. If the load reserve keeps over this limit for longer time than defined
by setpoint #Next Engine Stop Delay (page 340), the next gen-set is actually requested to stop. Once the
gen-set is unloaded, the GCB breaker is opened. Please note the sum of nominal power of all gen-sets on the
bus is decreased by the nominal power of the stopped gen-set. The cooling sequence follows before the gen-set
is actually stopped. The gen-set is ready to be started if the system load increases again.
Absolute power management

The power management based on absolute load reserves can be successfully used in cases the load portions
are similar to the gen-set capacity or even bigger. The goal of the absolute reserve mode is to provide the same
load reserve all the time independently on how many gen-sets are currently running. The mode perfectly fits for
industrial plants with large loads.
The absolute power management guarantees adjustable load reserve in kW. This mode is active when #Power
Management Mode (page 333) is set to ABS [kW] mode.

Image 5.20 Power management based on absolute load reserve
Example: An example of absolute power management is shown on the figure below. There are three gen-
sets with following choice of setpoints:
#Power #Priority #Starting #Stopping

Nominal Power
Gen-set management Priority Auto Load Load
power management
mode Swap Reserve X Reserve X
Gen-set
200 kW ENABLED ABS (kW) 1 DISABLED 100 kW 125 kW
#1
Gen-set
#2
Gen-set
1 000 kW ENABLED ABS (kW) 3 DISABLED 100 kW 125 kW
#3

Image 5.21 Absolute power management example
As it is shown on both figures above, the additional gen-set is added once the actual load reserve is below the
level given by the appropriate setpoint of load reserve. The additional gen-set is removed once the actual load
reserve is above the level set by appropriate setpoint of load reserve.
The green dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional gen-set is requested to start. This value
of the load value is linked with the setpoint #Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 335) (or other selected reserve
set) in following way:
Sum of nominal power for start - #Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 335) (or other selected reserve set) = value
of load when additional gen-set requested to start (e.g.: 700 kW – 100 kW = 600 kW).
The red dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional gen-set is requested to stop. This value of
the load value is linked with the setpoint #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 336) (or other selected reserve set)
in following way:
Sum of nominal power for stop - #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 336) (or other selected reserve set) = value
of load when additional gen-set requested to stop (e.g.: 700 kW – 125 kW = 575 kW).

There are 2 sets of setpoints for starting and stopping gen-sets in absolute power management.
#Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 335) and #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 336)
#Starting Load Reserve 2 (page 337) and #Stopping Load Reserve 2 (page 338) considered if binary
input LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 670) is activated
Note: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same load reserve set
selected.
Relative power management

The power management based on relative load reserves perfectly fits to those applications with such load
portions connected to the group at once are much lower than the gen-set nominal power. This mode helps to
achieve the maximal lifetime of the gen-sets, as they can be operated within optimal load range. The maximal
size of the load connected at once depends on number of actually working gen-sets. The more gen-sets are
connected to the bus bar the bigger load portion can be connected at once.
The relative power management guarantees that the engines are not continuously loaded more than to a certain
level. This mode is active when #Power Management Mode (page 333) is set to REL [%] mode.
Image 5.22 Power management based on relative load reserve

Example: An example of relative power management is shown on the figure below. There are three gen-sets
with following choice of setpoints:

Nominal Power
Gen-set management Priority Auto Rel Load Rel Load
power management
Gen-set
200 kW ENABLED REL (%) 1 DISABLED 35 % 40 %
#1
Gen-set
500 kW ENABLED REL (%) 2 DISABLED 35 % 40 %
#2
Gen-set
1 000 kW ENABLED REL (%) 3 DISABLED 35 % 40 %
#3
Image 5.23 Relative power management example

As it is shown on both figures above, the additional gen-set is added once the actual load reserve is below the
level given by the appropriate setpoint of load reserve. The additional gen-set is removed once the actual load
reserve is above the level set by appropriate setpoint of load reserve.
The green dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional gen-set is requested to start. This value
of the load value is linked with the setpoint #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 336) (or other selected
reserve set) in following way:
(100 % - #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 336) (or other selected reserve set)) * Sum of Nominal power =
Value of load when additional gen-set requested to start in kW (in % of nominal power), e.g.: (100 % – 35 %) *
700 kW = 455 kW (65 % of nominal power).
The red dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional gen-set is requested to stop. This value of
the load value is linked with the setpoint #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 337) (or other selected reserve
set) in following way:
(100 % - #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 337) (or other selected reserve set)) * Sum of Nominal power =
Value of load when additional gen-set requested to stop in kW (in % of nominal power), e.g.: (100 % – 40 %) *
700 kW = 420 kW (60 % of nominal power).
There are 2 sets of setpoint for starting and stopping gen-sets in relative power management.
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 336) and #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 337)
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 338) and #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 339) considered if
binary input LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 670) is activated
Note: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same load reserve set
selected.
Priorities
The priority of the gen-set within the group is given by the setpoint Priority (page 333). Lower number
represents "higher" priority, i.e. a gen-set with lower number starts before another one with higher number. In
other words, the setpoint Priority (page 333) means order in which gen-sets are started and connected to the
bus. An example is shown on the figure below. There are four gen-sets with following choice of setpoints:

Nominal Power
Gen-set management Priority Auto Load Load
power management
Gen-set
#1
Gen-set
#2
Gen-set
#3
Gen-set
#4

Image 5.24 Example of priorities in power management
By choosing the setpoint Priority (page 333) = 1, the gen-set #4 is running all the time in the example shown on
the figure above (AUTO mode selected, Power management enabled and LBI REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677)
activated).
The LBI TOP PRIORITY (PAGE 680) can be used to force priority 0 into the setpoint Priority (page 333). Priority 0
is the "highest" one, which means the gen-set will be running all the time while the power management is
switched on.
If more than one gen-set have the same priority, they will act as "one big" gen-set. There are methods of
automatic optimization of the priorities to achieve specific behavior of the group such as equalizing engine hours
of the gen-sets or selection of optimal gen-sets to run according to their size and current load demand.
Priority auto swap

As stated in the chapter Priorities (page 89), the operator is able to select the order of gen-set starting. There is
also the option of automatic priority selection. The controllers are sharing data concerning the running hours and
all important information relevant to the actual load. Thanks to the Automatic priority swapping function the
controllers choose the gen-set(s) to be running with consideration of their running hours and the actual load.

The running hours equalization function keeps a constant maximal difference of gen-set’s running hours. The
efficient function keeps running only the gen-sets with suitable nominal power to avoid inefficient fuel
consumption or gen-set overload.
Note: The Automatic priority swapping function does not change the setpoint Priority (page 333). The function
sets the order of gen-sets by virtual values “engine priority”.
Run hours equalization

The gen-sets engine priorities are automatically swapped to balance engine running hours. In other words, the
controllers compare running hours of each gen-set and select gen-set(s) to run in order to maintain constant
maximal difference of running hours. Up to 32 controllers are supported. This function is activated via setpoint
#Priority Auto Swap (page 334) = RUN HOURS.
The value of running hours which is used in run hours equalization is calculated by following formula:
RHE = Running Hours (page 585) - Run Hours Base (page 342)
RHE is considered value for running hours equalization, Running Hours (page 585) is a cumulative sum of run
hours available in statistic values of the controller, Run Hours Base (page 342) is a setpoint. This setpoint
may be used in the case of gen-sets with different runs hours are intended to be set at the same initial point (e.g.
a new gen-set and a used gen-set after retrofit maintenance inspection).
The Running hours equalization function compares RHE value of each controller in the group. Once the
difference between RHE of individual controllers is higher than #Run Hours Max Difference (page 342) (i.e.
#Run Hours Max Difference (page 342) + 1), the gen-set(s) with the lowest RHE is/are started.
Example: The system structure and its settings is shown on the figure below.
Image 5.25 Example of the system
3 cases are considered:

Case #1: 2 gen-gets available
Case #2: 3 gen-gets available with same initial RHE.
Case #3: 3 gen-gets available with different initial RHE.
Case #1:
Gen-set 1 running hours = 250 -> running hours considered in RHE = 100 (150 - Run Hours Base (page
342))

Gen-set 2 running hours = 450 -> running hours considered in RHE = 200 (250 - Run Hours Base (page
342))
Both gen-sets have the same nominal power of 700 kW. Originally, priority of gen-sets was G1 = 2, G2 = 1.
Load demand in this example is constant and it is 500 kW (i.e. only one engine is running at any time). In this
case, the controllers set the engine priority of the gen-set 1 to 1 because it has the lowest considered RHE and
the difference between RHE2 (i.e. considered RHE of gen-set 2) and RHE1 is higher than #Run Hours Max
Difference (page 342) that is set to 10h.
Run hours #RunHoursBase RHE

Gen-set #1 250 150 100
Gen-set #2 450 250 200
The gen-set 1 runs for 100 hours to equalize the RHE of both gen-sets. The gen-set 1 keeps running until the
difference between RHE1 and RHE2 exceeds #Run Hours Max Difference (page 342) (i.e. 10h). The gen-set
1 runs 100 + #Run Hours Max Difference (page 342) + 1 = 100 + 10 + 1 = 111 hours. After 111 hours the gen-
sets 2 has the lowest RHE and the difference between RHE1 and RHE2 is higher than #Run Hours Max
Difference (page 342). The gen-set 2 runs 11 hours to equalize the RHE of both gen-sets and then additional
#Run Hours Max Difference (page 342) + 1 hours (i.e. 11 + 10 + 1 = 22 hours). The evolution of RHE1 and
RHE2 is shown on the figure below.
Image 5.26 Run hours equalization - case #1
Step 0 1 2 3 4 5
RHE1 100 211 211 233 233 255
RHE2 200 200 222 222 244 244
Run G1 (ΔRHE1) 0 111 0 22 0 22
Run G2 (ΔRHE2) 0 0 22 0 22 0
From the example of the case #1, it can be concluded that the gen-sets are swapped after the duration
determined by following formula:
SwapTime = Second lowest considered running hours – Current lowest considered running hours + #Run
Hours Max Difference (page 342) +1

Case #2:
Gen-set 1 running hours = 0 -> running hours considered in RHE = 0 (0-RunHoursBase)
Each gen-set has the same RHE = 0 h. By applying the SwapTime formula, we get the run time of gen-set 1
before next swapping:
SwapTimeG1 = 0 – 0 + 10 + 1 = 11
Similar way, we get the run time of gen-set 2 before next swapping:
SwapTimeG2 = 11 – 11 + 10 + 1 = 11
Finally, we get the run time of gen-set 3 before next swapping:
SwapTimeG2 = 11 – 0 + 10 + 1 = 22
Please refer to figure below to understand the evolution of RHE of gen-sets in this particular case.
step 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
RHE1 0 11 11 11 11 33 33 33 33 55 55 55 55 77
RHE2 0 0 11 11 22 22 33 33 44 44 55 55 66 66
RHE3 0 0 0 22 22 22 22 44 44 44 44 66 66 66
Run G1 (ΔRHE1) 0 11 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22
Run G2 (ΔRHE2) 0 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0
Run G3 (ΔRHE3) 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22 0 0
Case #3:
The gen-set 1 has the lowest RHE1 = 100 h. By applying the SwapTime formula, we get the run time of gen-set
2 before next swapping:
SwapTimeG1 = 200 – 100 + 10 + 1 = 111

Till the step 5, the evolution of the gen-set swapping is the same as in the case #1, just gen-set 1 and gen-set 2
involve. In the step 6 the gen-set 2 can run only 17 hours (previously 22 hours) because the gen-set 3 involves.
The evolution of RHE1, RHE2 and RHE3 is shown on the figure below.
step 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
RHE1 100 211 211 232 233 255 255 255 272 272 272 288 288 288
RHE2 200 200 222 222 244 244 261 261 261 277 277 277 294 294
RHE3 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 266 266 266 283 283 283 299
Run G1
0 111 0 22 0 22 0 0 17 0 0 16 0 0
(ΔRHE1)
Run G2
0 0 22 0 22 0 17 0 0 16 0 0 17 0
(ΔRHE2)
Run G3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 16
(ΔRHE3)
Note: Setting #Run Hours Max Difference (page 342) = 5 does not mean that gen-sets swap every 5 hours.
The Swap time is determined by the formula stated above. Please read the entire chapter Running hours
equalization for better understanding.
Note: In the case #Run Hours Max Difference (page 342) is set to 0 and all gen-set in the group are at the
same initial point (RHE are equal), the gen-set swapping happens every hour.
Efficiency
The gen-sets engine priorities are automatically swapped to best fit to the actual load demand (load demand
swap - LDS). Also engine running hours are taken to the calculation (run hours equalization - RHE). This
function is activated via setpoint #Priority Auto Swap (page 334) = Efficiency.
Algorithm of function:
In the first step, the gen-sets are sorted according to their nominal power.
In the second step, the gen-sets with the same nominal power are sorted according to their RHE
The gen-set(s) with nominal power which fits the most actual load demand are chosen. From those with
same nominal power, the gen-set(s) with lowest RHE are chosen. Selection formula:

#Power Management Mode (page 333) = ABS (kW)
Nominal power of gen-set > actual load demand + #Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 335)
#Power Management Mode (page 333) = REL (%)
Nominal power of gen-set > (actual load demand × 100)/(100 - #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page
336))
If two or more gen-sets are available for taking over the load always the one with the lowest CAN address is
chosen.
If load demand is higher than nominal power of the biggest gen-set, this one is fixed and the whole process
repeats from point the third bullet.
Example: The system structure and its settings is shown on the figure below.
Image 5.29 Example of the system
Following table provide an example of gen-set selection in function of system load evolution. The table is an
example of Efficiency priority optimization function (#Power Management Mode (page 333) = ABS (kW) and
#Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 335) = 20 kW).
System Total Running power Relative load

Running gen-sets Description
Load [kW] within PM [kW] of gen-sets [%]
40 5 100 40
60 5 100 60
5 2 start
80 LDS Swap 300 26
2 [0h] 5 stop
100 2 [10h] 200 50
120 2 [20h] 200 60
2 [30h] 3 start
120 RHE Swap 400 30
3 [10h] 2 stop
120 3 [20h] 200 60
140 3 [30h] 200 70
3 [40h] 1 start
180 LDS Swap 500 36
1 3 stop

200 1 300 67
240 1 300 80
1
280 5 start Gen#5 joins (LDS) 400 70
5
1
340 400 85
5
1
4 start
380 5 LDS + RHE Swap 600 63
5 stop
4 [20h]
1
400 500 80
4
1
440 500 88
4
1
480 4 5 start Gen#5 joins (LDS) 600 80
5
1
540 4 600 90
5
1
4 2 start
580 LDS Swap 800 73
5 5 stop
2 [30h]
1
600 4 700 86
2
1
640 4 700 91
2
1
4
680 5 start Gen#5 joins (LDS) 800 85
2
5
1
4
740 800 93
2
5
1
4 3 start
780 LDS Swap 1000 78
2 5 stop
5

3 [40h]
1
4
800 900 89
2
3
1
4
840 900 93
2
3
1
4
880 2 5 start Gen#5 joins (LDS) 1000 88
3
5
1
4
940 2 1000 94
3
5
Minimal running power

Minimum Running Power function is used to adjust a minimum value of the sum of nominal power of all running
gen-sets. If the function is active, then the gen-sets would not be stopped, although the reserve for stop is
fulfilled. Function is activated via logical binary input Min Run Power Active (page 673).

Image 5.30 Minimal running power
Setpoint #Min Run Power (page 339) is adjusted to 400 kW. Once the MIN RUN POWER ACTIVE (PAGE 673) is
activated, the available nominal running power has to be equal or higher to 400 kW. Even if the load reserve is
big enough to stop the gen-set #2 (nominal power 500 kW), the gen-set keeps running as at least 400 kW has to
be available. The gen-set#1 (nominal power 200 kW) is not enough.
5.3.11 Control groups

The physical group of the gen-sets (i.e. the site) can be separated into smaller logical groups, which can work
independently even if they are interconnected by the CAN2 bus. The logical groups are intended to reflect the
real topology of the site when the site is divided into smaller gen-set groups separated from each other by bus-
tie breakers. If the bus-tie breakers are closed the sub-groups have to work as one large group and if the bus-tie
breakers are open, the sub-groups have to work independently.
The group which the particular controller belongs to is adjusted by the setpoint Control Group (page 344).
Use the defaulf setting 1 with all controllers, if there is no bus-tie breaker.
The information which groups are currently linked together is being distributed via the CAN. Each controller
can provide information about one BTB breaker. The breaker position is detected by the input function
GroupLink (i.e. this input is to be connected to the breaker feedback).

The two groups which are connected together by the BTB, are defined with parameters Group Link L (page
344) and Group Link R (page 345).
Controller sends via CAN2 bus information that controllers from groups Group Link L and Group Link R are
linked together, if the Group link function (signal associated with the function) is active. It sends information
that the groups are separated, if the Group link function is not active.
Note: The "group link" function is independent on the group, where the controller itself belongs to. The controller
can provide "group link" information about any two groups and it may not belong to one of the groups.
All gensets/controllers in linked groups cooperate with each other and perform load sharing, VAr sharing and
power management together. These functionalities are performed independently in each group, when the
groups are separated.
Example:
4 gen-sets separated by a BTB breaker into two groups of 2. The BTB position is detected by the controllers 2
and 3. The reason, why there are 2 controllers used for detection of the BTB position, is to have a backup source
of the group link information, if the primary source (controller) is switched off.
Image 5.31 Example of control groups
Once the BTB breaker is closed, the control groups 2 and 3 become new group 2+3. Power management, load
sharing and VAr sharing are performed within newly established group 2+3. Merging of the groups may result
with a genset stopping, if power management evaluates that available Actual Reserve is high enough to stop a
genset.
5.3.12 Distributed power management signals

Sharing of multiple Logical Binary Input (LBI) functions is critical for power management system operation,
because several power management functionality require simultaneous activation of LBI functions in
controllers, which are involved in power management operation. It can be done either automatically using CAN2
bus link between controllers or using dedicated LBI functions.
These LBI functions are shared automatically:

System Start/Stop
Min Run Power Act
Load Res 2 Active
MCB Feedback
These rules applies to the automatic sharing of the selected signals:
1. LBI state is automatically shared via CAN2 bus, if corresponding LBI function is configured in a controller.
Example: Logical input Remote Start/Stop is configured with a controller. State of the signal is
automatically transmitted to other controllers via CAN2 bus as System Start/Stop.
2. LBI state received from CAN2 bus is automatically used, if corresponding LBI function is not configured in a
controller.
Example: LBI Remote Start/Stop is not configured with a controller, but automatically shared
System Start/Stop is received from CAN2 bus. Controller follows state of the shared LBI signal then.
3. LBI state received from CAN2 bus is not used, if corresponding LBI function is configured in a controller.
Example: LBI Remote Start/Stop is configured with a controller. Controller follows only state of
signal linked with the Remote Start/Stop function. The function is not activated by a shared System
Start/Stop signal.

4. LBI function state transmitted via CAN2 bus is used only by controllers, which are in the same group as
controller, which is source of the shared signal. Signal coming from controller in a different group is accepted
only if the “source controller” group is linked with the “receiving controller” group.

5. LBI function can be configured with multiple controllers, which transmit through CAN2 bus state of the
function. OR function applies to the function evaluation in controllers, in which the function is not configured.
It means that function is activated by shared signal coming from any controller (rule 4. applies).
5.3.13 Regulation loops

Regulation loops overview
Regulation loops overview
Loop type Related applications Related setpoints

Frequency MINT, SPtM, MCB, MGCB Frequency Gain (page 347), Frequency Int (page 348)
Load Sharing Gain (page 349), Load Sharing Int (page
Load sharing MINT
349)
Load MINT, SPtM, MCB, MGCB Load Gain (page 348), Load Int (page 349)
Voltage MINT, SPtM, MCB, MGCB Voltage Gain (page 356), Voltage Int (page 356)

Loop type Related applications Related setpoints
VAr sharing MINT VAr Sharing Gain (page 357), VAr Sharing Int (page 357)
PF control MINT, SPtM, MCB, MGCB PF Gain (page 356), PF Int (page 357)
Angle regulation MINT, SPtM, MCB, MGCB Angle Gain (page 348)
Speed, Frequency, Load sharing, Load regulation loops have one common output = Speed request. The value of
this output is always composed from the contribution of each of the regulation loops.
Voltage, PF, VAr sharing have one common output = Voltage request. The value of this output is always
composed from the contribution of each of the regulation loop.
Each of the regulation loops is active in some certain time during the process, which is given by the state of the
automat. If no regulation loop is active the speed governor output is kept on the level given by setpoint Speed
Governor Bias (page 346) or Voltage Regulator Bias (page 354) in case of voltage regulator output.
Note: All regulation loops are PID, but only PI components are visible as setpoints.
MINT regulation loops
Loop type Description

The frequency loop is active in the first phase of synchronization when the generator
Frequency
frequency is regulated to match the mains/bus frequency.
Load sharing The load sharing loop is active in multiple-island operation.
The load regulation loop is active when single gen-set is running in parallel with mains
Load and during load transfers from mains to generator or vice versa. This regulation loop is
also active when multiple gen-sets are running in parallel with Mains.
The voltage regulation loop gets active after Minimal Stabilization Time (page 278).
Voltage
The loop is deactivated at the beginning of cooling sequence.
VAr sharing The VAr sharing loop is active in multiple-island operation.
The PF control loop is active when single gen-set is running in parallel with mains and
PF control during load transfers from mains to generator or vice versa. This regulation loop is also
active when multiple gen-sets are running in parallel with Mains.
The differential angle control loop is active during the synchronization when phase
Angle regulation
match type of synchronization is used.
SPtM regulation loop

The frequency regulation loop gets active after Minimal Stabilization Time (page
Frequency 278). The loop is deactivated at the beginning of cooling sequence. Loop is not active in
parallel operation. In parallel operation PF control loop is used.
The load regulation loop is active when gen-set is running in parallel with mains and
Load
during load transfers from mains to generator or vice versa.
The voltage regulation loop gets active after Minimal Stabilization Time (page 278).
Voltage The loop is deactivated at the beginning of cooling sequence. Loop is not active in
parallel operation. In parallel operation PF control loop is used.
PF control The PF control loop is active when gen-set is running in parallel with mains and during

load transfers from mains to generator or vice versa.
The differential angle control loop is active during the synchronization when phase
Angle regulation
match type of synchronization is used.
Adjustment of regulation loops

The regulation loops have two adjustable factors: P-factor and I-factor (except angle regulation loop, which has
P-factor only). The P-factor (gain) influences the stability and overshoot of the regulation loop and the I-factor
(int) influences the steady-state error as well as the settling time. See the picture below for typical responses of
a PI regulation loop.
Image 5.32 Typical responses of PI regulator
For manual tuning of a control loop use following method:

Set both the I-factor and P-factor to 0.
Increase the P-factor slightly until the system starts to oscillate.
Adjust the P-factor back to approx. one half of the value where the oscillations started.
Increase the I-factor slightly to achieve optimal resulting response.
IMPORTANT: Be ready to press emergency stop button in case the regulation loop would start to
behave unacceptable while it is being adjusted.
5.3.14 Speed/Load control

The speed control output is used to control the speed or the power of the engine. The frequency regulation, load
regulation and load sharing are realized through the speed control. The speed request is internal value of the
regulator. This value is transformed to range -10 .. 10 V based on setpoints Speed Governor Low Limit (page
346) and Speed Governor High Limit (page 346). This value of speed request is then transformed to request
which comes out of the controller. There are several ways how to send this request to gen-set:
Analog output (speed governor output)
ECU speed control
Binary pulse control

Speed control outputs
Analog Output (speed governor output)
The speed regulator of the engine is controlled by the analog signal from controller. Please see the chapter
Speed governor interface (page 49) for more information about speed governor.
The direction of speed regulation required by Speed regulator of the engine is given by the setpoint Speed
Regulator Character (page 345). A full range change of the speed governor output (from Speed Governor
Low Limit (page 346) to Speed Governor High Limit (page 346)) should cause 5-10% change of the engine
speed (Speed Governor Low Limit (page 346) ~ 95% Nominal RPM (page 248), Speed Governor Bias
(page 346) ~ 100% Nominal RPM (page 248), Speed Governor High Limit (page 346) ~ 105% Nominal
RPM (page 248)).
IMPORTANT: Speed governor has to be adjusted for optimum performance before Speed/Load
control adjusting. Check generator phase sequence before the first GCB connection.
Image 5.33 Example of speed governor curve
ECU speed control

In case that ECU with speed control support is configured, then the speed is controlled via ECU.

The internal speed request is transformed to Up/Down pulse control. These pulses get out of the controller via
binary outputs SPEED UP (PAGE 736) and SPEED DOWN (PAGE 736). Length of pulses SPEED UP (PAGE 736)
and SPEED DOWN (PAGE 736) depends on the difference of actual RPM and requested RPM (actual power and
requested power, actual frequency and requested frequency) and on the parameter Tau Speed Governor
Actuator (page 347). Tau Speed Governor Actuator (page 347) defines the pulse duration which is needed
for the speed controller to travel from minimal position to the maximal position. The Maximum length of pulses is
limited to 5 s, the minimal length of pulses is limited to 150 ms and minimal length between the pulses is
200 ms.

Speed/Load control adjustment
Synchronization adjustment
Start the engine in MAN Mode.
Set the engine RPM by speed trim on the speed governor or by Speed Governor Bias (page 346), Speed
Governor Low Limit (page 346) and Speed Governor High Limit (page 346) to achieve frequency
according to setpoint Nominal Frequency (page 247).
To start the synchronization press GCB ON/OFF button. GCB LED starts to flash to indicate
synchronization. To stop synchronization press again GCB ON/OFF .
Adjust Frequency Gain (page 347) to unstable speed control and decrease value by 30 % to insure stable
performance.
Adjust Frequency Int (page 348) to stable (fast and smooth) slip control. Synchroscope movement on the
controller measure screen should slow down and stop (in any position, because Angle Gain (page 348)
control is off).
Set Angle Gain (page 348). Synchroscope on the controller measure screen should move slowly and stop
in “up“ position. Set Angle Gain (page 348) to unstable value (synchroscope swings) and decrease value
by 30 % to insure stable performance.
Load control adjustment

IMPORTANT: Prior to Speed/Load control adjustment, the Voltage/PF control has to be adjusted.
MINT application
Load control loop is active in parallel to mains mode only (MCB feedback closed). Switch off other engines while
adjusting.
1. Set #System BaseLoad (page 235) setpoint to 30 % of one gen-set.
2. Set Load Gain (page 348) to the same value as Angle Gain (page 348). Set Load Int (page 349) to zero.
3. Start the gen-set in MAN Mode, press GCB ON/OFF button to synchronize and close gen-set to mains.
4. When GCB is closed, gen-set load slowly increases to #System BaseLoad (page 235) value. Check that
gen-set power is positive (CT polarity).
5. Increase Load Int (page 349) to unstable load control and decrease value by 30 % to insure stable
performance. When Load Int (page 349) factor is set to zero gen-set load can differ from required #System
BaseLoad (page 235).
6. To adjust and optimize Load Int (page 349) change #System BaseLoad (page 235) several times
between 30 and 70 % of Nominal Power (page 242). Usually setting Load Int (page 349) to 100 % gives
optimal performance.
7. When gen-set is running under full load check if
a. Speed governor output voltage value is not limited (it does not reach Speed Governor Low Limit
(page 346) or Speed Governor High Limit (page 346))
b. Speed governor actuator is not mechanically limited or operates in a small section of the throttle range.
SPtM application
Load control loop is active in parallel to mains mode only (MCB feedback closed).
1. Set Load Control PTM (page 230) = BASELOAD, set Baseload (page 233) setpoint to 30 % Nominal
Power (page 242) of gen-set.

2. Set Load Gain (page 348) to the same value as Angle Gain (page 348). Set Load Int (page 349) to zero.
3. Start the gen-set in MAN Mode, press GCB ON/OFF button to synchronize and close gen-set to mains.
4. When GCB is closed, gen-set load slowly increases to Baseload (page 233) value. Check that gen-set
power is positive (CT polarity).
5. Increase Load Gain (page 348) to unstable load control and decrease value by 30 % to insure stable
performance. When Load Int (page 349) factor is set to zero gen-set load can differ from required Baseload
(page 233).
6. To adjust and optimize Load Int (page 349) change Baseload (page 233) several times between 30 and 70
% of Nominal Power (page 242). Usually setting Load Int (page 349) to 100% gives optimal performance.
7. When gen-set is running under full load check if
a. Speed governor output voltage value is not limited (it does not reach Speed Governor Low Limit
(page 346) or Speed Governor High Limit (page 346))
b. Speed governor actuator is not mechanically limited or operates in a small section of the throttle range.
5.3.15 Voltage/PF control

The voltage control output is used to control the voltage or the power factor of the engine. The voltage
regulation, PF regulation and VAr sharing are realized through the voltage control. The voltage request is internal
value of the regulator. This value is transformed to range -10 .. 10 V based on setpoints Voltage Regulator
Low Limit (page 355) limit and Voltage Regulator High Limit (page 355). This value of voltage request is
then transformed to request which comes out of the controller. There are several ways how to send this request
to gen-set:
Analog output (integrated AVR interface)
Voltage control outputs

Analog output (integrated AVR interface)
The voltage regulator of the engine is controlled by the analog signal from controller. Please see the chapter
AVR Interface (page 49) for more information about AVR.
The direction of speed regulation required by Speed regulator of the engine is given by the setpoint Voltage
Regulator Character (page 354). A full range change of the AVR output (from Voltage Regulator Low Limit
(page 355) to Voltage Regulator High Limit (page 355)) should cause 5-10% change of the voltage (Voltage
Regulator Low Limit (page 355) ~ 95% Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 246), Voltage Regulator Bias (page
354) ~ 100% Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 246), Voltage Regulator High Limit (page 355) ~ 105%
Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 246)).

The internal voltage request is transformed to Up/Down pulse control. These pulses get out of the controller via
binary outputs AVR UP (PAGE 706) and AVR DOWN (PAGE 706). Length of pulses AVR UP (PAGE 706) and
AVR DOWN (PAGE 706) depends on the difference of actual voltage and requested voltage (actual reactive
power and requested reacted power, actual PF and requested PF) and on the parameter Tau Voltage Governor
Actuator (page 355). Tau Voltage Governor Actuator (page 355) defines the pulse duration which is needed
for the voltage controller to travel from minimal position to the maximal position. The Maximum length of pulses
is limited to 5s, the minimal length of pulses is limited to 150 ms and minimal length between the pulses is 200
ms.

Voltage/PF control adjustment
Voltage adjustment
Set Voltage Gain (page 356), Voltage Int (page 356) to zero and Voltage Regulator Bias (page 354) to
50%.
Start the gen-set in MAN Mode to without load.
Adjust generator voltage to Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 246) by change of Voltage Regulator Bias
(page 354).
Change Voltage Regulator Bias (page 354) to 0% and 100% to check generator voltage control range
(typically ± 10 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 246)).
Set Voltage Regulator Bias (page 354) to again reach Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 246) on the
generator.
When gen-set is running unloaded increase carefully Voltage Gain (page 356) to unstable point and then
decrease value by 30 % to insure stable performance.
Adjust Voltage Int (page 356) (usually setting to 100% gives optimal performance).
PF adjustment
MINT application
Power factor control loop is active in parallel to mains mode only (MCB feedback closed). Switch off other
engines while adjusting.
Set the same values to PF Gain (page 356) and PF Int (page 357) as in the chapter Voltage adjustment
(page 108) for parameters Voltage Gain (page 356) and Voltage Int (page 356).
Set #System BaseLoad (page 235) = 30 % of Nominal Power (page 242) and #System Power Factor
(page 236) = 1.0.
Start and synchronize the gen-set in MAN Mode by pressing GCB ON/OFF.
When running in parallel to mains loaded on 30%, increase slowly PF Gain (page 356) to unstable point and
then decrease the value by 30 % to insure stable performance.
Adjust PF Int (page 357) (usually setting to 100% gives optimal performance).
Note: To judge optimal adjusting of the power factor induce generator power jumps by Voltage Regulator Bias
(page 354) change or by #System BaseLoad (page 235) change.
SPtM application
Power factor control loop is active in parallel to mains mode only (MCB feedback closed).
Set the same values to PF Gain (page 356) and PF Int (page 357) as in the chapter Voltage adjustment
(page 108) for parameters Voltage Gain (page 356) and Voltage Int (page 356).
Set Baseload (page 233) = 30 % of Nominal Power (page 242) and Base Power Factor (page 233) =
1.0.
Start and synchronize the gen-set in MAN Mode by pressing GCB ON/OFF.
When running in parallel to mains loaded on 30%, increase slowly PF Gain (page 356) to unstable point and
then decrease the value by 30 % to insure stable performance.
Adjust PF Int (page 357) (usually setting to 100% gives optimal performance).
Note: To judge optimal adjusting of the power factor induce generator power jumps by Voltage Regulator Bias
(page 354) change or by Baseload (page 233) change.

5.3.16 Gen-set operation states
Engine state machine
Init Autotest during controller power on.

Gen-set is not ready to start.
Not ready
Example: When shutdown alarm is active or unit is in OFF mode.
Ready Gen-set is ready to run.
Prestart sequence in process, PRESTART (PAGE 732) output is closed.
Prestart
Example: Usually used for preheating or processes executed prior gen-set start.
Cranking Engine is cranking, STARTER (PAGE 737) output is closed
Pause Pause between start attempts.
Starting Starting speed is reached and the Idle timer is running.
Running Gen-set is running at nominal speed.
Soft load Gen-set power is ramping up
Loaded Gen-set is running at nominal speed and GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 716) is closed.
Soft unld Gen-set power is ramping down
Cooling Gen-set is cooling before stop.
Stop.
Stop
Example: Automatic or manual stop command was issued, engine is stopping.
Shutdown Shut-down alarm activated.
Gas engine - ventilation of unburned fuel when stop command comes during cranking with
Ventil
gas
SDVentil Gas engine - ventilation of unburned fuel after unsuccessful start attempt
EMERGENCY MAN (PAGE 665) gen-set operation.
EmergMan
Example: Used for bypass the controller and engine manual start.
Engine started conditions

Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 273) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 274) or
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 674) is in logical 0 or
D+ terminal active (reached 80% of supply voltage) for minimum 1 s or
Generator voltage > 25% of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 246) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 246)
(any phase)
Note: Any of these condition will disconnect starter of the engine, however for transition to next state RPM
needs to be higher than Starting RPM (page 273).
Engine running conditions

Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM (page 273) or
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 274) or

Generator voltage > 25% of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 246)
Still engine conditions

Engine speed (RPM) < Starting RPM (page 273) or
Oil pressure < Starting Oil Pressure (page 274) or
Generator voltage < 50 V (any phase)
Note: When the engine was running before and all above conditions are fulfilled, additional 2 s delay is
necessary to confirm “still engine”.
When any engine running conditions are appeared on still engine than the Wrn Stop Fail (page 811) is
activated with following delay:
for generator voltage from 10 V to < 50 % of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
for generator voltage > 50 % of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 200 ms
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 274), Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 674) is in logical 0, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1 s
for detected RPM, there is no delay.
Stop engine conditions

If no engine running conditions are validated than the controller will wait extra 12 s before leaving the Machine
state Stop and than it will release the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 738) output.
Image 5.34 Engine stops in Stop Time (page 281)
When the total time of stopping will exceed setpoint Stop Time (page 281) than the Wrn Stop Fail (page 811)
and binary outputs are activated. The controller will continuously try to stop the engine.

Image 5.35 Engine stops after first Stop Time (page 281)
Electric state machine
Mains is present and all its values are within limits.

MainsOper
Example: MCB is closed, GCB is opened
MainsFlt Mains fails
Island operation
IslOper
Example: MCB is opened, GCB is closed
MainsRet Mains recover
Synchro Gen-set is synchronizing (MCB is closed, GCB is opened)
ParalOper Gen-set is in parallel with mains (MCB is closed, GCB is closed)
BrksOff GCB, MCB opened
5.3.17 Alarm management

The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. Level 1 – yellow alarm – is a pre-critical alarm that is only
informative and does not take any action regarding gen-set control. Level 2 – red alarm – represents a critical
situation, where an action must be taken to prevent damage of the gen-set or technology.
One alarm of any type can be assigned to each binary input.
Two alarms (one yellow and one red type) can be assigned to each analog input.
There are also Built-in alarms (page 115) with fixed alarm types.
Each alarm is written to the Alarmlist (page 115).
Each alarm causes a record to be written into the history log.
Each alarm activates the Alarm and Horn output.
Each alarm can cause sending of a SMS message or an email.

Image 5.36 Analog input alarm evaluation principle
Alarm handling
There are three different alarm categories regarding the period when the alarms are evaluated. The category is
selectable for alarms assigned to binary/analog inputs and fixed for built-in alarms. The categories are the
following:
The alarm is evaluated all the time when the controller is switched on.
The alarm is evaluated only when the engine is running. This type should be used for e.g. oil pressure. These
alarms begin to be evaluated after the engine has been started with the delay given by the setpoint
Protection Hold Off (page 279).
The alarm is evaluated only when the generator is excited. These alarms begin to be evaluated after the
engine has been started and Maximal Stabilization Time (page 279) has elapsed or the GCB has been
closed. They remain evaluated until cooling has finished. Only Generator under/overvoltage and Generator
under/overfrequency belong to this category. This category is not configurable to binary and analog input
alarms.
If an alarm is being evaluated and the appropriate alarm condition is fulfilled, the delay of evaluation will start to
run. The delay is adjustable by a setpoint (in the case of built-in alarms, analog input alarms) or is adjusted via
configuration window in InteliConfig (in the case of binary input alarms). If the conditions persist, the alarm will
activate. The alarm will not activate if the condition is dismissed while the delay is still running.
After pressing the Fault reset button or activating the binary input FAULT RESET BUTTON (PAGE 665), all active
alarms change to confirmed state. Confirmed alarms will disappear from the Alarmlist as soon as the respective
condition dismisses. If the condition is dismissed before acknowledging the alarm, the alarm will remain in the
Alarmlist as Inactive.
Note: The input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 680) can be used for temporary disabling of red alarms to shutdown the
engine. This input may be used in situations where providing the power is extremely important – e.g. if the gen-
set drives pumps for fire extinguishers (sprinklers).

Alarm states
An alarm can have following states:
Active alarm: the alarm condition persists, alarm delay has elapsed.
Inactive alarm: the alarm condition has disappeared, but the alarm has not been confirmed.
Confirmed alarm: the alarm condition persists, but the alarm has already been confirmed.
Alarm types - Level 1

The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level. This alarm does not cause any actions regarding the gen-set control.
Warning (Wrn)
The alarm appears in the Alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. Activates the output AL COMMON W RN
(PAGE 687) as well as the standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 722) and ALARM (PAGE 695)).
Alarm indication (AL Indic)

The event is only indicated in the Alarmlist. It disappears for the alarmist automatically as soon as the cause
disappears. Standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 722) and ALARM (PAGE 695)) are not activated.
History record only (HistRecOnl)

The event is recorded into the history. Standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 722) and ALARM (PAGE 695)) are
not activated.
Alarm types - Level 2

The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.
Note: It is not possible to start the engine if any red level protection is active or not confirmed.
IMPORTANT: The gen-set can start by itself after acknowledging the alarms if there is no longer an
active red alarm and the controller is in AUTO or TEST mode!
Shutdown (Sd)
The alarm appears in the alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate stop of the Gen-set
without unloading and cooling phase. Also GCB breaker is open. The gen-set cannot be started again while
there is a shutdown alarm in the alarmlist. Activates the output AL COMMON SDMPR (PAGE 687) as well as the
standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 722) and ALARM (PAGE 695)).
Breaker open and cool down (BOC)

The event appears in the alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. It causes immediate opening of the GCB
(without unloading) and then the standard stop sequence with cooling follows. The gen-set cannot be started
again while there is a BOC alarm in the alarmlist. Activates the output AL COMMON BOC (PAGE 686) as well as
the standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 722) and ALARM (PAGE 695)).
Slow stop (Stp)

The alarm appears in the alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. It causes stop of the gen-set by the
standard stop sequence, i.e. including unloading and cooling phase. The gen-set cannot be started again while
there is a slow stop alarm in the alarmlist. Activates the output AL COMMON STP (PAGE 687) as well as the
standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 722) and ALARM (PAGE 695)).

Sensor fail detection (FLS)
If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor fail will be detected and a
sensor fail message will appear in the Alarmlist (page 115). The valid range is defined by the most-left (RL)
and most-right (RH) points of the sensor characteristic ±12.5% from RH-RL.
Note: Sometimes there can be problem with lower limit of valid range which can be counted as negative
number. In this case the lower limit is set as one half of the RL point of the sensor curve characteristic.
Image 5.37 Sensor fail detection principle
Remote alarm messaging

If communication plug-in module is connected to the controller, the controller can send SMS messages and
emails at the moment when a new alarm appears in the Alarmlist (page 115) or new event is written in History
log (page 118). The message will contain a copy of the Alarmlist (page 115) or reasons from History log
(page 118). To enable this function, adjust setpoints Event Message (page 485), Wrn Message (page 485),
BOC Message (page 485) and Sd Messages (page 486) to ON. Also enter a valid GSM phone number or
email address to the setpoints Telephone Number 1 (page 486), Email Address 1 (page 481) .
The list of all supported terminals shows the table below:
Event Warning BOC Shutdown Event Warning BOC Shutdown

Terminal
SMS SMS SMS SMS email email email email
CM-RS232-485 no no no no no no no no
USB no no no no no no no no
Ethernet no no no no yes yes yes yes
CM-GPRS yes yes yes yes yes* yes* yes* yes*
CM-4G-GPS yes yes yes yes yes* yes* yes* yes*
Note: * Only with enabled Mode (page 479).

Alarmlist
Alarmlist is a container of active and inactive alarms. It will appear automatically on the controller display, if a
new alarm occurs, or can be displayed manually from the display menu.
Active alarms are shown as inverted, not yet confirmed alarms are marked with asterisk before them.
Alarmlist contains three types of alarms:
Controller built-in alarms
User configured alarms on binary or analog inputs
ECU alarms
Controller built-in alarms

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC,
Stp, MP, MPR). Then the alarm name follows. In some cases the prefix can be omitted.
User configured alarms

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC,
MP, MPR). Alarm type is selected by user during the configuration of binary or analog input as alarm. Then the
alarm name follows. Name is adjusted by user during the configuration of binary or analog input as alarm.
ECU alarms
The ECU alarms are received from the ECU. The alarms are represented by the Diagnostic Trouble Code,
which contains information about the subsystem where the alarm occurred, the alarm type and the alarm
occurrence counter.
The most common fault codes are translated into text form. Other fault codes are displayed as a numeric code
and the engine fault codes list must be used to determine the reason.
Built-in alarms
Events Protection
Description
specification type
Value measured on analog input 1 is </> than Analog Protection 1
Analog Input 1 Wrn WRN
Wrn (page 366) setpoint.
Analog Input 1 Sd SD
Sd (page 366) setpoint.
Analog Input 4 Sd SD Value measured on analog input 4 is </> than Analog Protection 4

Events Protection
Description
specification type
Battery voltage is out of limits given by Battery Undervoltage (page
Wrn Battery Voltage WRN
301) and Battery Overvoltage (page 301) setpoints.
Binary input Configurable Warning/BOC/Shutdown alarms on the binary inputs.
If the controller switches off during starting sequence (STARTER (PAGE
Sd Battery Flat SD 737) output is active) it doesn’t try to start again and activates this
protection (controller assumes bad battery condition).
Sd Start Fail SD Gen-set start failed. All crank attempts were tried without success.
Wrong check-sum of parameters. Happens typically after downloading
new firmware or changing of the parameter. The controller stays in
Parameters Fail NONE
INIT mode. Check all parameters, change value of at least one
parameter.
Sd Gen Lx >V
SD The generator voltage is out of limits given by Gen <V BOC and Gen
BOC Gen Lx <V
BOC >V Sd setpoints.
(where x=1,2,3)
BOC Gen V The generator voltage is unbalanced more than the value of Voltage
BOC
Unbalance Unbalance BOC (page 309) setpoint.
The generator frequency is out of limits given by Generator
BOC Gen >,
BOC Overfrequency BOC (page 310) and Generator Underfrequency
<Frequency
BOC (page 311) setpoints.
BOC Current The generator current is unbalanced more than the value of Current
BOC
Unbalance Unbalance BOC (page 307) setpoint.
Generator current exceeds the limit for IDMT protection given by
BOC Current IDMT BOC Nominal Current (page 243) and IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page
306) setpoints.
The load is greater than the value given by Overload BOC (page 304)
BOC Overload BOC
setpoint.
This alarm is activated when Earth Fault value exceeds Earth Fault
Sd Earth Fault SD
Sd (page 491) limit for at least Earth Fault Delay (page 490) period.
The protection comes active if the speed is greater than Overspeed
Sd Overspeed SD
During starting of the engine when the RPM reach the value of
Starting RPM (page 273) setpoint the starter is switched off and the
Sd Underspeed SD speed of the engine can drop under Starting RPM (page 273) again.
Then the Underspeed protection becomes active. Protection
evaluation starts 5 seconds after reaching Starting RPM (page 273).
If the input Emergency Stop is opened shutdown is immediately
Emergency Stop SD
activated.
GCB Fail SD Failure of generator circuit breaker.
MCB Fail WRN Failure of mains circuit breaker.

Events Protection
Description
specification type
Failure of magnetic pick-up sensor for speed measurement. This alarm
appears, if starter was disengaged for other reason than overcrossing
Sd RPM
SD Starting RPM (page 273) (like oil pressure or D+) and at the end of
Measurement Fail
timer Maximum Cranking Time (page 272) there are no RPMs >
Starting RPM (page 273) detected.
Gen-set stop failed. See description at Gen-set Operation States
Wrn Stop Fail WRN
chapter.
The period for servicing is set by the Maintenance Timer 1 (page
Wrn Maintenance 1 WRN
302) setpoint. The protection comes if counter reaches zero.
Charge Alternator
WRN Failure of alternator for charging the battery.
Fail
Sd Override WRN The protection is active if the output Sd Override is closed.
Mains voltage phases are not wired correctly. MCB closing is
Mains CCW Rot WRN
prohibited by controller.
Genset voltage phases are not wired correctly. GCB closing is
Generator CCW Rot WRN
prohibited by controller.
Stp Synchronization
STP If the synchronization timeout gets elapsed (forward synchronization).
Fail
Wrn Reverse
WRN If the synchronization timeout gets elapsed (reverse synchronization).
synchro Fail
BOC Reverse The reverse power is higher than limit adjusted via setpoint Reverse
BOC
Power Power Level (page 312).
BOC Excitation The reactive power is higher than limit adjusted via setpoint Excitation
BOC
Loss Loss Level (page 312).
Wrn Voltage The AVR output stays close to one of the limit values for more than 2
WRN
Regulation Limit seconds.
Wrn Speed The speed governor output stays close to one of the limit values for
WRN
Regulation Limit more than 2 seconds.
Note: This table does not contain all alarms in controller. It is only list of the most common alarms.

5.3.18 History log
The history log is an area in the controller’s non-volatile memory that records “snapshots” of the system at
moments when important events occur. The history log is important especially for diagnostics of failures and
problems. When the history file is full, the oldest records are removed.
Each record has the same structure and contains:
• The event which caused the record (e.g. “Overspeed alarm” or “GCB closed”)
• The date and time when it was recorded
• All important data values like RPM, kW, voltages, etc. from the moment that the event occurred.
Record structure
Name Abbreviation Description

Row number (0 corresponds to the last record, -1 to the previous
Number No.
one, etc.)
Reason Reason Reason for history record (any event or alarm related to the gen-set
Time Time Time
Date Date Date
RPM RPM Engine rotations per minute
Power Pwr Generator active power
Reactive power Q Generator reactive power
Power Factor PF Generator power factor
Load Character LChr Generator load character
Generator
Gfrq Generator Frequency
Frequency
Generator Voltage Vg1 Generator voltage Ph1
Generator Current IL1 Generator current Ph1
Mains Frequency Mfrq Mains Frequency
Mains Voltage Vm1 Mains voltage Ph1

Voltage Battery VBat Voltage of battery
Analog Input 1 Ain1 Analog input 1
Binary Inputs BIN Controller binary inputs
E-Stop E-Stop State of dedicated E-Stop input
Binary Outputs BOUT Controller binary outputs
Speed regulator SRO Speed regulator output
Voltage regulator VRO Voltage regulator output
Running nominal
TRPN Nominal power of all running gen-sets
power
Available nominal
APN Available nominal power of all gen-sets
power
Controller Mode Mode Controller mode
Note: When some setpoint is changed, in history log is written its number of communication object.
Note: Some additional columns can be added due to actual controller configuration (ECU, modules, etc.).
5.3.19 Breaker control

The following power switches are controlled by the controller:
The master generator circuit breaker or contactor – MGCB
It is possible to use either a motorized circuit breaker or contactor. Below is a list of available control outputs
that should fit all types of contactors or breakers. The following rules must be kept to when designing the wiring
of power switches:
The control outputs must be configured and wiring of the power switches must be provided in such a way,
that the controller has full control over the breakers – i.e. the controller can open and close the breaker at any
time.
The breaker must respond within max. 2 seconds to a close and open command. Special attention should be
paid to opening of motorized circuit breakers, as it could take more than 2 seconds on some types. In such
cases it is necessary to use an undervoltage coil for fast opening.
After opening the breaker, there is internal delay for another closing of breaker. Delay is 6 seconds - 5
seconds for OFF coil and 1 second for UV coil. After these 6 seconds, breaker can be closed again. For
opening of breaker there is no delay.

Breaker control outputs
An output for control of a contactor. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
Close/Open controller. The breaker must react within 2 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise
an alarm is issued.
An output giving a 2 second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed. The output is
ON coil
intended for control of close coils of circuit breakers.
An output giving a pulse in the moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until
OFF coil the feedback deactivates, but at least for 2 seconds. The output is intended for control of
open coils of circuit breakers.
The GCB UV coil output is active the whole time the gen-set is running (not in idle or cooling).
UV coil The output is deactivated for at least 2 seconds in the moment the breaker has to be
switched off. The output is intended for control of undervoltage coils of circuit breakers.
Image 5.38 Breaker control outputs
MCB special requirements

If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it is recommended that the wiring be provided in such a way that
the contactor will be normally closed and will open if the logical binary output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 726)
closes. This behavior is called “negative logic” and can be adjusted by the setpoint MCB Logic (page 323).
The negative logic will prevent accidental opening of the MCB when the controller is switched off.
If a contactor is used on the MCB position, it will open itself immediately after the mains have failed,
because it will lose power for the coil. That is why the following adjustment is necessary to prevent triggering
the Wrn MCB Fail (page 809) alarm: MCB Opens On (page 325) = Mains Fail, Mains < > Voltage Delay
(page 321) ≤ 1.
If a 230 V motor driven circuit breaker is used on the MCB position and an undervoltage coil is not fitted, it is
not possible to open the breaker after the mains have failed, because there is no power for the motor drive
until the gen-set is started and providing voltage. Adjusting the setpoint MCB Opens On (page 325) = Gen
Run will prevent triggering the Wrn MCB Fail (page 809) alarm.

Breaker fail detection
Breaker fail detection is based on binary output breaker close/open comparing with binary input breaker
feedback.
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure breaker feedback to use this function.
IMPORTANT: Also it is possible to use breakers without feedbacks. In this case there is no check
of breaker real state.
There are three different time delays for breaker fail detection – see following diagrams.
IMPORTANT: When controller is synchronizing, there is only 2 seconds delay for breaker fail
detection.
When binary output breaker close/open is in steady state and breaker feedback is changed the breaker fail is
detected immediately (no delay).
Image 5.39 Breaker fail - breaker close/open in steady position - open
Image 5.40 Breaker fail - breaker close/open in steady position - close
When binary output breaker close/open opens there is 2 sec delay for breaker fail detection.

Image 5.41 Breaker fail - breaker close/open opens
When binary output breaker close/open closes there is 2 sec delay for breaker fail detection.
Image 5.42 Breaker fail - breaker close/open closes
5.3.20 Exercise timer

The exercise (general-purpose) timer in controller intended for scheduling of any operations such as e.g. periodic
tests of the gen-set, scheduled transfer of the load to the gen-set prior to an expected disconnection of the
mains etc.
Related setpoints for timer 1 are:
Timer 1 Function (page 428) Timer 1 Day (page 432)
Timer 1 Repetition (page 429) Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 433)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 429) Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 433)
Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 429) Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 434)
Timer 1 Duration (page 430) Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 431)
Timer 1 Repeated (page 430) Timer 1 Weekends (page 432)
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 433)

Available modes of timer:

This is a single shot mode. The timer will be activated only once at preset date/time for preset
Once
duration.
The timer is activated every "x-th" day. The day period "x" is adjustable. Weekends can be
Daily
excluded. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd day excluding Saturdays and Sundays.
The timer is activated every "x-th" week on selected weekdays. The week period "x" is
Weekly
adjustable. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd week on Monday and Friday.
The timer is activated every "x-th" month on the selected day. The requested day can be
Monthly selected either as "y-th" day in the month or as "y-th" weekday in the month. E.g. the timer can
be adjusted to every 1st month on 1st Tuesday.
Short
The timer is repeated with adjusted period (hh:mm). The timer duration is included in the period.
period
Once mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 428).

Image 5.43 Once mode - InteliConfig
In timer mode select Once. In timer settings adjust date and time of occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration
of timer.
Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 428)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 429) setpoint select
Once mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 429), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 429) and
Timer 1 Duration (page 430).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.
Daily mode

Image 5.44 Daily mode - InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Daily. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th day of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 431)) and behavior of timer on weekends (Timer 1 Weekends (page 432)).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 3rd day at 12:00 for 1 hour including weekends.

Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 429), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 429)
and Timer 1 Duration (page 430). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 430) select Daily and adjust Timer 1
Refresh Period (page 431) (x-th day of repetition) and Timer 1 Weekends (page 432) (behavior of timer on
weekends).
Weekly mode

Image 5.45 Weekly mode - InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Weekly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th week of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 431)) and days when timer should be active (Timer 1 Day (page 432)).
be again activated every 2nd week on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

and Timer 1 Duration (page 430). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 430) select Weekly and adjust Timer
1 Day (page 432) (days when timer should be active) and Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 431) (x-th week of
repetition).
Monthly mode

There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.
Image 5.46 Monthly mode - InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition and the x-th day of repetition (Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 433)). Than select the x-th month
of repetition.
be again activated every 2nd day in 2nd month at 12:00 for 1 hour.

Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.
Image 5.47 Monthly mode - InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition, the x-th week of repetition and days in week. Than select the x-th month of repetition.
be again activated every 2nd week in 2nd month on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.
and Timer 1 Duration (page 430). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 430) select Monthly and adjust type of
monthly repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 433), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 431) (x-th month of
repetition) and Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 433) (concrete day in repeated months).
Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.
and Timer 1 Duration (page 430). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 430) select Monthly and adjust type of
monthly repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 433), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 431) (x-th month of
repetition), Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 433) (days in week when timer is active) and Timer 1
Repeat Week In Month (page 434) (concrete week in repeated months).

Short period mode
Image 5.48 Short period mode - InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Short period. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the interval of repetition
(shorter than 1 day).
be again activated every 4th hour for 1 hour.

and Timer 1 Duration (page 430). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 430) select Short Period and adjust
Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 431) (interval of repetition).
5.3.21 Rental Timers

In controller are two timers which are designed like rental timer. Rental timers will stop gen-set after their
elapse.

How to set-up rental timer
This is a short guide for settings of rental timers. Please see following few steps how to set up rental timers:
Choose the type of rental timer
Rental Timer 1 (page 441) (based on engine running hours)
Rental Timer 2 (page 443) (based on date)
Adjust the length of chosen timer
Adjust the warning for user Rental Timer 1 Wrn (page 443) or Rental Timer 2 Wrn (page 445)(warning
will be displayed in alarmlist before elapsing of rental timer)
Adjust Rental Timer BOC (page 445) - common for both timers (if engine is still running after rental timer
counts down, this timer will starts count down and after elapse of timer the gen-set will be cooled down and
stop)
5.3.22 Service timers

Running hours counters
Service timers are used as maintenance interval counters. Counters can be set by setpoints - Maintenance
Timer 1 (page 302), Maintenance Timer 2 (page 303) and Maintenance Timer 3 (page 303). All of them
work the same way - their values are decremented every hour when the gen-set is running.
Actual value of counters is located either as the same setpoints Maintenance Timer 1 (page 302),
Maintenance Timer 2 (page 303) and Maintenance Timer 3 (page 303) or as values Maintenance 1 (page
583), Maintenance 2 (page 584) and Maintenance 3 (page 584).
When the value of counter reaches 0, the alarm Wrn Maintenance 1 (page 808) or Wrn Maintenance 2 (page
808) or Wrn Maintenance 3 (page 809) is active until the respective counter is readjusted back to nonzero
value.
Unused counter has to be adjusted to maximal value 10000 (Disabled).
5.3.23 Analog switches

There are logical analog function dedicated for analog switches. Each analog switch has setpoints for level ON
and level OFF and logical binary output.
Analog switch Setpoints Binary output

Analog Switch 1 On (page 367)
AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 764) AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 696)
Analog Switch 1 Off (page 368)

Analog switch Setpoints Binary output
The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints.

Image 5.49 Principle of analog switch
5.3.24 Additional running engine indications

It is helpful to have information other than speed (RPM), whether the engine is rotating or not, especially if RPM
is measured from the generator frequency instead of magnetic pickup. The generator frequency measurement
can be unreliable at very low speeds and/or may have a delayed reaction to sudden and big changes (i.e. in the
moment that the engine has just started…).
The following conditions are evaluated as additional running engine indication:
Voltage on the D+ input is higher than 80% of battery voltage. Connect this input to the D+ (L) terminal of the
charging alternator and enable the D+ function by the setpoint D+ Function. If D+ terminal is not available,
leave the input unconnected and disable the function.
The pickup is not used and frequency is not detected on the pickup input. Connect the pickup input to the W
terminal of the charging alternator if you do not use pickup and the W terminal is available. If not, leave the
input unconnected.
Oil pressure > Starting Oil Pressure (page 274) setpoint. The oil pressure is evaluated from the analog
input or from the ECU if an ECU is configured.
Binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 674) is in logical 0.
At least one phase of generator voltage is >25% of nominal voltage.
These signals are used during start for powering down the starter motor even if still no RPM is measured and
also during stop in order to evaluate if the engine is really stopped.
5.3.25 Voltage phase sequence detection

Controller detects phase sequence on both voltage terminals. This protection is important after controller
installation to avoid wrong voltage phase connection. The phase sequence is adjusted via setpoint Phase
Rotation (page 252). When the phases are connected in different order, following alarms are detected:
Generator CCW Rotation (page 814)
Bus CCW Rotation
Mains CCW Rotation (page 815)
5.3.26 Sensor curves

Background of the sensor calibration
To correct measuring error of each analog input (pressure, temperature, level, etc.) calibrating constants should
be set. Calibration is made by adding the value of setpoint CU AIN1 Calibration (page 451), or Description
(page 452), or CU AIN3 Calibration (page 452), or CU AIN4 Calibration (page 453) directly to the
calculated value at analog input.

Note: The calibration must be done at the operational point of the analog input (e.g. 80°C, 4.0Bar etc..)
Default sensor curves

There are 16 default resistive curves available. The following table provides information on minimum/maximum
values of respective sensors. Actual values especially of temperature curves may differ. Meaning is to prolong
curve to the lower temperature values, so the cold engine will not raise alarm fail sensor.
Curve Min [Ohm] Max [Ohm] Units

VDO 10 Bar 0-2400ohm 0 2400 Bar
VDO40-120°C0-2400ohm 0 2400 °C
VDOLevel%0-2400ohm 0 2400 %
General line 1 0 1000 ohm
Note: Curves can be modified via InteliConfig. In InteliConfig are also prepared some standard curves.
IMPORTANT: For right behavior of function, curve for this analog input has to be in percentage.
Sensor curve HW configuration

InteliGen 500 analog inputs allows you to select Input HW type. Three HW configuration options are available:
0-15 kΩ
0-10 V
0-20 mA passive
Setup controller analog input in this way to use other than the default HW configuration (0-15 kΩ):
1. Start with a sensor configuration and select requested HW configuration

2. Use the adjusted sensor with an analog input and the requested HW configuration will be used with the
analog input automatically. There is no need to use a jumper, configured Input HW type is used by controller
automatically.

5.3.27 PLC
PLC Editor is powerful tool which helps you to create your own PLC scheme. It has graphical interface to have
user interface easy to use.
Image 5.50 PLC Editor main page
List of available PLC blocks
PLC block Number of blocks

OR/AND 32
XOR/RS 8
Comparator with hysteresis (Comp Hyst) 4
Comparator with delay (Comp Time) 4
Timer 1
Delay 8
Force history record (Force Hist) 4
Force protection (Force Prot) 4
Counter 1

Working with the editor
If the currently opened archive does not contain any PLC program, then an empty drawing is created
automatically when you select the PLC Editor. The procedure of creation of a PLC drawing (program) contains
following essential steps:
Adjust the sheet to your needs. See Working with sheets (page 136) for more information.
Add PLC blocks into the sheets. See Adding PLC blocks (page 136) for more information.
Define inputs and outputs of the PLC program. See Define inputs and outputs (page 137) for more
information.
Create connections between inputs, blocks and outputs. See Creating wires (page 140) for more
information.
Adjust properties of the blocks. See List of PLC blocks (page 777) for more information about blocks.
Working with sheets

Drag the sheet edges to re-size the sheet according to your needs.
Image 5.51 Adjusting PLC sheet
Adding PLC blocks

Adding PLC block is simple and intuitive. Follow the procedure below to add PLC block.
Select required block from the list of available PLC blocks at the left and drag it into the sheet.
Double-click on the block and adjust properties of the block. See List of PLC blocks (page 777) for more
information about blocks.

Connect the block inputs and outputs by drawing wires in the sheet. See Define inputs and outputs (page
137) for more information. It is also possible to connected inputs and outputs via properties of selected PLC
block.
Image 5.52 Adding PLC blocks
Note: To delete PLC block just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can by used.
Note: To see context help for selected PLC block just press F1 button.
Define inputs and outputs
Image 5.53 Blank sheet of PLC editor

Inputs
Sheet inputs are located at the left side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.
Double-click on a free input position or existing input to add new input or edit the existing one.
Select the source for the input.
If you create a binary input, you can select a source from following categories:
Bin. Values - this category contains all binary values available in the controller as binary inputs,
logical binary outputs etc.
PLC Outputs - this category contains all PLC blocks binary outputs available in the controller.
If you create an analog input, you can select a source from following categories:
Ana. Values - this category contains all analog values available in the controller as analog inputs,
electrical values, values from ECU etc.
All Setpoints - this category contains all setpoints of the controller except the dedicated PLC
setpoints. Names, resolutions and dimensions of these setpoints can not be modified.
PLC Setpoints - this category contains a group of setpoints which are dedicated for using in the PLC
program. PLC setpoints can be renamed, their dimension, resolution and limits can be modified
according to need of PLC blocks where they are used.

Image 5.54 PLC inputs
Outputs
Sheet outputs are located at the right side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.
Doubleclick on a free output position to add new sheet output.
Doubleclick on an already created output to configure the output onto a controller output terminal or a logical
binary input (first of all some PLC block output has to be connected to this output to enable configuration of
output).

Image 5.55 PLC outputs
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to click on Connect button after selecting the output. Otherwise PLC
output is not connected to output.
Creating wires
Wires can be create between PLC inputs and PLC blocks and between PLC blocks and PLC outputs.
IMPORTANT: Keep the order of starting and finishing connection points. Wires between inputs and
blocks have to start from inputs. Wires between blocks and outputs have to start from blocks.
Follow the procedure below to create wire.

Locate the mouse pointer over the starting point of the wire. If the area under the mouse pointer is a
connection point, the pointer will change the color (fill of pointer will be white).
Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the wire to the destination of required connection point. If you
point over a valid connection point, the connection point will be marked with a red circle.
Release the left mouse button to create a wire between the two points. The wire is routed automatically.

Note: It is possible to make connection only between the outputs and inputs with the same type of value (binary
or analog). Binary values are marker by black pointer, analog values are marked with green pointer.
Note: To delete wire just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can by used.
PLC logic execution rules

The PLC program is executed every 100 ms. The blocks are executed in order according to block numbers (item
numbers), which are indicated in each block. The block numbers are assigned automatically according to
position on sheet.
Image 5.56 PLC execution logic
IMPORTANT: Please always check that the blocks are ordered correctly, especially if you use direct
feedbacks from outputs to inputs within one sheet. Wrong order may lead to incorrect results!!!

Other functions
Consistency check
Use this function to check if all inputs and outputs of PLC block are connected.
Delete whole content of sheet

Use this function to delete the whole content of sheet (including blocks, wires, inputs, outputs, etc...).
Hints
Use this function to enable or disable quick hints for blocks (controller help is not affected by this function).
PLC monitor
PLC monitor is a powerful tool for monitoring your PLC. Just click on PLC monitor button on main InteliConfig
page to see you PLC. Active inputs and outputs have blue color. Also wires with active signals have blue color.
IMPORTANT: It is not possible to edit PLC in PLC monitor tool.
5.3.28 Aftertreatment Suppot

Afertreatment support generally provides monitoring and control of aftertreatment system installed on
generators engines. The requirements are defined as:
Providing Aftertreatment status information by:
displaying universal lamps (icons)
displaying corresponding analog and binary values
Control of Aftertreatment regeneration function by
transmitting commands to the ECU module
Providing Aftertreatment status information

Aftertreatment screen
This screen is available when ECU module which supports Aftertreatment is configured. Aftertreatment screen
is automatically brought to the front once any of selected lamps gets active or when increases reported severity.
Deactivating of the lamp will not trigger automatic changeover to the Aftertreatment screen. The screen is then
shown until operator switch it to another one. Alarmlist screen has lower priority, so even new alarm appears,
Aftertreatment screen is still displayed. To avoid displaying blank screen, inactive lamps are represented by
"greyed-out" icons. For no active lamp the screen shows all greyed-out icons. Please see examples below:

Image 5.57 Example of active Aftertreatment screen
Image 5.58 Example of inactive Aftertreatment screen
Universal lamps (icons)

Universal lamp icons are shown on the Aftertreatment screen. Based on specific value read in specific frame
with specific SPN is every lamp icon can be either:
shown
hidden
blinking slow (1 Hz)
blinking fast (2 Hz)
Note: Lamp icon blinking is defined as displaying active lamp icon and inverse colored active lamp icon in
required frequency.

Lamp name Active icon Inactive icon Notes
Note: This value can light

Yellow warning lamp or blink on both
frequencies.
Note: This value can light

Red stop lamp or blink on both
frequencies.
Engine wait to start
Note: Indicates the

Aftertreatment filter
needs to be regenerated.
ATT filter lamp
This lamp also activates
alarm ATT Filter Lamp
(page 811).
Note: Indicates High

exhaust system
High exhaust system
temperature. This lamp
temperature lamp
also activates alarm ATT
HEST Lamp (page 812).
Note: Indicates SCR

system problems. This
SCR error lamp lamp also activates alarm
ATT SCR Error Lamp
(page 812).
Note: Indicates DEF fluid

low level. This lamp also
DEF low level lamp
activates alarm ATT DEF
Level Lamp (page 812).
Note: Indicates
Aftertreatment
regeneration is inhibited.
Regeneration inhibit lamp
This lamp also activates
alarm ATT Inhibited
Lamp (page 812).

Analog values
Supported analog values:
DPF Ash Load (page 559)
DPF Soot Load (page 559)
DEF Level (page 559)
Control of Aftertreatment regeneration function

User can force or inhibit regeneration process by activating appropriate binary inputs of the controller. Please
see the list of binary inputs below:
REGENERATION FORCE (PAGE 674)
REGENERATION INHIB (PAGE 674)
5.3.29 Geo-fencing
Geo-fencing function is kind of protection that evaluates whether the actual GPS location is within predefined
area and based on the evaluation takes an action (sends sms, stops engine, make history record etc.). Function
is enabled by setpoint Geo-Fencing (page 448) or by logical binary input GEO-FENCING ENABLED (PAGE 669).
Using InteliConfig, it is possible to set two concentric geo-circles within which the unit is allowed to be located.
Each geo-circle is defined as circular geographic area with centre (common for both geo-circles) named Home
Position adjusted via setpoints Home Latitude (page 446) and Home Longitude (page 446) and radius
named Fence Radius adjusted via setpoints .Fence Radius 1 (page 447) and Fence Radius 2 (page 447).
Protections can be different for both circles. Protection are adjusted via setpoints Fence 1 Protection (page
449) and Fence 2 Protection (page 450).
It is also possible to see the current position of the controller in WebSupervisor map view.
5.3.30 Mains decoupling protections

Vector shift
The vector shift function is the fast protection for mains decoupling. It monitors the Load angle of the generator
and if it gets changed dramatically, the protection is issued. The Vector shift is evaluated from the Mains
Voltage Measurement (Phase 1).
Protection is enabled via setpoint Vector Shift Protection (page 326). Limit of protection is adjusted via
setpoint Vector Shift Limit (page 326). When protection is activated, the breaker is opened. Which breaker is
opened is adjusted via setpoint Vector Shift CB Selector (page 328). Maximal value of vector shift is
represented by value Max Vector ShiftMaxVectorS (page 575).
Note: VectorShift protection gets active (is unblocked) right 500 ms after the condition for activation of
protection gets fulfilled = when Controller goes to parallel to mains operation (When Vector Shift Protection =
PARALLEL ONLY) or when MCB gets closed (when Vector shift protection = ENABLED).
The settings can lead to these situations:

MCB GCB Vector Shift Vector Shift
Action
status status CB Selector Protection
Parallel or Enabled (No Opens MCB or GCB based on setpoint
1 1 MCB or GCB
influence) Vector Shift CB Selector.
0 1 No influence No influence No action (GCB stays alaways closed)
1 0 No influence Parallel No action MCB stays closed
1 0 GCB Enabled No action MCB stays closed
1 0 MCB Enabled MCB opens
If a vector shift is detected and consequently the MCB is opened, however mains voltage and frequency remain
in limits, the MCB is then closed again (synchronized) after Mains Return Delay (page 319) as the mains is
evaluated as healthy.
If a vector shift is detected and consequently the GCB is opened, however mains voltage and frequency remain
in limits, the GCB is then closed again (synchronized) immediately (no delay).
ROCOF
The Rate of Change of Frequency function is the fast protection for mains decoupling. It monitors the change of
frequency and if it gets changed dramatically, the protection is issued.
Protection is enabled via setpoint ROCOF Protection (page 327). Limit of protection is adjusted via setpoints
ROCOF df/dt (page 328) and ROCOF Windows Length (page 327). When protection is activated, the
breaker is opened. Which breaker is opened is adjusted via setpoint Vector Shift CB Selector (page 328).
5.3.31 Droop
IMPORTANT: Droop is relevant only for MINT application.
The DROOP is primarily intended for Multiple parallel operation in Island to ensure the load sharing and VAr
sharing when intercontroller communication fails. The Active and Reactive power is not regulated based on data
communicated between the units (isochronous regulation) but the speed request and voltage request is
calculated from actual voltage and actual frequency of the system (the measured Voltage and frequency of
whole system is always equal). Actually the speed request is correlative to active power and the voltage
request is correlative to reactive power. The correlation is the decreasing function and it creates the negative
feedback of regulation.
Function is activated via setpoint Load/Var Sharing Regulation Type (page 361). There are two droop modes
- emergency droop and droop.

Frequency droop
Image 5.59 Frequency droop
Equation:
Required frequency = Nominal frequency - [(Nominal frequency * Frequency Droop Slope (page 362) / 100) *
( Active power / Nominal power - Frequency Droop Offset (page 363) / 100)).
Voltage droop
Image 5.60 Voltage droop

Equation
Required voltage = Nominal voltage - [(Nominal voltage * Voltage Droop Slope (page 363) / 100) * (Reactive
power / Nominal reactive power - Voltage Droop Offset (page 364) / 100) )
Note: Nominal reactive power is not setpoint, but is calculated from Nominal power for PF = 0,8
Principle of droop operation

Connecting of the gen-set operating in droop to the common bus bar
Start command is received - start button in MAN mode or LBI REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) in AUTO
mode gets active
The gen-set operating in droop is not calculated in the load reserve.
LBI REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) is not influenced by power management and gen-set starts if it
gets active.
Gen-set is starting - voltage and speed regulation are set to Voltage Regulator Bias (page 354) and Speed
Governor Bias (page 346) (droop regulation is not active when GCB is opened).
Connecting to bus
Dead bus - controller is prohibited to close it’s GCB because of safety reasons (controller does not know
about other controllers). Only controller with setpoint Dead Bus GCB Close Master (page 362) =
ENABLED is allowed to close it’s GCB to the dead bus. Otherwise it must be done manually in MAN
mode.
Energized bus - controller starts synchronization (standard isochronous regulation).
GCB closes when synchronized - Now the droop regulation gets active
Disconnecting of loaded gen-set from common bus bar in droop

Gen-set is operating in droop and is loaded. Stop command is received - stop button in MAN mode or LBI
REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) in AUTO mode gets inactive.
Controller starts soft unload of loaded gen-set
Soft unload can be disabled via LBI DROOP UNLOAD DISL (PAGE 664) in case when there is the last gen-
set on the common bus bar and it is not possible to unload it. Then the GCB is opened immediately.
GCB opens when the active power drops under Unload MGCB Open LevelGenerator Unload GCB
Open Level (page 352), latest when timer Load Ramp (page 353) elapses.
Transition from droop to iscochronous regulations

The speed request during the transition from droop (or emergency droop) to is ochronous regulation is
changed smoothly (not in step). It prevents the system against overshoot of the frequency.
Frequency is changed by 2 Hz per Load Ramp (page 353).
Forcing of the regulation to droop

Droop regulation can be forced by LBI FORCE DROOP OPER (PAGE 665).
Principle of emergency droop

When Load/Var Sharing Regulation Type (page 361) = Emrg Droop, Isonchronous regulation is used until
the conditions for activation of emergency droop are fulfilled. After activation, emergency droop regulation is
used until the conditions for deactivation are fulfilled.

Conditions for activation
The number of controllers detected by the controller on can is lower than the number in the setpoint
#Number Of Controller On CAN (page 364).
#Emergency Droop On Delay (page 365) has count down.
Conditions for deactivation

The number of controllers detected by the controller on can is equal or higher than the number in the setpoint
#Number Of Controller On CAN (page 364).
#Emergency Droop Off Delay (page 365) has count down.
5.3.32 Alternate configuration

In controller are 3 sets of configuration.
Configuration set 1 Configuration set 2 Configuration set 3

Nominal Power 3 (page 463)
Nominal Power 1 (page 455) Nominal Power 2 (page 459)
Nominal Power Split Phase 3
Nominal Power Split Phase 1 Nominal Power Split Phase 2
(page 463)
(page 455) (page 459)
Nominal RPM 3 (page 464)
Nominal RPM 1 (page 456) Nominal RPM 2 (page 460)
Nominal Frequency 3 (page
Nominal Frequency 1 (page 456) Nominal Frequency 2 (page 460)
464)
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page
457) 461)
465)
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 (page Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page
457) 461)
465)
Nominal Current 1 (page 456) Nominal Current 2 (page 460)
Nominal Current 3 (page 464)
Connection Type 1 (page 453) Connection type 2 (page 457)
Connection type 3 (page 461)
Configuration sets can be changed via logical binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 615) and logical binary
input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 615).
IMPORTANT: Gen-set can not switch to the alternative setpoints when is running.

5.3.33 USB host
USB host is a function for programming of controller from USB Flash Drive. Following functions are supported:
Firmware upload
Configuration upload
Firmware and configuration upload
Configuration download
Image 5.61 USB host flowchart
Terminology:
The Archive = the native file of InteliConfig, including the complete Configuration + History + Statistic +
Values (in the time of download) + Alarm list.
Configuration = the part of Archive, in the terms of Configuration + Setpoints + PLC + IO definitions +
Languages.
New configuration = the configuration created in InteliConfig for the purpose of uploading it into the controller
using the USB memory stick. The new configuration is recognized due to it’s name. The name has to
contain the specific string ="InteliGen500-Genset name-M.N.P.B.aig3".
Compatible firmware = the firmware version compatible with the configuration in the controller. The name of
file including the firmware is "InteliGen500-M.N.P.B.bin".
Abbreviations:
CU - control unit
FW - firmware
CFG - configuration

Firmware upload
Point 1 - controller detects that USB Flash Drive has been inserted.
If the communication via USB B is running controller will not detect the USB memory key.
On the other hand if the USB memory key was detected, communication via USB B port is not possible.
Point 2 - controller is in OFF mode
All operations with USB memory key are possible only in OFF mode
Point 3 - Conditions for firmware upload with current configuration
The new firmware compatible with the version of the configuration in the controller has been detected
(and there is no new configuration file).
Detection is based on name of firmware - required name: "InteliGen500-M.N.P.B.bin"
There can be stored more firmwares on the USB Flash Drive. Controller automatically select the
compatible firmware with highest version.
Point 4 - Pop-up message
Confirmation of firmware upload with current configuration
Point 5 - Firmware upload
Current archive is download to USB Flash Drive (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM).
New firmware is uploaded into the controller without the change of the configuration
History record "USB Flash Drive FW upgrade" is made
Confirming file (.txt) on USB Flash Drive is made (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM)
Content: Serial number, Year/Date/Time, Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new FW" successful.
Confirmation pop-up message: "FW upgrade success"
Configuration upload
Point 9 - conditions for new configuration upload
The new configuration compatible with the version of the firmware in the controller has been detected
(and there is no new firmware file).
Detection is based on name of configuration - required name: "InteliGen500-Genset name-M.N.P.B.aig3"
There can be only one configuration file
Confirmation of configuration upload with current firmware
Point 11 - Configuration upload
Current archive is download to USB key (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM).
New configuration is uploaded into the controller without the change of the firmware

History record "USB key CFG upload" is made
Confirming file (.txt) on USB key is made (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM)
Content: Serial number, Year/Date/Time, Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new CFG" successful.
Confirmation pop-up message: "CFG upgrade success"
Firmware and configuration upload

Point 6 - conditions for new firmware and configuration upload
The new configuration has been detected. Also there is firmware file compatible with detected new
configuration
Detection is based on name of configuration - required name: "InteliGen500-Genset name-M.N.P.B.aig3"
and on name of firmware - required name: "InteliGen500-M.N.P.B.bin"
There can be only one configuration file
There can be stored more firmwares on the USB key. Controller automatically select the compatible
firmware with highest version.
Confirmation of configuration and firmware upload
Point 8 - Configuration and firmware upload
New firmware is uploaded into the controller
New configuration is uploaded into the controller
History record "USB key FW and CFG upload" is made
Confirming file (.txt) on USB key is made (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM)
Content: Serial number, Year/Date/Time, Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new FW" successful,
Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new CFG" successful.
Confirmation pop-up message: "FW and CFG upgrade success"
Configuration download
Points 3, 6, 9 - conditions for configuration download
There is no firmware or configuration with required name

Confirmation of configuration download
Point 11 - Configuration download
History record "USB key Archive download" is made
Confirmation pop-up message: "Archive download successful"
5.3.34 E-Stop
Binary outputs for the control of some essential functions are internally wired as "safe", it means, that their
deactivation is directly bind with the dedicated Input E-STOP (not evaluated as the LBI in the controller). This
BO are fully configurable and are used e.g. for the Starter and Fuel control.
The emergency stop circuit must be secured.
No accidental activation on the PCB, circuit must disable the operation of the emergency stop.
The power supply of the associated binary outputs (BIN1 and BIN2) is supplied by the E-STOP input, not by
the + battery voltage.
Note: There is no difference int the way of configuration of all binary outputs. Binary outputs BO1 (Starter), BO2
(Fuel Solenoid) are intended for these functions (not dedicated).
There is a measuring of E-STOP input voltage analogically and setting the binary value (representing
emergency stop input level) based on comparison of the measured voltage to two analog levels, which are
derived from the controller supply voltage (battery voltage) perceptually.
Image 5.62 SW principle of E-STOP
If the input voltage of E-stop is higher than high comparison level (for ex. higher than 80% of the supply
voltage), then E-stop is not activated.
If the input voltage of E-stop is lower than low comparison level (for ex. lower than 60% of the supply
voltage), then E-stop is activated.
If the input voltage of E-stop is located somewhere between low and high comparison levels (for ex. between 60
and 80 %of the supply voltage, then E-stop binary value will stay on its previous state (means E-stop binary
value will not change).

Visualization on CU screen
1 - E-STOP has voltage - state is OK
0 - E-STOP has no voltage - protection is active
More information about connection see E-Stop on page 40.
5.3.35 ECU Frequency selection

Setpoint ECU Freq Select is no longer in use. However ECU Frequency Select (page 562) value was kept
and the value can be calculated from Nominal Frequency (page 247) setpoint. Sequence for frequency
change is executed automatically (engine must be in still condition and ECU is powered on – ECU Power Relay
is not configured) in following 9 steps:
1. Starting of the engine is blocked (state: Not Ready)
2. Wait 100 ms
3. ECU Stop Pulse is set for 1000 ms (standard Stop Pulse duration)
4. Wait 3000 ms
5. Frequency selection is changed to a new value
6. Wait 2000 ms
7. ECU Stop Pulse is set for 1000 ms (standard Stop Pulse duration)
8. Wait 2000 ms
9. Come back from start blocking state
This sequence does not control LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 712) anyhow.
Note: If LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 712) is used, this change can be make only in prestart phase. So
prestart has to be set up for enough long time.
5.3.36 Mains import measurement

This functionality is applicable on SPTM application. This function is for gen-sets which are not equipped by the
mains import measurement. Then the soft transfer of the load in the direction Mains to Generator (Transfer
Mains To Gen Bus (page 351)) can´t be driven by the mains import measurement (mains unload level - Mains
Unload MCB Open Window (page 353)), but the load transfer duration must be defines by some certain time
interval ( Close Transfer Max Duration (page 350)).
Note: For situations when mains current is not measured by Mains CT (Mains Import Measurement = None or
Analog Input), PF is limited to Base Power Factor value even though PF Control PTM = PF Imp/Exp.
5.3.37 Load shedding

The Load shedding is controlled disconnection of less important load groups (circuits) when the object
consumption is too high. There are two functions of the load shedding:
To avoid loss of power at the fundamental loads in island mode, when the object consumption is getting near
to the maximum power of the gen-sets.
All Load shedding outputs are activated (closed) to trip the unessential load when gen-set goes to island:
When GCB is closed after mains fail and gen-set starts in AUT mode.
When MCB opens from parallel to mains operation in AUT mode.
Before MCB is opened in MAN mode by button.

How the Load shedding controls the Load shedding outputs
The load shedding function is active in all controller modes except OFF.
Load shedding has three steps and each step is linked with its own binary output, LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 1
(PAGE 725), LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 2 (PAGE 725) and LOAD SHEDDING STAGE 3 (PAGE 725)
The Load shedding outputs can be activated one by one in the direction 1, 2, 3. The condition for activation are
defined by setpoints Load Shedding Level (page 330) and Load Shedding Delay (page 330).
The Load shedding outputs are deactivated one by one according to the conditions given by the setpoints Load
Reconnection Level (page 330), Load Reconnection Delay (page 331), Auto Load Reconnection (page
331).
For manual reconnection of the load is desired the Auto Load Reconnection (page 331) setpoint needs to be
disabled and the MANUAL LOAD RECONNECTION (PAGE 671) digital input needs to be configured.
Image 5.63 Load shedding
Image 5.64 Load reconnection

Image 5.65 Load manual reconnection
5.3.38 Peak shaving

Peak shaving is applicable on SPtM application only. The function compares the mains import with some
certain limit and start the Gen-set when the load excised this limit to decrease the mains import for some certain
time.
The Peak shaving function is active only in AUT mode in Parallel to Mains operation. Peak shaving is based on
active power only. If load consumption increases over Peak Shaving Start Level (page 240) and for period
longer than Peak Shaving Start/Stop Delay (page 241) the Gen-set is started. If load consumption decreases
below Peak Shaving Stop Level (page 240) and period longer thanPeak Shaving Start/Stop Delay (page
241) the Gen-set is stopped. The activation of the function is indicated by LBO:PEAK SHAVING ACTIVE (PAGE
731).
Image 5.66 Peak shaving
6 back to Functions

6 Graphical User Interface
6.1 Graphical User Interface 157
6.2 Quick help 190
6.3 Custom configuration 193
6.1 Graphical User Interface

6.1.1 GUI overview
Front panel
Front panel of the unit uses hardware buttons for configuring, moving, scrolling, commands and other functions.
Image 6.1 : Front panel overview
Navigation buttons
Arrow buttons on the front panel are mainly used for navigation inside the entire graphical user interface. In
addition the arrows left and right are used for changing the controller mode if the actual position is any metering
screen.

Arrow left and right
Image 6.2 : Arrow left and right
The buttons are used for :

Changing the controller mode (only on metering screens)
Movement between history columns
Movement in the dialogs
Arrow up and down
Image 6.3 : Arrow up and down
The buttons are used for :

Cyclical movement between the metering Screens
Movement in the dialogs
Changing the value in the dialogs
Movement in menus
Listing on pages
Enter
Image 6.4 : Enter button
The button is used for :

Confirming the values
Confirming the selections
Confirming the listing options
Menu
Image 6.5 : Menu button
The button is used for :

Escape function
Step back function
Cyclical change of the page (from any metering screen)
Function buttons
Function buttons are dedicated for the performing of the concrete function. By pressing the button the controller
action or controller command is performed (see bellow).
Image 6.6 : Function buttons (Start, Stop, Alarm/Horn reset, Horn reset)
Start : starting of the Gen-set

Stop : stoping of the Gen-set
Alarm/Horn reset : resets the horn and confirms all the alarms in the alarmlist
Horn reset : resets only the horn
User buttons
Image 6.7 : User button
User button is dedicated for predefined user function.

Performing the controller command
Jump to the specific page or metering screen
special function on the pages
Special and button combination

In this manual the shortcut is a term for the combination of the buttons or long press of the button.
+
Image 6.8 : Shortcut (jump to the administration)
Enter + Menu : performs the jump to the administration. Enter button has to be pressed first.
Long press of the arrow up or down button
in the menus : performs the cyclical listing
in the dialog : velocity of the changing value is increased
based on special algorithm

Status LED
There is one multicolor (RGB) LED on the front panel of the unit. The specified color and flashing function
describes the actual state of the unit.
Image 6.9 : Status LED
LED intensity is directly connected with the actual setting of the backlight intensity in Administration menu
"Settings" accessible by shortcut Enter + Menu
the intensity respects the value of the Manual or External brigness control
The flashing of the status LED and indicative Alarm icon in the top statusbar have the same period
Meaning of the status LED colors is described below
Color and flashing function meaning :
Red is flashing
Active unconfirmed level2 (shutdown) alarm
Inactive unconfirmed level2 (shutdown) alarm
Lost of internal communication line
Controller unit in init state
Red lights
Active confirmed level2 (shutdown) alarm
Integrated color display unit in init state
Integrated color display unit booting procedure
Cyan lights
temperature inside the housing exceeded the 85°C (185°F)
Yellow lights
Active unconfirmed level1 (warning) alarm
Inactive unconfirmed level1 (warning) alarm
Active confirmed level1 (warning) alarm
Active unconfirmed fail sensor alarm
Inactive unconfirmed fail sensor alarm
Active confirmed fail sensor alarm
Green lights
unit is running correctly without any errors or alarms
Color state priority :
1. Red is flashing
2. Red lights
3. Cyan lights

4. Yellow lights
5. Green lights
Pages
There are several screens called pages in the graphical user interface (GUI), which are accessible by pressing
the Menu button or concrete user button in the bottom status bar. Each page has a different function and
different structure. Pages are described in special chapters in this manual.
The actual GUI consists of 6 different pages :
Metering screen
Alarmlist
Setpoints
History
Trends
Administration
Page administration is accessible only by pressing the combination of the Enter and Menu buttons from
the only Metering screen.
Screens
Each type of controller has special set of screens stored in the controller configuration. The description of the
each metering screens is by default predefined by ComAp. Scrolling between the screens is performed using
the arrow up and down buttons.
Special screens
There are 2 special screens stored in the unit :
Init screen
displayed during the booting procedure and in Administration menu
dedicated for specific user logo (by default predefined by ComAp)
Service screen
displayed in Administration menu
dedicated for useful technical information (by default predefined by ComAp)
Note: More information about Init and Service screen modification is described in concrete chapter of this
manual.
Dialogs
Values and parameters and other can be set in the controller via dialogs. There are several dialogs in the GUI.
Dialogs for numbers, texts and lists.
Dialog Value
The dialog value is dedicated for number setting. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and down are
used for number selection. Enter button confirms the option. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.

Image 6.10 : Dialog Value overview
Dialog Value Extended

The dialog value extended is dedicated for number setting with combination with one or more string value. When
the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and down are used for number/item selection. Enter button confirms the
option. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.
Image 6.11 : Dialog Value Extended overview
Dialog String List

The dialog string list is dedicated for list item selection. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and down
are used for item selection. Enter button confirms the option. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.

Image 6.12 : Dialog String List overview
Dialog Text
The dialog text is dedicated for text inserting or modification. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and
down are used for letter selection. Arrows left and right are used for moving between the letters in the text. Letter
DEL deletes actual selected letter (using move to left or right). Insert letter inserts the letter to the actual position
(using move to left or right) Enter button confirms the text modification. Menu button cancels the dialog without
saving.
Image 6.13 : Dialog Text overview
Note: Enter button is used for dialog confirmation and saving the entire text to the configuration and because of
this the DEL and INS letter is inserted using the left or right arrow button.
Dialog IP address
The dialog IP address is dedicated for IP address insertion. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and
down are used for number selection. Arrows left and right are used for moving between the IP cells. Enter button
confirms the option. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.

Image 6.14 : Dialog IP address overview
Dialog Message
The dialog message has informal character about the result of any action. Enter or Menu button cancels the
dialog without saving. There is no need to confirm the selection.
Image 6.15 : Dialog Message overview
Dialog Progress
The dialog progress has informal character about the result of any action. The progress bar and percents are
also displayed during the action performing. Enter or Menu button cancels the dialog without saving. There is no
need to confirm the selection.

Image 6.16 : Dialog Progress overview
Dialog Date
The dialog date is dedicated for date setting. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and down are used
for number selection. Arrows left and right are used for moving between the date cells. Enter button confirms the
option. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.
Image 6.17 : Dialog Date overview
Dialog Time
The dialog time is dedicated for date setting. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and down are used
for number selection. Arrows left and right are used for moving between the time cells. Enter button confirms the
option. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.

Image 6.18 : Dialog Time overview
Dialog Password
The dialog password is dedicated for password insertion. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up and
down are used for number selection. Enter button confirms the option. Menu button cancels the dialog without
saving.
Image 6.19 : Dialog Password overview
Dialog Password Change

The dialog password change is dedicated for password change. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow up
and down are used for number selection. Enter button confirms the first option and the same password must be
inserted again. Enter button after insertion the second cell performs the password change (in case the password
are same). Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.

Image 6.20 : Dialog Password Change overview
Note: The user must be logged in with respective rights to be able to change password for respective rights.
Dialog Timer
The dialog timer is dedicated for timer setting. When the dialog is active the buttons arrow left and right are used
for the line option selection. Enter button confirms the actual option in the line and the next option can be
performed. Enter button on the last line confirms all the option in dialog and save the timer settings to the
controller. Menu button cancels the dialog without saving.
Image 6.21 : Dialog Timer (Off) overview
Image 6.22 : Dialog Timer (Once) overview

Image 6.23 : Dialog Timer (Repeated) overview
Status bars
Bottom status bar
The bottom status bar is used for the user button functions. There are several status bars in the GUI. Bottom
status bar consists of 5 areas (user buttons) dedicated for emitting the command to the controller unit (e.g. GCB
open, GCB close, etc.), jump to the specified page (e.g. alarmlist, history) or special functions on some pages.

Image 6.24 : Example (bottom status bar on Home metering screen)
1. User button 1 - emitting the command to the controller or link to page in GUI or special function
Note: The button press is visually indicated by black frame around the button area. The indication does not
mean that requested command is performed, it is only press indication.
Note: Concrete status bar views for concrete page are described in specific chapters in this manual.
Top status bar

The top status bar can NOT be adjusted. Information in the top status bar is fixed and controlled by ComAp.
Image 6.25 Top Status Bar description

Image 6.26 : Top Status Bar - Mode selector dialog
1. Mode selector - Mode selector is dedicated for the controller mode selection. Using arrow left and right the
controller mode is changed (only on the metering screens). The choice must be always confirmed by enter
button. There is 5s timer for the automatic mode selector dialog cancellation. The mode selector dialog can
be also canceled by menu button.
2. Page title - Each page and each metering screen has its own title. The first number in square brackets
describes the actual metering screen position. The second number describes the total available number of
metering screens.
3. Trending - The icon is active when the trending is running. Icon is inactive when the trending is stopped.
4. USB Stick - The icon is active if the USB stick is plugged in the display unit. Icon is inactive if there is no
USB stick plugged in.
5. Access Lock - Access lock icon is active if the display is locked for security reasons. Icon is inactive if the
controller unit is not locked.
6. PC connection - PC connection icon is active if the unit established connection to the PC using the USB
cable. Icon is inactive if there is not established connection to the PC.
7. Alarm indication - The alarm icon is flashing red if there is at least one unconfirmed alarm (shutdown or
warning) in the alarmlist. The icon lights red if there is at least one confirmed active alarm and no
unconfirmed alarm in the alarmlist. The icon is inactive if the alarmlist is empty.
8. User - The user icon lights green if the user is logged in to the controller. The icon is inactive if the user is
logged out.
6.1.2 Metering screens

Metering screens are dedicated for important controller values and setpoints.
InteliGen 500 controller screens

InteliGen 500 metering screens are predefined by Comap and covers all the application types.
the movement between the metering screens is done using the arrow up and down buttons in the front panel
the entire screens and instruments on the screens are dynamically displayed or hidden based on the
following state of the controller unit :

Application type
Wiring controller settings
Connected PlugIn modules
Configured CAN modules
Aftertreatment ECU list settings
The following structure is predefined in the InteliGen 500 controller archive by default :
1. Home
2. Power
3. Generator
4. Mains
5. Bus
6. Synchro
7. Power Management
8. Analog inputs
9. Binary Inputs | Outputs
10. Statistics
11. Ethernet
12. Aftertreatment
13. CM-4G-GPS
14. CM-GPRS
15. EM-BIO8-EFCP-A
16. EM-BIO8-EFCP-B
17. CAN modules
18. ECU modules
19. Virtual modules
Note: Some of the screens are added automatically If external modules, ECU modules and others are added
using InteliConfig software. The screens are automatically removed if the respective module is removed from
the configuration.

Image 6.27 : InteliGen 500 metering screens overview
6.1.3 Alarmlist
The alarmlist page is intended for displaying the controller alarms. If any of the following type of the controller
alarm occurs The alarmlist page is displayed and also the alarm button in the Top status bar starts flashing
RED, even if it is not the shutdown alarm. The Automatic jump to the Alarmlist page is performed only in case
the actual GUI position is the Home metering screen. The alarm icon in the top status bar is informative icon
where the display unit informs the user that there is any alarm stored in the controller unit. Pressing the User
button 3 opens the alarmlist page. The alarmlist page is displayed until the alarmlist contains at least one
unconfirmed alarm.
There are 4 different types of controller alarms :
Warning (often also known as 1st level alarm) - represented by the YELLOW colour. These types of
alarms inform the user that something is wrong and need to be checked and confirmed.
Shutdown (often also known as 2nd level alarm) - represented by the RED colour. These types of
alarms protects the GenSet or Engine during the wrong state.
ECU alarm - represented by the BLUE colour. This type of alarm comes from the connected external ECU
units.
Sensor fail alarm - represented by the WHITE colour. A special kind of alarm that appears if any connected
sensor emits the wrong state.

Image 6.28 : Alarmlist Page
1. Alarm item number - displays the number of the concrete alarm.

2. Alarm item star - describes if the alarm is CONFIRMED or NOT COFIRMED. The confirmation action is
performed by the Alarm reset button in the front panel
a. Star is displayed - alarm is NOT CONFIRMED
b. Star is not displayed - alarm is CONFIRMED (using alarm reset button)
3. Alarm description - The short description of the alarm
4. Alarm coloring - There are specified the color and asterix combination
level 1 (warning) alarm
Active/unconfirmed : * / yellow background / dark text (asterix active)
Active/confirmed : yellow background / dark text (asterix inactive)
Inactive/unconfirmed : * / dark background / yellow text / asterix active
level 2 (shutdown) alarm
Active/unconfirmed : * / red background / white text (asterix active)
Active/confirmed : red background / white text (asterix inactive)
Inactive/unconfirmed : * / dark background / red text (asterix active)
sensor fail alarm
Active/unconfirmed : * / white background / dark text (asterix active)
Active/confirmed : white background / dark text (asterix inactive)
Inactive/unconfirmed : * / dark background / white text (asterix active)
ECU alarm
Active/unconfirmed : * / blue background / white text (asterix active)
Active/confirmed : blue background / white text (asterix inactive)
Inactive/unconfirmed : * / dark background / blue text (asterix active)
5. Topstatus bar Alarmlist icon - The alarm icon is fashing red if there is at least one unconfirmed alarm
(shutdown or warning) in the alarmlist. The icon lights red if there is at least one confirmed active alarm and
no unconfirmed alarm in the alarmlist. The icon is inactive if the alarmlist is empty. This is information that
something is wrong and need to be checked and resolved.

Note: The Alarmlist displays maximum 8 alarm items at the same time. If there is more than 8 alarms in the
alarmlist it is possible to list in the page to another alarm items by arrow up and down buttons.
Note: The alarmlist page is automatically displayed and backlight is turned on if the new alarm appears (only in
case the actual GUI position is the Home metering screen).
IMPORTANT: InteliGen 500 controller displays maximum 16 alarms.
IMPORTANT: Alarm reset button confirms all the unconfirmed alarms stored in controller.
IMPORTANT: If the actual GUI position is Alarmlist page and there is at least one uncofirmed alarm
in the Alarmlist the jump to the home metering screen and backlight timeout are ignored.
6.1.4 Setpoints
The setpoint page is intended for setting the controller values. Each type of controller has specific setpoints to
be set. The setpoints also depend on the type of application like SPtM and MINT. Availability of the setpoint
item also depends on configuration level settings in Administration page. Setpoint is set in 2 steps.
1st step - Setpoint group is selected using buttons arrow up and down and confirmed using enter button
Image 6.29 : Setpoints Page overview
1. Setpoints group - the column setpoint group displays the available groups based on the controller,
application type and configuration level settings. Respective setpoint group is selected using enter button.
2. Available setpoints in actually selected group - each setpoint group contains specific setpoints. The
informative column Setpoint name displays the available set of setpoints to be set in each Setpoint group.
This column is only informative and can NOT be set usiing the arrow left and right. The setpoint setting is
done using the 2nd step - see below.
2nd step - Setpoint item is selected using the buttons arrow up and down and the dialog for value setting is
called using the enter button. The dialogs are described in the chapter Dialogs.

Image 6.30 : Group Setpoints Page
1. Setpoint name - Setpoint is set using the enter button. Specific dialog is displayed and the value can be set.
There are several types of dialogs (text, numeric, stringlist) and the type of called dialog depends on the
setpoint type. The dialogs are described in the chapter Dialogs.
2. Actual value - Informative actual value for specific setpoint is displayed. Value range, original value and
default value for the selected setpoint are displayed inside the dialog.

Password screen
The group Password is not setpoint group. This Password item is manually placed to the first group position on
the program code level just for this controller unit.
Image 6.31 : Main Setpoints Page
1. Password item - the item dedicated for the password settings, login and logout.
Image 6.32 : Setpoints Password Page
1. Logged Access Level Info - the information about actually logged in access rights.
a. 0 - user has access rights 0, which means logged-out
b. 0,1 - user has access rights 0 + 1 access rights
c. 0,1,2 - user has access rights 0 + 1 + 2 access rights
d. 0,1,2,3 - user has access rights 0 + 1 + 2 + 3, which means administrator rights
2. Password Actions - the list of available password actions.
a. Enter Password - calls the dialog for password insert
b. Change Password - calls the dialog for password change of respective access rights
3. Logout Button - is active in case of any user is logged in. The button is inactive if any user is logged out -
this is indicated by green light of 0 access level.

6.1.5 History
The history page displays the records of the important moments in the controller history.
There are 2 types of history records :
Event records - are also known as standard history records. This type of record appears in case the
controller event has been made. The time stamp history also belongs in the event history. The time record is
stored for a specified period of time.
System records - are also known as text history record. These type of records are generated during the user
login/off, controller programming or other system actions.
Image 6.33 : History page overview
1. Fixed column - has a different shade of colour. Fixed column is always merged and anchored on the left
side of the history page.
2. Event history record - this type of record appears in case the controller event has been made.The time
stamp history also belongs in the event history. The time record is stored for a specified period of time.
Pressing the enter button the dialog with detailed information for selected record is displayed.
3. System history record - this type of record appears in case the controller system action has been
made.The time stamp history also belongs in the event history. The time record is stored for a specified
period of time. Pressing the enter button the dialog with detailed information for selected record is displayed.
4. Jump to first row and column - the jump to the first row and first column is performed if the button is
pressed.
5. Listing mode - by pressing this button the listing mode is changed. There are available 3 modes : listing by
1 item, listing by 1 page, listing by 10 page. The mode is useful if the history is full of records. Listing mode is
also automatically changed if the listing buttons arrow up and down are pressed for longer time. Original
mode is set when the listing buttons are released.

Image 6.34 : History page - Item detail dialog
Note: Pressing the enter button on the actually selected row the dialog with detailed information for selected
record is displayed.
IMPORTANT: Each controller unit supports the specific number of history records. E.g. controller
InteliGen 500 supports 500 history records. Default configuration consists of 33 columns. Maximal
column amount is approximately 100 columns based on the type of the observed value.
6.1.6 Administration
6 back to Graphical User Interface
Init screen
The init screen is the special screen (bitmap) defined and stored in the controller. The init screen is displayed
during the booting procedure. The init screen is also accessible from administration as a first list item. The
purpose of the init screen is to allow the user to create and show his own initial logo screen during the booting
procedure. The init screen logo can be uploaded using the InteliConfig. By default the init screen is predefined
by ComAp.
Image 6.35 : Init screen overview

Controller Info
Controller info page is dedicated for important information about the entire unit. These information is useful
mainly for issue troubleshooting .
Controller info page is divided into 3 main blocks of information :
Integrated Color Display unit
Controller unit
Configuration
Image 6.36 : Administration Page - Controller Info
Note: Similar values with similar structure can be displayed using InteliConfig PC tool.

Modules Info
Modules info page is dedicated for important information about the connected modules information. The page
Modules Info displays the information from the following type of connected modules :
Plug-In modules
CAN peripheral extension modules
Image 6.37 : Administration Page - Modules Info
Note: The availability of the connected module depends on the type of controller unit.
Settings
Image 6.38 : Administration Page - Settings
1. Backlight Time - if the cell area is pressed the dialog for time settings is displayed. The user is able to set
the period from 1 up to 241 minutes. There is also the option to set NO Timeout which means the display unit
is backlighted forever.
2. Brightness Control :
a. Manual (by default) - the value of the backlight is set manually using the value dialog (point 3)
b. External - the value of the backlight is given by the Analog Input settings in InteliConfig and connected
value of resistor, voltage or current (based on the type of the selected sensor).

3. Brightness intensity - the value is selected using the value dialog. Note the value is applied immediately
during the change of the value.
4. Internal Temperature information- gives the actual inside temperature of the unit. There is implemented
automatic mechanism for lowering the backlight intensity based the internal derating backlight curve. If the
inside temperature exceeds 35 °C the area behind the temperature lights yellow. The yellow color indicates
that the display backlight curve is applied and automatically starts derate the backlight intensity. The
backlight intensity returns to normal when the temperature is decreased bellow 35 °C. This feature saves the
lifetime of the internal components.
IMPORTANT: It is strongly recommended to use backlight on the standard level max. 60%.
Maximal backlight intensity level of 100% is suitable only for application with higher amount of the
ambient light. Be aware that higher intensity level means higher surface front glass temperature
and lower lifetime.
IMPORTANT: It is strongly recommended to use Backlight Time (timer) set on the reasonable
amount of time (approximately 30 minutes) during the normal running genset or engine phase. It is
because of saving lifetime of the display unit. The display unit is still running if the backlight is off.
For switching on the LCD backlight the simple pressing any button is necessary.
Languages
Image 6.39 : Administration Page - Languages
Language settings - the list of languages stored in the controller configuration is displayed in the list of
possible languages.
The integrated color display unit can display the following languages
English
Chinese
The integrated color display unit can partially display the following languages
Bulgarian, Taiwan, Czech, German, Greek, Spanish, Finnish, French, Hungarian, Icelandic, Italian,
Japanese, Korean, Dutch - Netherlands, Norwegian, Polish, Roman, Russian, Croatian, Slovak,
Swedish, Turkish, Ukrainian, Slovenian, Estonian, Latvian, Lithunian, Vietnamese, Italian, Portuguese,
Bosnian

IMPORTANT: Even the language is configured in InteliConfig the specific language is unavailable
if the language is available in configuration (but empty) or the language is not supported by
integrated color display unit.
Note: The flag is not displayed if the language is supported but the flag icon does not exist in the integrated
color display unit.
Confiuration level
Image 6.40 : Administration Page - Configuration Level
Standard - Limited amount of settings are available for configuration. The description which settings are
available in chapters concerning to controller functions.
Advanced - Set by factory default. All the settings are available for configuration. Be aware that only
experiences users should perform the settings of extended functions.
Note: By default the Advanced settings is selected which means all the setpoints are available by default. To
restrict the availability the Standard setting must be performed. The advanced and standard category are set in
InteliConfig PC application.

Export / Import
Image 6.41 : Administration Page - Export & Import
Import Package - is dedicated for integrated color display unit firmware updated, controller firmware
update, controller archive update. Extension modules firmware update is not supported.
If the USB stick is not connected the import function is not available and visually indicated as a
greyed text.
File packages used for firmware import can be prepared only in InteliConfig PC application only.
The files (*.pcg3) prepared in InteliConfig (for import) must be stored in the root of USB stick folder -
the only root folder is supported for import.
Import function is always protected by Administrator (level 3 access rights) password. Until the
correct password is not inserted the import function is unavailable. Be aware that there is
implemented algorithm to have password protected against the brute force attempts.
The message dialog (Controller unit is not ready) is displayed if the controller is not in state ready for
programming (e.g. genset running)
Export Archive - is dedicated for the entire archive export.
If the USB stick is not connected the export function is not available and visually indicated as a
greyed text.
The archive files (*.aig3) is exported to the fixed directory in the USB stick (root:/IG500/Archive.
The directory structure is automatically created if does not exist.

Export function is not protected by password.
The message dialog (Controller unit is not ready) is displayed if the controller is not in state ready for
archive export (e.g. genset running)
Waiting dialog is displayed during the export process.
The message dialog is displayed after archive proccess.
Archive Export Successful if successfully exported.
Archive Export Failed if any error occurs during the export proccess.
Integrated color display unit is restarted after export proccess.
Note: Once the USB stick is inserted to the display unit the directory and its subdirecotries are created
automatically if does not exist.
IMPORTANT: Requested files to be imported must be saved in the root directory on a USB Stick.
Imported File selection
Image 6.42 : Administration Page - Export & Import - File selection
File selection - is available if the conditions above (in section Import Package) is fulfilled
Only files with pcg3 extension is displayed.
Maximum 100 files (*.pcg3) in root is displayed.
The message dialog (Package Incompatible) is displayed if the incompatible pcg3 file is used
The message dialog (Invalid File) is displayed if the pcg3 file is invalid or corrupted

Import proccess
Image 6.43 : Administration Page - Export & Import - Import process
Import process - is available if the correct and compatible file is selected conditions above (in section
Import Package) is fulfilled
The import process is not allowed if at least one file in the package is not compatible with each other -
the Import button is not displayed.
When the Import process is started it is not possible to interrupt it.
Bar Message is displayed
Package Import Successful (green colored) - if success
Package Import Failed (red colored) - if any error during the process
the user is informed about the actual item progress
- the file has been imported correctly
- the file import is under progress
- the file is incompatible

The device is rebooted after import process.
IMPORTANT: Integrated color display unit firmware is updated in two steps. Firstly the firmware is
uploaded to the internal memory (indicated by icon ). The second step is the firmware update
from internal memory. The firmware is updated immediately after reboot using bootloader
(Indicated by progress bars and messages in limited GUI). After all the unit is automatically started
with new firmware.
IMPORTANT: Only in some special cases the import process using USB stick must be performed
twice. This situation is always described in New Feature List with more detailed information.
IMPORTANT: Only FAT16 and FAT32 file system on USB stick are supported.
Note: If the USB stick is plugged in the Import/Export page is automatically displayed.
Note: If the import process fails try the import process again.

Note: If the import process fails try to create new package file using InteliConfig.
Service screen
The service screen is the special screen (bitmap) defined and stored in the controller. The service screen is also
accessible from administration as a last list item. The purpose of the service screen is to allow the site
administrator to put into the display (resp. controller) important data for technical support. The status screen can
be uploaded using the InteliConfig. By default the service screen is predefined by ComAp.
Image 6.44 : Service screen overview

6.1.7 Trends
Image 6.45 : Trends page overview
The Trends page is divided on to 3 main blocks :

Main Trends Window is intended to display all trends. The view and chart movement is fully automatic.
Channel panel displays the actual values and sample period.
Function buttons is intended for start, stop and settings of the trends.
Image 6.46 : Trends page description
1. X axis -X axis displays the time stamps. The view of X axis is fully automatic.
2. Y axis - If the default range is not suitable for the displaying of the value it can be adjusted in settings option.
See bellow for more information.
3. Grid - the grid is displayed behind the trends charts. The grid is fully automatic.
4. Trend line - each channel have different colour for better value identification. The color of the trend line
match to the Value color in channel panel.
5. Actual period - Actual period settings. The period can be adjusted in settings option.
6. Actual channel value panels - display the values of the newest (actual) sample.

7. Trend Icon (Top Status bar) -if the trends are running the informative icon is shown in the top status bar
8. Start / Stop button - the button is dedicated for manual start and stop of the trends. It is possible to setup
the automatic start of trending based on the trigger. There are 2 trigers : Return to Home metering screen and
the specified bit of the available binary value.
9. Channel settings button - There are some settings available for the trends. See more information bellow.

Trends settings
Trends settings page is dedicated for the available trends settings. The navigation in trends settings page is
done by buttons arrow up, arrow down, arrow left, arrow right, enter, user button 1 and 2.
Image 6.47 : Trends page settings overview
1. Channel value - the channel value menu appears if the enter button is pressed just on the position. Inside
the channel value menu the the requested channel value can be selected. The value availibility depends on
the type of configuration stored in the controller.
2. Low limit value - the low limit value is intended for changing the low border of the value range. For the best
view of the displayed trends it is highly recommended to set this limit to the minimum expected value with
some reserve.
3. High limit value - the high limit value is intended for changing the low border of the value range. For the best
view of the displayed trends it is highly recommneded to set this limit to the maximum expected value with
some reserve.
4. Quick channel removal - pressing the enter button on the trash bin icon the actual channel is not
configured.
5. Period - section is dedicated for setting of the sample time period.
6. Run - the section is intended for the selection of the run mode
a. once - trending only until the trend chart window is full
b. circular - cyclic mode (trending is repeated continuously) - be aware the samples are stored only in
internal temporar memory, the trend chart starts moving when the trend chart window is full, the oldest
samples are trashed out
7. Start option - The start of trends are triggered by the start option. There are 3 start options.
a. Binary state - the trigger is the bit of the selected binary value. Manual start and stop is still active.
b. Manual (by default) - the triger is the start button called by user.
c. Home - the trigger is the return to the Home metering screen from any GUI position. Manual start and
stop is still active.
8. Bit of binary value selection - If the start option is set to Binary state then the field for the bit of the
concrete binary value is activated.
9. Acknowlegment button - Pressing the user button 1 (Confirm) the settings are saved.
10. Cancel button - Pressing the user button 2 (Cancel) the settings are canceled and the main trends page is
displayed without any change of the trends configuration.

Note: To get the best view of the displayed trends it is recommended to manually set the typical value range for
each channel.
IMPORTANT: If the trending is started and the changes have been made in the settings the trending
is restarted based on the new settings.
IMPORTANT: Be aware the samples are stored only in internal temporar memory. Trend chart
starts moving when the trend chart window is full, the oldest samples are trashed out.
IMPORTANT: There is no option to store the trends to the external memories like USB stick, etc.
6.2 Quick help

6.2.1 Logging in/off to the Controller

The user is able to log in/off to/from the controller via the menu Passwords in Setpoint page.
Image 6.48 : Password menu
1. Current Access Rights are shown on the top of the page.

2. Press the button on item Enter Password, the Password dialog will appear.
3. Insert the correct password. If the password is not correct, the user is informed about it. Be aware there is a
brute force algorithm protection implemented.
4. The icon (user) in the top status bar turns green when the user is logged in.
Image 6.49 : Password dialog

Note: Each Access Rights password can be changed by inserting old password and new password.
IMPORTANT: If the setpoint is protected by password the password dialog appears when the
attempt to password change is performed.
IMPORTANT: Be aware there is a brute force algorithm protection implemented. If the brute force
protection is active then the user is informed by Invalid Password message even the password is
inserted correctly.
6.2.2 Important values

The important controllers values and system buttons are displayed by default and accessible from the Home,
Power and Synchro metering screens. The breaker status, controller status and system timer are also displayed
on the Home metering screen.
Image 6.50 : Important values
6.2.3 Gen-set mode change
Image 6.51 : Genset mode change
1. Press the button arrow left or right in any metering screen

2. Change the controller mode using button arrow left or right and confirm the selection using enter button.
3. If all the controller conditions are fulfilled the GenSet mode is changed.
IMPORTANT: If the controller mode setpoint is protected by password the password dialog appears
when the attempt to confirm the selection is performed.
6.2.4 Password change

The password change can be performed using the Password menu in Setpoint page.

Image 6.52 : Password menu
1. Choose the item for which access right you want to change password.
2. Using password change dialog enter correct old and new requested password and confirm the choice.
3. The password for respective Access Rights level is changed.
6.2.5 Display brightness settings

The display brightness setting is adjustable using the Administration Menu - InteliVision Settings.
Image 6.53 : Display brightness settings
Backlight Timeout - can be set at a range of 1 to 254 minutes or Disabled. Disabled means the backlight never
shuts down.
Brightness control
1. If the manual mode is chosen the user is responsible for his own backlight intensity.
2. If the External mode is chosen the display unit expects the external resistor (potentiometer) on its Analog
input. The type of sensor can be set in InteliConfig
Brightness intensity - The backlight intensity can be adjusted using the value dialog from 1 up to 100%. It is
not possible to set 0 to avoid total shutdown of backlight intensity.
IMPORTANT: It is strongly recommended to use maximum backlight if it is really needed. The

temperature of the LCD grows linearly with the set of LCD backlight intensity. The product lifetime
is temperature dependant. In general it means higher temperature lower lifetime.
IMPORTANT: It is strongly recommended to set the Backlight Timeout to reasonable time (e.g 5
minutes). If the backlight is off then any button press switch on the backlight again.

6.2.6 State messages
State message Description
Running Indication of correctly running controller.
Controller unit initialization is under progress. The message is displayed
Initialize control unit
during the booting procedure.
Control unit is programmed The controller upgrade process is under progress.
Controller configuration reading is in progress. Text disappears when
Configuration Reading
controller is detected.
Detecting main CU failed Internal communication error.
Unsupported configuration format Configuration version is not supported
Screens template has unsupported screen format. Screens template is
Unsupported screen format
missing in configuration.
Control unit firmware is corrupted Controller unit is not in valid state.
Wrong configuration content Content of the configuration in controller unit does not match to configuration.
6 back to Quick help
6.3 Custom configuration

6.3.1 Init or Service screen logo customization

There is a possibility to change the init or service screen logo.
Image 6.54 : Default init and service screen logos
1. Make your own starting logo.

2. The image resolution is 800 x 480 pixels. Target image format is *.png, *.jpg or *.bmp.
3. Open InteliConfig PC application and connect to the controller where you want to change the logo (init,
service or both at the same time).

4. Click to the tab Tools - USB Flash Export - Exporting Manager
5. Prepare the package with the requested logos (Init, Service, or both). It is possible to prepare the package
only with the logos.
6. Confirm your choice and save the package file in the root directory of your USB stick.
7. Insert the USB stick into the controller unit.
8. Administration - Import/Export screen is automatically displayed when the USB stick is inserted. Or if the
USB stick is already inserted use Enter + Menu button combination from metering screen, select the
Import/Export item.
9. Select Import package. Insert the administrator (Access Rights level 3) password if not logged in.
10. Press user button 1 (Import)
11. The new logo(s) is(are) being imported to the Controller unit.
12. The device is rebooted and new logos imported.
13. Remove the USB Stick.

7 Communication
7.1 PC 195
7.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 202
7.1 PC
7.1.1 Direct communication 195
7.1.2 Remote communication 197
7.1.1 Direct communication

A RS232, USB, RS485 or ethernet interface can be used for direct cable connection to a PC.
Connection via RS232

A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS232 connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 50.
RS232 interface uses COM1 Mode (page 466) port of the controller. Use a cross-wired serial communication
cable with DB9 female connectors and signals Rx, Tx, GND.
Note: Also USB-RS232 convertor can be used.
Image 7.1 Cross-wired RS232 cable is used
Image 7.2 Cross-wired RS232 cable and USB is used

Connection via RS485
Plug-in module CM-RS232-485 or on board RS485 connector can be used for communication via RS485
connection.
A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS485 connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 50.
RS485 interface uses COM2 Mode (page 467) port of the controller.
Note: Also USB-RS485 convertor can be used.
Image 7.3 Built-in RS485 is used
Image 7.4 Plug-in module CM RS232-485 is used
Connection via Ethernet

This connection type is used for communication with the controller from InteliConfig or any other PC tool. Eight
remote clients can be connected at the same time (six direct IP clients and two AirGate clients).
To connect your PC tool to the controller use the INTERNET connection type and just put the Ethernet IP
address into the gen-set address box in the PC tool.
Image 7.5 Ethernet cable is used
Connection via USB

USB interface uses HID profile.

Image 7.6 Shielded USB type A cable is used
6 back to Communication
7.1.2 Remote communication

A PC can be connected to the controller also remotely via CM-4G-GPSCM-GPRS or the built-in ethernet
interface.
IMPORTANT: Factory default password and access code are "0". It is necessary to change them to
avoid Default Credentials (page 795) or Default Credentials (page 820) alarm.
Ethernet LAN connection

Direct IP LAN connection is intended to be used if the Ethernet module is reachable from the client computer by
specifying the IP address at which the module can be contacted.
If direct IP connection is to be used within a local network the Ethernet must have static IP address in the
respective local network.
Image 7.7 Ethernet LAN connection
Setting-up static IP address

There are two basic ways to get the static IP address.
First way is to switch theEthernet to manual IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode (page
255) to FIXED. In that case all setpoints of IP settings (IP Address (page 256), Subnet Mask (page 256),
Gateway IP (page 257), DNS IP Address 1 (page 258) and DNS IP Address 2 (page 258)) have to be
adjusted manually. If this method is used several basic rules should be kept to avoid conflicts with the
remaining network infrastructure:

The static IP used in the controller must be selected in accordance with the local network in which Ethernet
is connected.
The static IP used in the controller must be excluded from the pool of addresses which is assigned by
DHCP server, which is in charge of the respective local network.
The local infrastructure must generally allow using devices with manually assigned IP addresses.
There must not be any other device using the same static IP address. This can be tested from a computer
connected to the same network using "ping <required_ip_address>" command issued from the command
line. The IP address is not occupied if there is not any response to the ping command.
Note: The list above contains only basic rules. Other specific restrictions/rules may take place depending on
the local network security policy, technology used, topology etc.
Next way is to switch the Ethernet to automatic IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode (page
255) to AUTOMATIC. In that case all IP settings are assigned by DHCP server. Then configure the DHCP
server to assign always the same IP address (i.e. static IP address) to the particular Ethernet according to it's
MAC address.
Internet connection
Public static IP
If public static IP connection is to be used from the Internet, the IP address, which is entered into the client
computer, must be static and public in scope of the Internet.
If Ethernet is connected to Internet via a local ethernet network then in most cases port forwarding must
be created from the public IP address of the network gateway to the local IP address of Ethernet at the
port specified for ComAp protocol. Different port numbers can be used to create multiple port forwarding
rules in the same local network.
AirGate
This connection type is intended for remote connection from InteliConfig,or any other ComAp PC tool over the
Internet in situations, where obtaining fixed public IP address is not possible. Two remote clients can be
connected at the same time.

This connection type is active if AirGate connection is enabled. Setpoint AirGate Address (page 260) must
contain AirGate server address. It can be entered in text form as well as numeric form. There is a public AirGate
server available at address "airgate.comap.cz".
Once the controller is attached to the Internet and the AirGate server address is properly adjusted then the
controller registers automatically to the server and an identification string AirGate ID is given to a controller,
which is visible at the controller screen.
To connect your PC tool to the controller use the AirGate connection, put the the same AirGate address as in
the controller into the AIRGATE ADDRESS field and use the AirGate ID displayed on the controller.
SMS
Event SMS
The InteliGen 500 controller equipped with the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication module is able to
send Event SMS according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 485)
Note: Firstly setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 486) has to be adjusted.
The following events can be received by mobile phone:

Engine Start/Stop
Manual Start/Stop
Remote Start/Stop
Load on Gen-set
Message structure:
Genset Name (hh:mm:ss dd.mm.yyyy)
hh:mm:ss Load on Genset
Alarm SMS
The InteliGen 500 controller equipped with the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication module is able to
send Alarm SMS according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 485)
BOC Message (page 485)
Sd Messages (page 486)
Note: Firstly setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 486) has to be adjusted.
Message structure:
Gen-set Name
AL=(Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Alarm x)
Note: Asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and exclamation mark means that alarm is active.

SMS commands
To control the gen-set equipped with InteliGen 500 controller and CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication
module (or modem) via SMS requests, send an SMS in the structure of:
# xxxx, yyyy, zzzz, etc.
SMS send to the telephone number of the SIM card in your CM-GPRS module (or modem). Where the “#” mark
means the controller access code, “xxxx” means the Command 1, “yyyy” is Command 2, “zzzz” is Command 3,
etc.
Note: Access code is set up via InteliConfig.
IMPORTANT: If wrong controller access code is set, then only help command is working.
start Start the engine in MAN mode.

stop Stop the engine in MAN mode.
fault reset Acknowledging alarms and deactivating the horn output.
gcb close Closing GCB in MAN and TEST mode.
gcb open Opening GCB in MAN and TEST mode.
off Switching to OFF mode.
man Switching to MAN mode.
auto Switching to AUTO mode.
status Get status information from controller unit.
help Get a list of available SMS requests.
Note: Between commands are internal delays adjusted due to system requirements.
Example: When the controller, in AUTO mode, with a controller name of “InteliGen 500-Test”, with the CM-
GPRS module and access code “0” receives the SMS:
0 man, start, gcb close, gcb open, stop, auto
Controller mode will be changed to MANUAL mode. The engine will be started and GCB will close. Then
GCB will open, the engine will stop and it will go into AUTO mode again.
The controller will send back the SMS (controller will respond to SMS after every command has been
finished, not sooner.):
#InteliGen 500-Test: <OK>,<OK>,<OK>, <OK>,<OK>, <OK>
The value <OK> or <ERROR> means if the command has been performed succesfuly or not.
Emails
Event Email
The InteliGen 500 controller equipped with the Ethernet communication module is able to send Event Email
according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 485)
Note: Firstly setpoints Email Address 1 (page 481) and SMTP Sender Address (page 266) (for Ethernet)
have to be adjusted.
Note: #Summer Time Mode (page 426) and Time Zone (page 484) have to be adjusted for correct time in
emails.

Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss
Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Events
-----------------------------------------------
hh:mm:ss Event 1
hh:mm:ss Event 2
hh:mm:ss Event 3
Alarm Email
The InteliGen 500 controller equipped with the Ethernet communication module is able to send Alarm Emails
according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 485)
BOC Message (page 485)
Sd Messages (page 486)
Note: Firstly setpoints Email Address 1 (page 481) and SMTP Sender Address (page 266) (for Ethernet)
have to be adjusted.
Note: #Summer Time Mode (page 426) and Time Zone (page 484) have to be adjusted for correct time in
emails.

Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss
Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
History events
-----------------------------------------------
0 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 1
-1 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 2
-2 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 3
Note: Asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and exclamation mark means that alarm is active.
7.2 Connection to 3rd party systems

7.2.1 SNMP 202
7.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 204
7.2.1 SNMP
SNMP is an UDP-based client-server protocol used for providing data and events into a supervisory system
(building management system). The controller plays the role of a „SNMP Agent“ while the supervisory system
plays the role of a „SNMP Manager“.
Ethernet module is required for SNMP function
Supported versions - SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c
The SNMP Agent function is to be enabled by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page 267) in the Ethernet setpoint
group. The setpoints SNMP RD Community String (page 267) and SNMP WR Community String (page
267) in the same group can be used to customize the „community strings“ for the read and write operations

which have function like „passwords“. All requests sent from the SNMP Manager have to contain community
string which match with the community string adjusted in the controller otherwise the controller refuses the
operation.
MIB table
The „MIB table“ (Management Information Base) is a table which gives to the Manager description of all objects
provided by the Agent.
The MIB table is specific for each controller type and configuration
The MIB table is to be exported from the controller configuration using InteliConfig
Controllers with identical firmware and configuration share also identical MIB table, however if the
configuration and/or firmware is not identical the MIB table is different and must be exported separately for
each controller.
The root node of the MIB table of InteliGen controller is enterprises.comapProjekt.il, which is
1.3.6.1.4.1.28634.14. Under this node there are following sub-nodes :
Notifications group (SMI v2 only) contains definitions of all notification-type objects that the Agent may send
to the Manager.
GroupRdFix contains read-only objects that exist in all controller regardless of the firmware version/type and
configuration.
GroupRdCfg contains read-only objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
GroupWrFix contains read-write objects that exist in all controller regardless of the firmware version/type
and configuration.
GroupWrCfg contains read-write objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
GroupW contains write-only objects.
NotificationData group contains objects that are accessible only as bindings of the notification messages.
SMI version
In InteliConfig the MIB table may be exported in two different formats – SMI v1 and SMI v2. The format which
shall be used for export depends on the SNMP Manager and SMI version that it does support.
Typically, SMI v1 is used for SNMP v1 and vice versa, but it is not a rule and SMI v2 may be also used for
SNMP v1.
SNMP reserved objects
Name OID Access Data type Meaning

Writing: command argument
pfActionArgument groupWrFix.24550 read,write Gauge32
Reading: command return value
pfActionCommand groupW.24551 write Integer32 Command code 1)
pfPassword groupW.24524 write Integer32 Password
1) For list of commands, arguments and description of the procedure of invoking commands see the description
of the MODBUS protocol.

SNMP notifications
Except the request-response communication model, in which the communication is controlled by the Manager,
there are also messages that the Agent sends without any requests. These messages are called „Notifications“
and inform the Manager about significant events occurred in the Agent.
The controller can send notifications to two different SNMP Managers (two different IP addresses). The
addresses are to be adjusted in the Ethernet setpoint group by the setpoints SNMP Traps IP Address 1 (page
268) and SNMP Traps IP Address 2 (page 268). If the Manager address is not adjusted the particular
notification channel is off. The controller will send the notifications in format adjusted by the setpoint SNMP
Trap Format (page 268).
Each notification (kind of event) is identified by an unique identifier (Trap ID in SNMPv1 or Notification OID
in SNMPv2). This unique identifier gives the specific meaning to the notification message, e.g. Protection 1.
level - Fuel Level - alarm activated.
All possible notifications and their identifiers are listed in the MIB table.
The notification message also contains controller name, serial number and textual description of the event.
Operational events
This events are used for SNMP traps. See the list below:
Start commands of gen-set
Start button
Remote start
Stop commands of gen-set
Stop button
Remote stop
Breaker record
Load on gen-set
7.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP

MODBUS protocol is used for integration of the controller into a building management system or for remote
monitoring via 3rd party monitoring tools.
MODBUS-RTU can be used with serial interfaces (via on board RS485 connector or via CM-RS232-485
communication module). The MODBUS-RTU server must be activated by switching the setpoint RS485
Mode (page 253) or COM2 Mode (page 467) to the Modbus position. The serial speed for MODBUS-RTU
communication is to be adjusted by the setpoint RS485 MODBUS Speed (page 254) or COM2 MODBUS
Communication Speed (page 468).
MODBUS/TCP can be used with the built-in ethernet interface. Up to 3 clients can be connected
simultaneously. The MODBUS/TCP server must be activated by the setpoint MODBUS Server (page
269).
MODBUS, MODBUS/TCP protocol can be used simultaneously with direct Ethernet connection and the SNMP
agent.

IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoint repeatedly(e.g. power control form a PLC repeated writing of
baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory. which can be
overwritten up to 105 times without risk of damage or data loss, but may become damaged, when
the allowed number of writing cycles is exceeded!
Address space
The object address space is separated into several areas as described in the table below. The actual mapping of
specific controller data objects to specific MODBUS addresses, which depends on configuration, can be
exported into a text file from the appropriate controller archive using InteliConfig. There are several special
registers with fixed meaning (reserved registers) which are listed in a separate table in this chapter.
MODBUS MODICON object

Meaning Access MODBUS function
address type
0000 .. 0999 Binary objects Read only Discrete Inputs Read: 01, 02
1000 .. 2999 Values Read only Input Registers Read: 03, 04
Read: 03, 04
3000 .. 3999 Setpoints Read/Write Holding Registers
Write: 06, 16
Reserved Read/Write, depends on Input Registers Read: 03, 04
4200 .. 7167
registers each specific register Holding Registers Write: 06, 16
Configurable part of the map

The contents of the configurable part of the map is specified in the configuration table. It can be changed by the
customer as well as exported in a human-readable format using the configuration tool.
Discrete inputs
The discrete inputs are read-only objects located in the address range 0-999. The source ComAp objects for
discrete inputs can be:
Single bit of any value of any binary type.
Protection (e.g. 2nd-level protection of the state "xyz"). The input is high if the protection is active regardless
of if it is configured or not.
Input registers
The input registers are read-only numeric values located in the address range 1000-2999. The source ComAp
objects can be:
Any controller value of any data type. The mapping of the particular data type into registers is described in
Mapping data types to registers (page 206).
Holding registers
The holding registers are read-write numeric values located in the address range 3000-3999. The source ComAp
objects can be:
Any controller setpoint of a primitive data type. The mapping of the particular data type into registers is
described in Mapping data types to registers (page 206).
Default contents of the configurable part

The default map of MODBUS objects contain following items. This map expects the PC tool does have the
function allowing the user to modify the map.

Object type Starting object address Controller object
Physical binary inputs CU + configured* modules
Logical binary outputs
Discrete inputs 0000 Protections on binary inputs CU + configured* modules
Protections on analog inputs CU + configured* modules
All Built-in fixed protections
Input registers 1000 All configured* visible values
Holding registers 3000 None
*Present in the default configuration.

IMPORTANT: The default map of a particular firmware branch and application must not change
when a new version of the firmware is created. If new objects are added they must be added to free
positions so, that the previous content is not affected.
IMPORTANT: The default map of a particular firmware branch must not contain different values in
different applications at the same MODBUS address. It means if a ComAp object does not make
sense in some application type the respective MODBUS address must be left unassigned.
Mapping data types to registers

As there are multiple data types in the controller but only one data type in MODBUS (the register, which is 2
byte long), a mapping table is necessary to compose and decompose the MODBUS messages correctly.
Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB = sign extension
Integer8 1-byte signed integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = 0
Unsigned8 1-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = value, MSB
LSB = value, LSB
MSB = value, MSB
LSB = value, LSB
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB = 0
Binary8 8-bit binary value 1
LSB = value, bits 0-7

Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB = value, bits 8-15
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB1 = value, bits 24-31
LSB1 = value, bits 16-23
MSB2 = value, bits 8-15
LSB2 = value, bits 0-7
MSB = 0
Char 1-byte ASCII character 1
LSB = ASCII value of the character
MSB = 0
StrList Index into a list of strings 1
LSB = index into the list
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
ShortStr 8 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 15 ASCII characters.
…
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
Zero-terminated string of
LongStr 16 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 31 ASCII characters.
…
MSB1 = BCD (dd)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Date Date (dd-mm-yy) 2
MSB2 = BCD (yy)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = BCD (hh)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Time Time (hh-mm-ss) 2
MSB2 = BCD (ss)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = reserved for future use
LSB1 = reserved for future use
MSB2 = Alarm level *)
LSB2 = Alarm status **)
Alarm An item of the Alarmlist 27 MSB3 = alarm string ***)
LSB3 = alarm string
MSB4 = alarm string
LSB5 = alarm string
…

*) 1 .. level 1 (yellow), 2 .. level 2 (red), 3 .. sensor fail
**) Bit0 – alarm is active, Bit1 – alarm is confirmed
***) String encoding is UTF-8
Error codes (exception codes)

Exception code is returned by the controller (server) if the query sent from the client could not be completed
successfuly.
The controller responds with the error codes in as follows:
01 – Ilegal function is returned if an incompatible type of operation is applied for a specific object, e.g. if
function 03 is applied to a binary object.
02 – illegal address is returned if the client tries to perform an operation with a object address that is not
related to any existing object or that is located inside an object which is composed by multiple addresses
(registers).
04 – device error is returned in all other errorneous situations. More detailed specification of the problem can
be consequently obtained by reading the registers 4205 – 4206.
Reserved registers
There are several registers with specific meaning. These registers are available in all controllers regardless of
the configuration.
Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
4200 - 4201 2 read/write Time RTC Time in BCD code
4202 - 4203 2 read/write Date RTC Date in BCD code
Index of the language that is used for text
4204 1 read/write Unsigned8 data provided by MODBUS (e.g. alarmlist
messages).
Last application error. To be read after the
4205 - 4206 2 read Unsigned32 device returns the exception code 04. It
contains specific information about the error.
Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code
4010 1 - - Not implemented
4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password
4212 - 4213 2 read Unsigned32 Communication status
4214 1 read Unsigned8 Number of items in the Alarmlist
4215 - 4241 27 read Alarm 1. record in alarm list

Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
List of commands and arguments

"Commands" are used to invoke a specific action in the controller via the communication channel. The list of
available actions is in the table below. The general procedure of writing a command via MODBUS is as follows:
1. (Optional) Write required level of password into the register 44212 (register address 4211). Use function 6. If
the password is required or not depends on configuration of access rules. It can be adjusted/modified by
InteliConfig.
2. Write the command argument into the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208). Use function
16.
3. Write the command code into the register 44210 (register address 4209). Use function 6.
4. (Optional) Read the command return value from the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208).
Use function 3.
5. If the command was executed the return value is as listed in the table. If the command was accepted but
there was an error during execution the return value indicates the reason:
a. 0x00000001 – invalid argument
b. 0x00000002 – command refused (e.g. controller not in MAN, breaker can not be closed in the specific
situation etc.)
Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start *) 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop *) 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE
Fault reset *) 0x01 0x08F70000 0x000008F8
Horn reset *) 0x01 0x04FB0000 0x000004FC
GCB toggle *) 0x02 0x11EE0000 0x000011EF
GCB on 0x02 0x11EF0000 0x000011F0
GCB off 0x02 0x11F00000 0x000011F1
MCB toggle *) 0x02 0x12ED0000 0x000012EE
MCB on 0x02 0x12EE0000 0x000012EF
MCB off 0x02 0x12EF0000 0x000012F0

*) This action is an equivalent of pressing the front panel button
MODBUS examples
Modbus RTU examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Export table of values from InteliConfig
Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O
Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 1D 00 01 15 3C
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
041Dhex = 1053dec
Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 F0 B8 00
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
02hex = 2 bytes read 00F0hex = 240dec
We read value 240 from register 01053. From table of modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.

Reading Nominal power
Table: Values
01228 9018 Nominal Power kW Integer 2 0 0 32767 Generator

01 03 04 CC 00 01 45 05
Register address
04CChex = 1228dec

01 03 02 00 C8 B9 D2
Length of data Data
02hex = 2 bytes read 00C8hex = 200dec
Read nominal power is 200 kW.

Reading all binary inputs as modbus register
Table: Values
Binary
01068 8235 Binary#2 2 0 - - Controller I/O
Inputs

01 03 04 2C 00 01 44 F3
Register address
042Chex = 1068dec

01 03 02 00 12 38 49
Length of data Data
02hex = 2 bytes read 0012hex = 00010010bin
Binary inputs is 00010010. It means Binary input 2 and binary input 5 are active.
Note: You can use modbus function 4 insted of 3, rest of data remain same (CRC differs).

Reading binary inputs as coil status.
Table: Binaries
Addresses Source
C.O.# Name of Value Bit Name
Modbus Addr. = Value Bit # Group
State # Name of State Activated by protection(s):
Prot. Addr. = State
00000 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 1 GCB Feedback Controller I/O
00001 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 2 MCB Feedback Controller I/O
00002 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 3 Emergency Stop Controller I/O
We will read state of MCB Feedback binary input.

01 01 00 01 00 01 AC 0A
Register address
0001hex = 0001dec

01 01 01 01 90 48
Length of data Data
01hex = 1 byte read 01hex = active
The readed data is 01, it means this binary input is active.

Note: You can use modbus function 2 insted of 1, rest of data remains same (CRC differs).

Starting the engine
Before starting engine you may need to write password. Depends on your settings in controller.
Table Reserved registers (page 208)
Register addresses Number of registers Access Data type Meaning

Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code
Table List of commands and arguments (page 209)
Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE
Request 1/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 10 10 6F 00 03 06
Modbus function Register address
Controller address Number of registers Data length in bytes
10hex = 16dec 106Fhex = 4207dec
Request 2/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 FE 00 00 00 01 68 0B
Argument Command code CRC
Note: Command and argument may be written as one "packet" (function 16) or you can split it and write
argument (function 16) and after that write command code (function 6).

Password
This password is the same as in InteliConfig or directly in controller.
Table Reserved registers (page 208)
Register addresses Number of registers Access Data type Meaning

4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password
Note: Default password is "0".
In this example the password is "1234".

01 06 10 73 04 D2 7C D1
Register address Password
1073hex = 4211dec 04D2hex = 1234dec
Response for success: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 10 73 00 00 7C D1
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero. CRC
1073hex = 4211dec
Response for bad password: (Numbers in Hex)

01 86 04 43 A3
Controller Modbus exception 04 – device error
CRC
address for function 6. see Error codes (exception codes) on page 208

Nominal Power – writing
Table: Setpoints
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04, 06, 16
Nominal Basic
03008 8276 kW Unsigned 2 0 1 5000
Power Settings

01 06 0B C0 00 64 8A 39
Register address Data
0BC0hex = 3008dec 0064hex = 100dec

01 06 0B C0 00 00 8B D2
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec
Writen setpoint nominal power is 100 kW.

CRC calculation
The check field allows the receiver to check the validity of the message. The check field value is the Cyclical
Redundancy Check (CRC) based on the polynomial x16+x15+x2+1. CRC is counted from all message bytes
preceding the check field.
Online CRC calculator: http://www.lammertbies.nl/comm/info/crc-calculation.html Use CRC-16 (Modbus)
Write LSB first.
For writing nominal power 100 kW the CRC is calculated from this data: 01060BC00064hex

Modbus TCP examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Table: Values
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 04 1D 00 01
transaction protocol Length of
Controller Modbus Register address Number of
identifier identifier data bytes
address function 041Dhex = 1053dec registers
(usually 0) (usually 0) following

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 04 1D 00 01
transaction protocol Length of
Controller Modbus Register address Number of
identifier identifier data bytes
address function 041Dhex = 1053dec registers
(usually 0) (usually 0) following

00 00 00 00 00 05 01 03 02 00 F0
transaction protocol Length of Length of data
Controller Modbus Data
identifier identifier data bytes 02hex = 2 bytes
address function 00F0hex = 240dec
(usually 0) (usually 0) following read
We read value 240 from register 01053. From table of modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.
6 back to Connection to 3rd party systems

8 Technical data
Power supply
Power supply range 8-36 V DC
320 mA / 8 V DC
210 mA / 12 V DC
Power consumption
120 mA / 24 V DC
90 mA / 36 V DC
Max. 4 A
Power terminal fusing
E-Stop max.1.2 A
E-Stop power terminal fusing 1.2 A
Max. Power Dissipation 9W
D+
Max. excitation current 250 mA
Charging fail threshold 80 % of Usupply
Operating conditions
Operating temperature -20 ˚C to +70 ˚C
Storage temperature -30 ˚C to +80 ˚C
Protection degree (front panel) IP 65
Operating humidity 95 % w/o condensation

5-25 Hz, ± 1.6 mm
Vibration
25-100 Hz, a = 4 g
Shocks a = 500 m/s2
Surrounding air temperature rating 70°C

Suitable for pollution degree 2
Heat radiation 9W
Voltage measurement
Measurement inputs 3ph-n Gen voltage , 3ph-n Mains
Measurement range 277 V ph-n
Max. allowed voltage 350 V ph-n
Accuracy 1%
Frequency range 40-70 Hz (accuracy 0.1 Hz)
Input impedance 0.72 MΩ ph-ph , 0.36 MΩ ph-n
Display
Type Build-in monochromatic 3.2"
Resolution 800 × 480 px
E-Stop
Dedicated terminal for E-Stop input
Physically disconnects binary outputs 1 & 2 from power
Binary inputs
Number 8, non-isolated
0-2 V DC close contact
Close/Open indication
6-36 V DC open contact

Binary outputs
6 low current output, non-isolated
Supplied by power terminal BO 3-8 = 0.5 A
switching to positive supply terminal
2 high current output, non-isolated
Supplied by E-Stop power terminal BO 1, 2 = 4 A
switching to positive supply terminal
Analog inputs
Number 4, switchable (R/U/I)
Type Resistive
0-2 500 Ω
Range
0-15 000 Ω with limited accuracy
Resistive Sensor current 10mA @ 100 Ω
0 – 250 Ω: 2% from measured value and +/- 5 Ω
Accuracy
250 – 15 000 Ω: 4% from measured value
Range 0-10 V
Max. voltage 12,5 V
Voltage
Input impedance 40 kΩ
Accuracy 1% from measured value and +/- 0,1 V
Range 0-20 mA
Max. current 25 mA
Current
Input impedance 150 Ω
Accuracy 1% from measured value and +/- 0,2 mA
Voltage regulator output

Protection Isolated
Type max ± 10 V DC
Speed governor output

Output type ±10 VDC or 5 V @ 500 Hz PWM selectable by jumper
Protection Non-isolated
Magnetic pickup
4 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 4 Hz to 1 kHz
Voltage input range 6 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 1 kHz to 5 kHz
10 Vpk-pk to 50 Vpk-pk in range 4 Hz to 10 kHz
Frequency input range 4 Hz to 10 kHz
Frequency measurement tolerance 0.2 % from range 10 kHz
Communications
USB port Non-isolated
CAN 1 + CAN 2 250 / 50 kbps, isolated, nominal impedance 120 Ω

9 Appendix
9.1 Controller objects 220
9.2 Alarms 790
9.3 AVR interfaces 846
9.4 Speed governor interfaces 856
9.5 Modules 865

9.1 Controller objects
9.1.1 Setpoints 221
9.1.2 Values 555
9.1.3 Logical binary inputs 613
9.1.4 Logical binary outputs 681
9.1.5 Logical analog inputs 741
9.1.6 PLC 776

9.1.1 Setpoints
What setpoints are:
Setpoints are analog, binary or special data objects which are used for adjusting the controller to the specific
environment. Setpoints are organized into groups according to their meaning. Setpoints can be adjusted from
the controller front panel, PC, MODBUS, etc.
All setpoints can be protected by a password against unauthorized changes. Password protection can be
assigned to the setpoints during the configuration procedure.
IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoints repeatedly (e.g. power control from a PLC by repeated writing
of baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory, which can be
overwritten up to 105 times without risk of damage or data loss, but it may become damaged, when
the allowed number of writing cycles is exceeded.
List of setpoint groups

Group: Process Control 229
Group: Basic settings 242
Group: Communication Settings 252
Group: Ethernet 254
Group: Engine settings 270
Group: Generator settingsMains Settings 304
Group: Protections 313
Group: Mains settings 319
Group: Load Shedding 329
Group: Power Management 332
Group: Speed/Load ControlLoad Control 345
Group: Voltage/PF Control 354
Group: Synchronisation 358
Group: Droop Settings 361
Group: General Analog Inputs 366
Group: Scheduler 425
Group: Geo-Fencing 446
Group: Plug-In Modules 450
Group: CU AIN Calibration 451
Group: Alternate Config 453
Group: CM-RS232-485 466
Group: CM-GPRS 468
Group: CM-4G-GPS 479
Group: EM-BIO8-EFCP 489
Group: PLC 491
For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of setpoints (page 222).

List of setpoints
Process Control Gen Mains VT Ratio 246 AirGate Signalling Port 261
Application Mode Select 229 Mains/Bus VT Ratio 247 Event Message 261
Load Control PTM 230 Nominal Frequency 247 Wrn Message 262
PF Control PTM 231 Gear Teeth 248 BOC Message 262
#System Load Control Nominal RPM 248 Sd Messages 262

PTM 232 Controller mode 249 Time Zone 263
#System PF Control PTM 233 Power On Mode 249 E-mail/SMS Language 263
Baseload 233 Reset To Manual 250 Email Address 1 264
Base Power Factor 233 Backlight Timeout 250 Email Address 2 264
Import Load 234 Horn Timeout 251 Email Address 3 264
Import PF 234 Main Screen 251 Email Address 4 265
Import/Export Limitation 235 Phase Rotation 252 SMTP UserName 265
#System BaseLoad 235 SMTP User Password 265
#System Power Factor 236 Bus Settings SMTP Server Address 266
#Neutral Contactor SMTP Sender Address 266
Communication
Control 237 SNMP Agent 267
Settings
CB Control In MAN Mode 238 SNMP RD Community
Controller Address 252
Mains Import String 267
RS485 Mode 253
Measurement 239 SNMP WR Community
RS485 Communication
Peak Shaving 239 String 267
Speed 253
Peak Shaving Start Level 240 SNMP Traps IP Address 1268
RS485 MODBUS Speed 254
Peak Shaving Stop Level 240 SNMP Traps IP Address 2268
Peak Shaving Start/Stop SNMP Trap Format 268
Ethernet
Delay 241 MODBUS Server 269
NTP Clock
AMF Start 320 MODBUS Client Inactivity
Synchronization 254
Timeout 269
NTP Server 255
Basic settings Direct Connection 269
IP Address Mode 255
Gen-Set Controller Name 242 Direct Connection Port 270
IP Address 256
Nominal Power 242 ComAp Client Inactivity
Subnet Mask 256
Nominal Power Split Timeout 270
Gateway IP 257
Phase 243 Email Address 1 470
DNS Mode 257
Nominal Current 243 Email Address 2 470
DNS IP Address 1 258
CT Ratio 244 Email Address 3 470
DNS IP Address 2 258
Mains Import CT Ratio 244 Email Address 4 471
IP Firewall 259
Connection type 244 E-mail/SMS Language 471
AirGate Connection 259
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 246 Time Zone 473
AirGate Address 260
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 246 Event Message 474
AirGate Data Port 260
Wrn Message 474

BOC Message 474 Protection Battery Undervoltage 301
Sd Messages 475 Oil Pressure Wrn 287 Battery Overvoltage 301
Email Address 1 481 Oil Pressure Sd 288 Battery <> Voltage Delay 302
Email Address 2 481 Oil Pressure Delay 288 Battery Charger Fail Delay 302
Email Address 3 481 ECU Oil Pressure Wrn 288 Maintenance Timer 1 302
Email Address 4 482 ECU Oil Pressure Sd 289 Maintenance Timer 2 303
E-mail/SMS Language 482 ECU Oil Pressure Delay 289 Maintenance Timer 3 303
Time Zone 484 Coolant Temperature Wrn 289
Event Message 485 Coolant Temperature Sd 290 Generator settings
Wrn Message 485 Coolant Temperature Overload BOC 304
BOC Message 485 Delay 290 Overload Wrn 304
Sd Messages 486 ECU Coolant Temperature Overload Delay 304
Wrn 290 Minimal Power PTM 305
Engine settings ECU Coolant Temperature Short Circuit BOC 305
Sd 291
Fuel Solenoid 271 Short Circuit BOC MPR
ECU Coolant Temperature Delay 305
Cranking Attempts 271
Delay 291
Maximum Cranking Time 272 IDMT Overcurrent Delay 306
Oil Temp Wrn 291
Cranking Fail Pause 272 Current Unbalance BOC 307
Oil Temp Sd 292
Prestart Time 273 Current Unbalance BOC
Oil Temp Delay 292 Delay 307
Starting RPM 273
ECU Oil Temp Wrn 292 Generator Overvoltage Sd 307
Starting Oil Pressure 274
ECU Oil Temp Sd 293 Generator Overvoltage
D+ Function 274
ECU Oil Temp Delay 293 Wrn 308
Glow Plugs Time 275
Temperature Switch On 294 Generator Undervoltage
Fuel Solenoid Lead 276
Temperature Switch Off 295 BOC 308
Idle Time 276
Coolant Temperature Low Generator Undervoltage
Minimal Stabilization Time 278 Wrn 295 Wrn 309
Maximal Stabilization Coolant Temperature Low Generator <> Voltage
Time 279 Delay 296 Delay 309
Protection Hold Off 279 Fuel Level Wrn 296 Voltage Unbalance BOC 309
Sd Ventilation Time 280 Fuel Level Sd 296 Bus Voltage Unbalance
Cooling Speed 280 Fuel Level Delay 297 BOC Delay 310
Cooling Time 281 ECU Fuel Level Wrn 297 Generator Overfrequency
Stop Time 281 BOC 310
ECU Fuel Level Sd 297
After Cooling Time 282 Generator Overfrequency
ECU Fuel Level Delay 298
Wrn 310
Power Switch On 282 Fuel Tank Volume 298
Generator Underfrequency
Power Switch Off 283 Maximal Fuel Drop 298 BOC 311
Overspeed Sd 285 Maximal Fuel Drop Delay 299 Generator Underfrequency
Starting Overspeed Sd 286 Fuel Pump On 299 Wrn 311
Starting Overspeed Time 287 Fuel Pump Off 300 Generator <> Frequency
Starting Overspeed 287 Transfer Wrn Delay 301 Delay 311

Reverse Power Level 312 ROCOF Windows Length 327 #Overload Next Start
Reverse Power Delay 312 ROCOF df/dt 328 Delay 341
Excitation Loss Level 312 Vector Shift CB Selector 328 Run Hours Base 342
Excitation Loss Delay 313 #Run Hours Max

Load Shedding Difference 342
Reverse Power Protection 317
Load Shedding Active 329 #Power Band Change Up
Excitation Loss Protection 318
Delay 343
Load Shedding Level 330
#Power Band Change
Protections Load Shedding Delay 330
Down Delay 343
Overload Protection 313 Load Reconnection Level 330
Control Group 344
IDMT Overcurrent Load Reconnection Delay 331
Group Link L 344
Protection 314 Auto Load Reconnection 331
Group Link R 345
Current Unbalance
Protection 314 Power Management
Speed/Load Control
Generator <> Voltage Power Management 332
Protection 315 Speed Regulator
Power Management Delay 332 Character 345
Voltage Unbalance
#Power Management Speed Governor Bias 346
Protection 315
Mode 333
Generator Frequency Speed Governor Low Limit 346
Priority 333
Protection 316 Speed Governor High
#Priority Auto Swap 334 Limit 346
Underspeed Protection 318
#System Start Delay 334 Speed Governor PWM
Mains settings #System Stop Delay 335 Rate 347
#Starting Load Reserve 1 335 Tau Speed Governor
Emergency Start Delay 319
#Stopping Load Reserve 1 336 Actuator 347
Mains Return Delay 319
#Starting Rel Load Frequency Gain 347
MCB Close Delay 320
Reserve 1 336 Frequency Int 348
Mains Overvoltage 320
#Stopping Rel Load Angle Gain 348
Mains Undervoltage 321
Reserve 1 337 Load Gain 348
Mains < > Voltage Delay 321
#Starting Load Reserve 2 337 Load Int 349
Mains Voltage Unbalance 321
#Stopping Load Reserve 2 338 Load Sharing Gain 349
Mains Voltage Unbalance
#Starting Rel Load Load Sharing Int 349
Delay 322
Reserve 2 338
Mains Overfrequency 322 Close Transfer Max
#Stopping Rel Load Duration 350
Mains Underfrequency 322 Reserve 2 339
Open Transfer Min Break 350
Mains < > Frequency #Min Run Power 339
Delay 323 Transfer Mains To Gen
#Next Engine Start Delay 340 Bus 351
MCB Logic 323
#Next Engine Stop Delay 340 Transfer BusGen To
Return From Island 324
#Slow Stop Delay 340 Mains 352
MCB Opens On 325
#Overload Next Start Unload MGCB Open
Vector Shift Protection 326 Protection 341 LevelGenerator Unload
Vector Shift Limit 326 #Overload Next Start GCB Open Level 352
ROCOF Protection 327 Level 341 Mains Unload MCB Open 353

Window CAN Analog Switch 7 On 385
Load Ramp 353 #Emergency Droop On Analog Switch 7 Off 386
Delay 365 Analog Protection 8 Wrn 386
Voltage/PF Control #Emergency Droop Off Analog Protection 8 Sd 387
Voltage Regulator Delay 365
Analog Protection 8 Delay 387
Character 354 Analog Switch 8 On 388
Voltage Regulator Bias 354 General Analog Inputs
Analog Switch 8 Off 389
Voltage Regulator Low Analog Protection 1 Wrn 366
Analog Protection 9 Wrn 389
Limit 355 Analog Protection 1 Sd 366
Analog Protection 9 Sd 390
Voltage Regulator High Analog Protection 1 Delay 367
Limit 355 Analog Switch 1 On 367
Analog Switch 9 On 391
Tau Voltage Governor Analog Switch 1 Off 368
Actuator 355 Analog Switch 9 Off 392
Voltage Gain 356 Analog Protection 10 Wrn 392
Analog Protection 2 Sd 369
Voltage Int 356 Analog Protection 10 Sd 393
PF Gain 356 Analog Protection 10
Analog Switch 2 On 370 Delay 393
PF Int 357
Analog Switch 2 Off 371 Analog Switch 10 On 394
VAr Sharing Gain 357
Analog Protection 3 Wrn 371 Analog Switch 10 Off 395
VAr Sharing Int 357
Analog Protection 3 Sd 372 Analog Protection 11 Wrn 395
Analog Protection 3 Delay 372 Analog Protection 11 Sd 396
Synchronisation
Analog Switch 3 On 373 Analog Protection 11
Synchronization Type 358
Analog Switch 3 Off 374 Delay 396
Synchronization Timeout 358
Analog Protection 4 Wrn 374 Analog Switch 11 On 397
Voltage Window 359
Analog Protection 4 Sd 375 Analog Switch 11 Off 398
Phase Window 359
Analog Protection 4 Delay 375 Analog Protection 12 Wrn 398
Dwell Time 359
Analog Switch 4 On 376 Analog Protection 12 Sd 399
Slip Frequency 360
Analog Switch 4 Off 377 Analog Protection 12
Slip Frequency Window 360
Analog Protection 5 Wrn 377 Delay 399
GCB MGCB Latency 360
Analog Protection 5 Sd 378 Analog Switch 12 On 400
MCB Latency 361
Analog Protection 5 Delay 378 Analog Switch 12 Off 401
Analog Switch 5 On 379 Analog Protection 13 Wrn 401
Droop Settings
Analog Switch 5 Off 380 Analog Protection 13 Sd 402
Load/Var Sharing
Analog Protection 6 Wrn 380 Analog Protection 13
Regulation Type 361
Analog Protection 6 Sd 381 Delay 402
Dead Bus GCB Close
Analog Protection 6 Delay 381 Analog Switch 13 On 403
Master 362
Analog Switch 6 On 382 Analog Switch 13 Off 404
Frequency Droop Slope 362
Analog Switch 6 Off 383 Analog Protection 14 Wrn 404
Frequency Droop Offset 363
Analog Protection 7 Wrn 383 Analog Protection 14 Sd 405
Voltage Droop Slope 363
Analog Protection 7 Sd 384 Analog Protection 14
Voltage Droop Offset 364
Delay 405
#Number Of Controller On 364 Analog Protection 7 Delay 384

Analog Switch 14 Off 407 Time Stamp Period 426 Geo-Fencing
Analog Protection 15 Wrn 407 #Summer Time Mode 426 Home Latitude 446
Analog Protection 15 Sd 408 Timer 1 Setup 427 Home Longitude 446
Analog Protection 15 Timer 1 Function 428 Fence Radius 1 447
Delay 408 Timer 1 Repetition 429 Fence Radius 2 447
Analog Switch 15 On 409 Timer 1 First Occur. Date 429 Fence 1 Delay 447
Analog Switch 15 Off 410 Timer 1 First Occur. Time 429 Fence 2 Delay 448
Analog Protection 16 Wrn 410 Timer 1 Duration 430 Geo-Fencing 448
Analog Protection 16 Sd 411 Timer 1 Repeated 430 Fence 1 Protection 449
Analog Protection 16 Timer 1 Refresh Period 431 Fence 2 Protection 450
Delay 411
Timer 1 Weekends 432
Timer 1 Day 432 Plug-In Modules
Timer 1 Repeat Day 433 Slot A 450
Timer 1 Repeated Day In Slot B 451
Analog Protection 17 Sd 414 Week 433
Analog Protection 17 Timer 1 Repeat Day In Sensors Spec
Delay 414 Month 433
CU AIN1 Calibration 451
Analog Switch 17 On 415 Timer 1 Repeat Week In
Analog Switch 17 Off 416 Month 434
Analog Protection 18 Wrn 416 Timer 2 Setup 434
Analog Protection 18 Sd 417 Timer 2 Function 435
Alternate Config
Analog Protection 18 Timer 2 Repetition 436
Connection Type 1 453
Delay 417 Timer 2 First Occur. Date 436
Nominal Power 1 455
Analog Switch 18 On 418 Timer 2 First Occur. Time 436
Nominal Power Split
Analog Switch 18 Off 419 Timer 2 Duration 437
Phase 1 455
Analog Protection 19 Wrn 419 Timer 2 Repeated 437
Nominal Current 1 456
Analog Protection 19 Sd 420 Timer 2 Refresh Period 438
Nominal Frequency 1 456
Analog Protection 19 Timer 2 Weekends 439
Nominal RPM 1 456
Delay 420
Timer 2 Day 439
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 457
Timer 2 Repeat Day 440
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 457
Timer 2 Repeated Day In
Connection type 2 457
Analog Protection 20 Wrn 422 Week 440
Nominal Power 2 459
Analog Protection 20 Sd 423 Timer 2 Repeat Day In
Nominal Power Split
Analog Protection 20 Month 440
Phase 2 459
Delay 423 Timer 2 Repeat Week In
Nominal Current 2 460
Analog Switch 20 On 424 Month 441
Nominal Frequency 2 460
Analog Switch 20 Off 425 Rental Timer 1 441
Nominal RPM 2 460
Rental Timer 1 Wrn 443
Scheduler Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 461
Rental Timer 2 443
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 461
Time 425 Rental Timer 2 Wrn 445
Connection type 3 461
Date 426 Rental Timer BOC 445

Nominal Power 3 463 SMTP User Name 482 PLC Setpoint 20 510
Nominal Power Split SMTP User Password 483 PLC Setpoint 21 511
Phase 3 463 SMTP Server Address 483 PLC Setpoint 22 512
Nominal Current 3 464 SMTP Sender Address 484 PLC Setpoint 23 513
Nominal Frequency 3 464 Telephone Number 1 486 PLC Setpoint 24 514
Nominal RPM 3 464 Telephone Number 2 487 PLC Setpoint 25 515
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 465 Telephone Number 3 487 PLC Setpoint 26 516
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 465 Telephone Number 4 488 PLC Setpoint 27 517
AirGate Connection 488 PLC Setpoint 28 518
Communication
ComAp TCP Port 489 PLC Setpoint 29 519
Modules
PLC Setpoint 30 520
COM1 Mode 466 Extension Modules PLC Setpoint 31 521
COM1 Communication Earth Fault Current PLC Setpoint 32 522
Speed 466 Protection 489 PLC Setpoint 33 523
COM1 MODBUS Earth Fault Delay 490 PLC Setpoint 34 524
Communication Speed 467
Earth Fault CT Input PLC Setpoint 35 525
COM2 Mode 467 Range 490
PLC Setpoint 36 526
COM2 Communication Earth Fault CT Ratio 490
Speed 467 PLC Setpoint 37 527
Earth Fault Sd 491
COM2 MODBUS PLC Setpoint 38 528
Communication Speed 468 PLC Setpoint 39 529
PLC
Mode 468 PLC Setpoint 40 530
PLC Setpoint 1 491
APN Name 469 PLC Setpoint 41 531
PLC Setpoint 2 492
APN User Name 469 PLC Setpoint 42 532
PLC Setpoint 3 493
APN User Password 469 PLC Setpoint 43 533
PLC Setpoint 4 494
SMTP User Name 471 PLC Setpoint 44 534
PLC Setpoint 5 495
SMTP User Password 472 PLC Setpoint 45 535
PLC Setpoint 6 496
SMTP Server Address 472 PLC Setpoint 46 536
PLC Setpoint 7 497
SMTP Sender Address 473 PLC Setpoint 47 537
PLC Setpoint 8 498
Telephone Number 1 475 PLC Setpoint 48 538
PLC Setpoint 9 499
PLC Setpoint 10 500
PLC Setpoint 11 501
PLC Setpoint 12 502
DNS IP Address 477 PLC Setpoint 52 542
PLC Setpoint 13 503
AirGate Connection 478 PLC Setpoint 53 543
PLC Setpoint 14 504
ComAp TCP Port 478 PLC Setpoint 54 544
PLC Setpoint 15 505
Mode 479 PLC Setpoint 55 545
PLC Setpoint 16 506
Required Connection Type479 PLC Setpoint 56 546
PLC Setpoint 17 507
APN Name 480 PLC Setpoint 57 547
PLC Setpoint 18 508
APN User Name 480 PLC Setpoint 58 548
PLC Setpoint 19 509
APN User Password 480 PLC Setpoint 59 549

PLC Setpoint 60 550
PLC Setpoint 61 551
PLC Setpoint 62 552
PLC Setpoint 63 553
PLC Setpoint 64 554

Group: Process Control
Subgroup: Application Selector
Application Mode Select

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] SPtM / MINT [-]
Default value MINT Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 12157 Related applications MINT, SPtM
Config level Advanced
Setpoint visibility Always
Description
This setpoint defines the controller application.
The change of this setpoint is accepted in OFF mode only = It is not possible to change the setpoint while
the controller is not set to OFF mode.
Single parallel to mains application. The controller controls two breakers – a

SPtM
mains breaker and a generator breaker. Feedback from both breakers is required.
Multiple island-parallel application without mains and multiple parallel application
with mains. The controller controls one breaker only, the generator breaker.
MINT
Feedback from the generator breaker is required. For parallel to mains operation
also mains breaker feedback is required.
6 back to List of setpoints

Subgroup: Load Control
Load Control PTM

Range [units] Baseload / Import/Export [-]
Default value Baseload Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Config level Standard
Description
This setpoint adjust the type of load control.
Gen-set produces amount of the power given by setpoint Baseload (page 233). The
rest of power is supplied from the mains or exported to the mains (depends on
proportions of load and Baseload (page 233) setpoint). Even in baseload control
mode can be the Import/Export limited. This function can be activated by setpoint
Import/Export Limitation (page 235) = Enabled. Then the request for the power of
the genset operating in baseload can be limited to prevent the Import/Export go below
the limit given by setpoint Import Load (page 234).
Example: Baseload = 1000 kW, load = 700 kW, Import load = 100. Then the
Baseload
Baseload request will be limited to 600 kW to prevent the Import power go
below 100 kW
Example: Baseload = 1000 kW, load = 700 kW, Import load = -100. Then the
Baseload request will be limited to 800 kW to prevent the Import power go
below -100 kW (actually it is limitation of the export).
The load of the gen-set group is controlled to keep constant level of base load of the
whole system. The level is adjusted by the setpoint #System BaseLoad (page 235).
Gen-set produces the certain amount of power to keep constant import/export from
the mains regardless the demand of the load. The requested import/export is given by
Imp/Exp setpoint Import Load (page 234). If the value of the setpoint is >0 the power is
imported from the mains, if setpoint value is <0, then the power is exported to the
mains.
Note: In both modes, the lower level of the power is always limited by the setpoint Minimal Power PTM
(page 305). If the requested load (given by the active load control mode, e.g. Baseload, Import/Export) is
below this limit the requested load is limited to the level adjusted by this setpoint.

PF Control PTM
Range [units] Base PF/ PF Import/Export [-]
Default value Base PF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 10120 Related applications SPtM
Description
This setpoint adjust the type of power factor control.
The power factor on the gen-set is kept on the level given by the setpoint Base
Power Factor (page 233) regardless the load demand. The rest of demanded
reactive power is supplied from the mains. Values >1 means that capacitive
Base PF reactive power is supposed to be imported from mains, values <1 means that
inductive reactive power is imported from the mains.
Gen-sets are controlled to keep the constant level of the power factor. The level
is adjusted by setpoint #System Power Factor (page 236).
Gen-set produces the certain amount of reactive power to keep constant PF
imported from the mains regardless the demand of the load. The requested power
factor import is given by setpoint Import PF (page 234). Values >1 means that
PF Imp/Exp
the gen-set is pushing the capacitive power to the system (sytem Gen-set - Load-
Mains) , values <1 means that the gen-set is pushing the inductive power to the
system.

#System Load Control PTM
Range [units] Baseload / Loadsharing [-]
Default value Baseload Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8774 Related applications MINT
Description
Load control mode in parallel to mains operation of the whole group of gen-sets.
The total power of the group is controlled to constant level given by the setpoint
#System BaseLoad (page 235). Each loaded gen-set takes equal part (relative to
their nominal power) from this requested value. The load is regulated locally in each
Baseload
controller by Load control regulation loop, load-sharing is not active. The setpoint
#System BaseLoad (page 235) is also used for determining which gen-sets have to
run or not.
Gen-sets load is controlled by MainsCompact controller to share the total load (given
by the setpoint #System BaseLoad (page 235)) with other loaded gen-sets in such a
Loadsharing
way, that all loaded gen-sets will be loaded at the same level (relative to gen-set
nominal power). Load-sharing regulation loop is active.
Note: The Loadsharing mode shall be used in case a MainsCompact controller is present in the system.
In systems without MainsCompact the setpoint must be in the Baseload position.
Note: The power factor (PF) is regulated to constant level given by the setpoint #System PF Control
PTM (page 233) in parallel to mains operation and does not depend on active load control mode.

#System PF Control PTM
Range [units] Base PF / Var Sharing [-]
Default value Base PF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Power factor control mode in parallel to mains operation of the whole group of gen-sets.
Gensets PF is controlled by their PF control loops to provide constant power factor

Base PF adjusted by setpoint #System Power Factor (page 236). InteliMains doesn't play
active role in PF control in parallel to mains operation.
Var Sharing Gensets PF is controlled by InteliMains through the VAr sharing line.
Baseload
Range [units] 0 .. Nominal Power (page 242) [kW]
Default value 100 kW Alternative config NO
Step 1 kW
Description
Required gen-set load in parallel to mains operation.
Base Power Factor

Range [units] 0,60 .. 1,20 [-]
Default value 1,00 [-] Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 [-]
Description
Required gen-set power factor when the gen-set is running in parallel to the mains.

Import Load
Range [units] -32 000 .. 32 000 [kW]
Step 1 kW
Description
Defines maximal limit of load for import/export. Behavior of setpoint depends on setpoint Load Control
PTM (page 230).
Setpoint adjust the maximal value of import/export. Also Import/Export Limitation

Baseload
(page 235) setpoint has to be set to Enabled.
Import/Export Setpoint adjust requested value of constant import/export.
If the value of the setpoint is >0 the power is imported from the mains, if the setpoint value is <0, then the
power is exported to the mains.
Import PF
Range [units] 0,60 .. 1,20 [-]
Step 0,01 [-]
Description
Defines maximal limit of power factor for import/export. Behavior of setpoint depends on setpoint PF
Control PTM (page 231).
Setpoint adjust the maximal value of import. Also Import/Export Limitation (page
Baseload
235) setpoint has to be set to Enabled.
Import/Export Setpoint adjust requested value of constant import.

Import/Export Limitation
Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Enable or disable limitation for import/export. If function is enabled, then the request for the power of the gen
set is limited to prevent the Import/Export go below the limits. Limits are adjusted via setpoints Import Load
(page 234) and Import PF (page 234).
Example: Baseload = 1000 kW, load = 700 kW, Import load = 100 kW. Then the Baseload request
will be limited to 600 kW to prewent the Import power go below 100 kW.
Example: Baseload = 1000 kW, load = 700 kW, Import load = -100 kW. Then the Baseload request
will be limited to 800 kW to prewent the Import power go below -100 kW (actually it is limitation of the
export).
#System BaseLoad
Range [units] 0 .. 32 000 [kW]
Default value 1 000 kW Alternative config NO
Step 1 kW
Description
Required total load of the gen-set group in parallel to mains operation in baseload mode (setpoint #System
Load Control PTM (page 232) = Baseload).

#System Power Factor
Range [units] 0,60 .. 1,20 [-]
Step 0,01 [-]
Description
Required gen-set power factor when the group of gen-sets is running parallel to the mains. The PF is
regulated locally in each controller by PF control regulation loop, VARsharing is not active.

Subgroup: Neutral Contactor
#Neutral Contactor Control

Range [units] Each / Common [-]
Default value Each Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint changes behavior of binary output NCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 730) which is used for neutral
contactor control.
The EACH option should be used if each gen-set has it's own neutral contactor. Four-
pole GCB must be used in this case.
The output is always opened while the gen-set is not running
The output is always opened while the MCB is closed
While the gen-set is running and GCB is open, the output closes when generator
Each voltage in at least one phase exceeds 85% of the nominal voltage. It opens when
the generator voltage in all phases drops below 50% of the nominal voltage
While the gen-set is running, MCB is open and GCB is closed, then the position of
the output is given by an internal algorithm, which ensures, that always exactly
one gen-set connected to the bus has the neutral contactor closed. It is always
the gen-set with lowest CAN address
The COMMON option should be used if there is one common neutral contactor for the
whole site. The NCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 730) outputs from all controllers are combined
together and the combined signal is used to control the breaker. Three-pole GCB must be
used in this case.
The output is always opened while the gen-set is not running
Common The output is always opened while the MCB is closed
While the gen-set is running the output closes when generator voltage in at least
one phase exceeds 85% of the nominal voltage. It opens when the generator
voltage in all phases drops below 50% of the nominal voltage. That means if at
least one gen-set in the site is running and having proper voltage, the neutral
contactor is closed
Note: Logical binary input NCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 673) has to be configured for proper functionality.

Subgroup: Process Limitation
CB Control In MAN Mode

Range [units] Full Ctrl / Aut Trans / Islnd Disl [-]
Default value Full Ctrl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The behavior of transition of load in MAN mode is adjusted via this setpoint.
No limitation of CB control in MAN mode (operator can close any breaker manually or
Full Ctrl
evoke the synchronization and consequential operation in parallel to mains)
Operator can control both MCB or GCB breaker. However once transition is evoked the
controller performs the automatic transfer of the load (depends on adjustment of
setpoints Transfer BusGen To Mains (page 352) and Transfer Mains To Gen Bus
(page 351)).
Controller performs synchronisation accross MCB, if GCB is closed and MCB button is
pushed. Load transfer is done after synchronisation and GCB is opened automatically.
Controller performs synchronisation accross GCB , if MCB is closed and GCB button is
pushed. Load transfer is done after synchronisation and MCB is opened automatically.
Aut Trans It is also possible to open currently closed breaker and keep the load non-energized.
Then it is possible to close MCB or GCB MGCB to energize the load from a healthy
source.
Note: Parallel operation with mains continues, if system already operates in parallel
with mains and setting is changed to Aut Trans. It is necesssary to push MCB or
GCB button to open a breaker.
Note: Open transfer is performed, if the Open option is selected with Transfer
BusGen To Mains (page 352) or Transfer Mains To Gen Bus (page 351)
Behaves like the full manual control but the Island operation is disabled.
Islnd Disl Example: When MCB opened and GCB pressed, controller don’t go to island.
Example: In parallel operation when MCB button pressed, MCB is not opened.

Subgroup: Mains Import Measurement
Mains Import Measurement

Range [units] None/Mains CT/Analog Input [-]
Default value Mains CT Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Visible only in SPtM mode Always
Description
Defines source value of the Mains Import kW (page 574).
The Mains import is not measured and the duration of the load transfer in direction
None Mains to Generator is given exactly by the setpoint Speed/Load Control / Close
Transfer Max Duration (page 350).
The Mains Import kW (page 574) value is measured via Mains CTs.The load transfer
Mains CT in direction Mains to Generator is considered to be finished when the mains is
unloaded under certain level.
The Mains Import kW (page 574) value is measured via analog input, accordingly
Analog Input LAI: MAINS IMPORT MEASUREMENT (PAGE 773). The load transfer in direction Mains to
Generator is considered to be finished when the mains is unloaded under certain level.
Subgroup: Peak Shaving
Peak Shaving
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The behavior of peak shaving functions
The Peak Shaving function is active and the start command is activated when the
Enabled
conditions for Peaks Shaving activation were fulfilled.
The Peak Shaving function is BLOCKED and the start command can not be activated
Disabled
even the conditions for Peaks Shaving activation were fulfilled.

Peak Shaving Start Level
Range [units] Peak Shaving Stop Level (page 240) .. 32000 [kW]
Step 1 kW
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Peak Shaving (page 239) = enabled
Description
This setpoint starts genset, when the value of the load consumption Load kW exceeds the value given by
this setpoint for the time ofPeak Shaving Start/Stop Delay (page 241).
The gen-set is synchronized to the Mains (kept in the parallel to the Mains) and the genset power is
controlled according to the settings in the Group Process Control/Load Control.
The gen-set stays running until the conditions for Peak Shaving run are active. Conditions of deactivation are
given by the setpoint Peak Shaving Stop Level (page 240) and Peak Shaving Start/Stop Delay (page
241).
Peak Shaving Stop Level

Range [units] 0 .. Peak Shaving Start Level (page 240) [kW]
Step 1 kW
Description
This setpoint stops gen-set, of the load consumption Load kW decreases under the value given by this
setpoint for the time of Peak Shaving Start/Stop Delay (page 241).

Peak Shaving Start/Stop Delay
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 600 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Description
Defines of the delay of activation or deactivation of the Peak Shaving. Starts when:
The value of the load consumption Load kW exceeds the value given by the setpoint Peak Shaving
Start Level (page 240).
The value of the load consumption Load kW decreases under the value given by the setpoint Peak
Shaving Stop Level (page 240)

Group: Basic settings
Subgroup: Name
Gen-Set Controller Name

Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 15 characters [-]
Default value InteliGen Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
User defined name, used for the controller identification at remote phone or mobile connection. Gen-Set
Name is maximally 15 characters long and can be entered using InteliConfig or from controller’s
configuration menu.
Note: If the Gen-Set Name is "TurboRunHours", the running hours will be counted faster - 1 minute in
real will represent 1 hour.
Subgroup: Power settings
Nominal Power
Default value 200 kW Alternative config Yes
Step 1 kW
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set. Generator Overload BOC (page 304) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 244) is adjusted to Monophase or
Splitphase or 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire or when Autodetect detects connection type as
3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or 3Ph4Wire.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Power 1 (page 455),
Nominal Power 2 (page 459) and Nominal Power 3 (page 463).

Nominal Power Split Phase
Step 1 kW
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 244)
Description
Nominal power of the gen-set for detected split-phase or mono phase connection. Generator Overload BOC
(page 304) protection is based on this setpoint.
Note: This setpoint is used when setpoint Connection type (page 244) is adjusted to Autodetect and
Autodetect detects connection type as Monophase or Splitphase.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Power Split Phase
1 (page 455), Nominal Power Split Phase 2 (page 459) and Nominal Power Split Phase 3 (page
463).
Subgroup: Current settings
Nominal Current
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type (page 244).
Description
It is current limit for mains current protections and means maximal continuous mains current. Nominal
Current can be different from mains rated current value.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Current 1 (page
456), Nominal Current 2 (page 460) and Nominal Current 3 (page 464).

CT Ratio
Range [units] 1 .. 5 000 [A/5A]
Default value 2 000 A/5A Alternative config NO
Step 1 A/5A
Description
Gen-set Mains import current transformers ratio.
Note: Generator Mains currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is below 1% of
CT range.
Mains Import CT Ratio

Range [units] 1 .. 2 000 [A/5A]
Default value 500 A/5A Alternative config NO
Step 1 A/5A
Description
Mains current transformers ratio.
Note: Generator currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is below 1% of CT
range.
Subgroup: Voltage settings
Connection type
Range [units] Mono Phase / SplitPhase / 3Ph3Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph4Wire / Autodetect [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Description
Connection type:

Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N
1x CT (Current Transformer)
Split Phase Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY
Autodetect High Leg Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V
3PH3Wire or 3Ph4Wire
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V
Split Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V
Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V
Voltage Autodetect shutdown
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Connection Type 1 (page
453), Connection type 2 (page 457) and Connection type 3 (page 461).

Nominal Voltage Ph-N
Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Description
Nominal voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1
(page 457), Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page 461) and Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page 465).
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph

Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1
(page 457), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page 461) and Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page 465).
Gen Mains VT Ratio

Range [units] 0,1 .. 500,0 [V/V]
Default value 1,0 V/V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V/V
Description
Generator Mains voltage potential transformers ratio. If no PTs are used, adjust the setpoint to 1.

Mains/Bus VT Ratio
Range [units] 0,1 .. 500,0 [V/V]
Default value 1,0 V/V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V/V
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Application Mode Select (page 229)
Description
Mains/Bus voltage potential transformers ratio. If no PTs are used, adjust the setpoint to 1.
Subgroup: Frequency settings
Nominal Frequency
Range [units] 45 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Description
Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Frequency 1 (page
456), Nominal Frequency 2 (page 460) and Nominal Frequency 3 (page 464).

Gear Teeth
Range [units] FGen->RPM / 1 .. 500 [-]
Default value 120 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Description
Number of teeth on the engine flywheel where the pick-up is installed. Set to zero if no pick-up is used and
the Engine speed will be counted from the generator frequency.
Note: If no pickup is used, the D+ or W terminal should be used to prevent possible overcranking, which
can occur if at least 25% of nominal generator voltage is not present immediately after exceeding firing
speed.
Nominal RPM
Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Default value 1 500 RPM Alternative config YES
Step 1 RPM
Description
Nominal engine speed (RPM - revolutions per minute).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal RPM 1 (page 456),
Nominal RPM 2 (page 460) and Nominal RPM 3 (page 464).

Subgroup: Controller settings
Controller mode
Range [units] OFF / MAN / AUTO[-]
Default value OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint can be used for changing the Controller mode remotely, e.g. via MODBUS. Use the mode
selector on the main screen for changing the mode from the front panel. Use mode selector in the control
window for changing the mode from InteliConfig.
Power On Mode
Range [units] Previous / OFF [-]
Default value Previous Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts controller mode after power on of controller.
Previous When controller is power on, than is switched into last mode before power off.
OFF When controller is power on, than is switched into OFF mode.
Note: Remote modes - In case that some LBI remote mode is activated during power on of controller
than this LBI has higher priority than this setpoint - controller mode is forced into mode selected via LBI.
After deactivation of LBI, controller is switched into value selected via setpoint Power On Mode

Reset To Manual
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled [-]
Step [-]
Description
If this function is enabled, the controller will switch automatically to MAN mode when there is a red alarm in
the alarm list and fault reset button is pressed. This is a safety function that prevents the gen-set starting
again automatically in specific cases when fault reset button is pressed.
Example: Controller is in AUTO mode and there is red inactive unconfirmed alarm and fault reset
button is pressed, controller will start automatically.
Backlight Timeout
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 255 [min]
Step 1 min
Description
The display backlight is switched off when this timer exceed. When setpoint is adjusted to disabled then the
display will be backlighted all the time.

Horn Timeout
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 599 [s]
Step 1s
Description
Setting of horn behavior.
Disabled Disabling the Horn sounding function
Timeout for HORN (PAGE 722) binary output. The HORN (PAGE 722) output is opened when
1 .. 599 [s]
this timeout elapsed.
Note: Horn timeout starts again from the beginning if a new alarm appears before previous Horn timeout
has elapsed.
Main Screen
Range [units] PwrFactor/ATT/Run Hours [-]
Default value PwrFactor Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint adjust value which is shown on main screen.
PwrFactor: Value of power factor is shown on main screen.

This option is for Tier IV Final support. In this case value of DEF Level is shown on main
ATT:
screen.
Run Hours: Value of running hours will be shown on main screen.

Subgroup: Phase rotation
Phase Rotation
Range [units] Clockwise / CounterCCW [-]
Default value Clockwise Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility All the time
Description
This setpoint adjust the phase sequence of voltage terminals.
Group: Communication Settings

Subgroup: Controller CAN Address
Controller Address
Communication
Setpoint group Related FW 1.0.0
Settings
Range [units] 1 .. 32 [-]
Step 1
Description
Controller identification number. It is possible to set controller address different from the default value (1) so
that more controllers can be interconnected (via RS485) and accessed e.g. from MODBUS terminal.
Note: When opening connection to the controller it's address has to correspond with the setting in PC
tool.

Subgroup: RS485 Settings
RS485 Mode
Communication
Settings
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS [-]
Default value Direct Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Communication protocol switch for on-board RS485.
Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.
RS485 Communication Speed

Communication
Settings
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 57600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
If the direct mode is selected on on-board RS485, the direct communication speed of controller part of line
can be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

RS485 MODBUS Speed
Communication
Settings
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint COM1 Mode (page
Setpoint visibility
466)
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM1 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.
Group: Ethernet
Subgroup: NTP Settings
NTP Clock Synchronization

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 479)
Setpoint visibility
(CM-GPRS module)
Description
This setpoint is used to enable/disable controller time synchronization with exact time from an NTP server.
Note: This setpoint is common for Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

NTP Server
Setpoint group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] [-]
Default value pool.ntp.org Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed
Description
NTP server address.
Subgroup: TCP/IP Settings
IP Address Mode
Range [units] FIXED / AUTOMATIC [-]
Default value AUTOMATIC Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the ethernet connection is adjusted.
DISABLED: The Ethernet connection is fixed by means of the setpoints IP Addr, NetMask, GateIP,
DNS IP Address.
This method should be used for a classic Ethernet or internet connection. When this type
of connection opens, the controller is specified by its IP address. This means that it
would be inconvenient if the IP address were not fixed (static).
ENABLED: The Ethernet connection setting is obtained automatically from the DHCP server. The
obtained settings are then copied to the related setpoints. If the process of obtaining the
settings from the DHCP server is not successful, the value 000.000.000.000 is copied to
the setpoint IP address and the module continues to try to obtain the settings.

IP Address
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Default value 192.168.1.254 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint IP Address Mode
Setpoint visibility
(page 255)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the IP Address is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 255) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the ethernet
interface of the controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 255) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The IP address is assigned by the
DHCP server.
Subnet Mask
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 255)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Subnet Mask is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 255) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the Subnet Mask. Ask your IT
specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 255) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The Subnet Mask is assigned by
the DHCP server.

Gateway IP
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(page 255)
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Gateway IP is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 255) is DISABLE this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the gateway of
the network segment where the controller is connected.
If IP Address Mode (page 255) is ENABLED this setpoint is used to display the gateway IP address which
has been assigned by the DHCP server.
A gateway is a device which connects the respective segment with the other segments and/or Internet.
DNS Mode
Range [units] Automatic / Manual [-]
Default value Automatic Alternative config
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint enables to enter DNS server addresses manually, even with the IP Address Mode (page
255) set to Automatic.
Automatic DNS server addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server are used
DNS IP Address 1 (page 258) and DNS IP Address 2 (page 258) can be adjusted manually.
Manual Use this option to resolve e.g. internet access policy related issue, if local DNS server
addresses automatically obtained from a DHCP server do not work

DNS IP Address 1
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 1 is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 255) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS),
which is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 255) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.
DNS IP Address 2
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 2 is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 255) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS),
which is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 255) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.

IP Firewall
Default value DISABLED Alternative config
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoints enables to switch on the built-in Firewall functionality.
DISABLED The firewall function is switched off

The firewall function is switched on, use InteliConfig to setup the firewall rules
ENABLED
(configuration card Others - Firewall)
Subgroup: AirGate Settings
AirGate Connection
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint selects the Ethernet connection mode.
DISABLED: This is a standard mode in which the controller listens to the incoming traffic and answers
the TCP/IP queries addressed to it. This mode requires the controller to be accessible
from the remote device (PC), i.e. it must be accessible at a public and static IP address if
you want to connect to it from the internet.
ENABLED This mode enables the AirGate service. The AirGate server address is adjusted by the
setpoint AirGate Address (page 260). Also the standard TCP/IP is enabled.

AirGate Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value airgate.comap.cz Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(CM-GPRS module)
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free AirGate
server provided by ComAp at airgate.comap.cz.
AirGate Data Port

Range [units] 0 .. 65535 [-]
Default value 23 Alternative config
Step 1
Setpoint visibility
Description
This port is used for TCP data communication with the AirGate server.
Note: Use port 21, 23 or 6127 for standard ComAp AirGate service.

AirGate Signalling Port
Range [units] 0 .. 65535 [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This port is used for UDP signalling communication with the AirGate server.
Note: Use port 6127 for standard ComAp AirGate service.
Subgroup: Messages Settings
Event Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
This setpoint is common for Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

Wrn Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.
BOC Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
Sd Messages
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Messages.

Time Zone
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information about
sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.
E-mail/SMS Language
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
Note: Numbers correspond with languages in language list.

Subgroup: E-mail Settings
Email Address 1
Range [units] 0..63 characters [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent.
Email Address 2
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 3
Step [-]
Description

Email Address 4
Step [-]
Description
SMTP UserName
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.
SMTP User Password

Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server

SMTP Server Address
Default value airgate.comap.cz:9925 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) or number of port (with colon like a first mark) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet provider
or IT manager for this information.
SMTP Sender Address

Step [-]
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.
IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

Subgroup: SNMP Settings
SNMP Agent
Step [-]
Description
Enable or disable SNMP v1 Agent.
SNMP RD Community String

Default value public Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page
Setpoint visibility
267)
Description
SNMP Community String only for reading.
SNMP WR Community String

Default value private Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page
Setpoint visibility
267)
Description
SNMP Community String for writing and reading.

SNMP Traps IP Address 1
Step [-]
Description
IP address 1 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.
SNMP Traps IP Address 2

Step [-]
Description
IP address 2 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.
SNMP Trap Format

Range [units] v1 Trap / v2 Notific / v2 Inform [-]
Default value v2 Inform Alternative config
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This setpoint enables to select format of the SNMP trap messages.
v1 Trap SNMPv1 trap format is used

v2 Notific SNMPv2c Notification format is used
v2 Inform SNMPv2c Inform format is used

Subgroup: MODBUS Settings
MODBUS Server
Step [-]
Description
Enable or disable MODBUS communication via ethernet interface.
MODBUS Client Inactivity Timeout

Range [units] 0 .. 65535 [s]
Default value 60 s Alternative config
Step 1s
Setpoint visibility
Description
Modbus connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a Modbus client does not communicate for this
time.
Subgroup: ComAp Client Settings
Direct Connection
Default value Enabled Alternative config
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
Use this to enable/disable direct connection of a ComAp client (e.g. InteliConfig) to the IP address of the
controller.
Note: For Direct connection the controller IP address must be reachable from the client IP address.

Direct Connection Port
Range [units] 0 .. 65535 [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
Description
This port is used to listen for an incoming TCP connection if Direct Connection is ENABLED.
ComAp Client Inactivity Timeout

Range [units] 0 .. 65535 [s]
Default value 60 s Alternative config
Step 1s
Setpoint visibility
Description
Connection (TCP socket) is closed by controller, if a client (e.g. InteliConfig) does not communicate for this
time. This timeout applies to both direct and AirGate connection.
Group: Engine settings

Subgroup: Starting

Fuel Solenoid
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Diesel / Gas [-]
Default value Diesel Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Determines behavior of the Binary output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 715)
Diesel: Output closes before binary output STARTER (PAGE 737). Lead of output is adjusted via setpoint
Fuel Solenoid Lead (page 276). The output opens if Emergency Stop comes or gen-set is
stopped and in pause between repeated starts.
Gas: Output closes together with binary output IGNITION (PAGE 723) if RPM is over the 30 RPM (fixed
value). Output opens after stop command or in pause between repeated start.
Cranking Attempts
Step 1
Description
Maximal number of cranking attempts.

Maximum Cranking Time
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Description
Maximum time limit of cranking time.
IMPORTANT: There is a protection against broken pinion on starter. In case that there are no
RPM after 5 seconds of starting, cranking is interrupted and cranking fail pause follows.
Cranking Fail Pause

Step 1s
Description
Pause between Cranking Attempts (page 271). PRESTART (PAGE 732) output is active in this pause until
Cranking Fail Pause elapses.

Prestart Time
Step 1s
Description
Time of closing of the PRESTART (PAGE 732) output prior to the engine start. Set to zero if you want to leave
the output PRESTART (PAGE 732) open.
Image 9.1 Prestart Time
Starting RPM
Range [units] 5 .. 50 [%]
Default value 25% Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 248)
Description
This setpoint defines the “firing” speed level as percent value of the Nominal RPM (page 248). If this level
is exceeded the engine is considered as started.

Starting Oil Pressure
Range [units] 0,0 .. 10,0 [bar]
Default value 4,5 bar Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 bar
Description
Oil pressure limit for starting. The controller will stop cranking (STARTER (PAGE 737) goes OFF) if the oil
pressure rises above this limit.
IMPORTANT: Value from analog input has higher priority than value from ECU.
D+ Function
Range [units] Enabled / ChargeFail / Disabled [-]
Step [-]
Description
Behavior of D+ terminal.
Enabled The D+ terminal is used for both functions – “running engine” detection and charge fail
detection.
ChargeFail The D+ terminal is used for charge fail detection only
Disabled The D+ terminal is not used.
Image 9.2 D+ Function 1

Image 9.3 D+ Function 2
Glow Plugs Time

Range [units] 0 .. Prestart Time (page 273) [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint defines the time before starting when logical binary output GLOW PLUGS (PAGE 720) will be
close.

Subgroup: Starting Timers
Fuel Solenoid Lead

Range [units] 0,0 .. 25,0 [s]
Default value 0,5 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay between FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 715) and STARTER (PAGE 737) logical binary inputs.FUEL SOLENOID
(PAGE 715) is closed before STARTER (PAGE 737). Lead time is adjusted via this setpoint.
Image 9.4 Fuel Solenoid Lead
Note: LBO PRESTART (PAGE 732) goes to logical zero when Fuel Solenoid Lead goes to logical one.
Idle Time
Step 1s
Description
Idle Time delay starts when RPM exceeds Starting RPM (page 273). Start fail is detected when during Idle
state RPM decreases below 2 RPM.
The output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 723) remains inactive during the idle period. Binary output Idle/Nominal
opens during Cooling period again. This output can be used for switching the governor between idle and
nominal speed.

Image 9.5 Idle Time 1
Image 9.6 Idle Time 2

Minimal Stabilization Time
Range [units] 1 .. Maximal Stabilization Time (page 279) [s]
Step 1s
Description
When the gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the controller will wait for a period
adjusted by this setpoint before closing GCB, even if the generator voltage and frequency are already in
limits.
Image 9.7 Minimal Stabilization Time

Maximal Stabilization Time
Range [units] Minimal Stabilization Time (page 278) .. 300 [s]
Step 1s
Description
When the gen-set has been started and the idle timer has elapsed, the generator voltage and frequency must
get within limits within this period of time, otherwise an appropriate shutdown alarm (generator voltage and/or
frequency) is issued.
Image 9.8 Maximal Stabilization Time
Protection Hold Off

Range [units] 0,0 .. 300,0 [s]
Default value 5,0 s Alternative config YES
Step 0,1 s
Description
During the start of the gen-set, some engine protections have to be blocked (e.g. Oil pressure). The
protections are unblocked after the Protect Hold Off. The time starts after reaching Starting RPM.

Sd Ventilation Time
Step 1s
Description
In case Fuel Solenoid (page 271) is set to GAS, the Sd Ventilation Time adjusts the time of the starter to
be switched on for engine pre-ventilation in the case of a first start attempt after shutdown or controller
switch-on.
Subgroup: Stopping
Cooling Speed
Range [units] Idle / Nominal [-]
Default value Nominal Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Selects the function of the binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 723) during engine cooling state.
Idle Cooling is executed at Idle speed and generator protections are switched off.
Nominal Cooling is executed at Nominal speed and generator protections are active.
Note: When ECU is connected the predefined value 900 RPM for Idle speed is requested.
Note: Binary output IDLE/NOMINAL (PAGE 723) must be configured and connected to speed governor.
Engine Idle speed must be adjusted on speed governor.

Subgroup: Stopping Timers
Cooling Time
Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
Runtime of the unloaded gen-set to cool the engine before stop.
Stop Time
Step 1s
Description
Under normal conditions the engine must certainly stop within this period after the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
715) has been de-energized and the STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 738) energized. The Stop Solenoid output is
deactivated 12 s after last running engine indication went off.
Image 9.9 Stop Time 1

Image 9.10 Stop Time 2
After Cooling Time

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
Runtime of engine after cooling pump. Binary output Cooling pump is closed when the engine starts and
opens AfterCool time delayed after gen-set stops.
Subgroup: Power switch
Power Switch On
Step 1 kW
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output POWER SWITCH (PAGE 732) is configured.
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output POWER SWITCH (PAGE 732) on.

Image 9.11 Power Switch Level On < Level Off
Image 9.12 Power Switch Level On > Level Off
Power Switch Off

Step 1 kW
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output POWER SWITCH (PAGE 732) is configured.

Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output POWER SWITCH (PAGE 732) on.
Image 9.13 Power Switch Level On < Level Off
Image 9.14 Power Switch Level On > Level Off

Subgroup: Engine Protections
Overspeed Sd
Range [units] 50 .. 200 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal RPM (page 248)
Description
Threshold for over speed protection. Relative to the nominal speed.

Starting Overspeed Sd
Range [units] 100 ..200 [%]
Default value 115 % Alternative config NO
Step 1%
Description
The rise up threshold for overspeed protection. The time for which this level is accepted is defined as
Starting Overspeed Time (page 287). This period starts to be counted once the RPM exceeds the value
Starting RPM (page 273). The threshold Overspeed Sd (page 285) starts to be valid once this period
elapsed.
The type of reaction of the overspeed protection within the Starting Overspeed Time (page 287) is defined
by the setpoint Starting Overspeed Protection (page 287), so it is either considered as Sd Overspeed or
unsuccessful start attempt. Then the next start attempt is enabled once the engine was stopped. History
record Starting Overspeed should be written in this case.
Image 9.15 Staring speed overshoot › Ovespeed Sd
Image 9.16 Staring speed overshoot ‹ Ovespeed Sd

Starting Overspeed Time

Step 1s
Description
Time when Starting Overspeed Sd (page 286) level is used for overspeed protection. This time starts
countdown when starting RPM are reached.
Starting Overspeed Protection

Range [units] OverSpd Sd / NextStartAt [-]
Default value OverSpd Sd Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Time of protection of the overspeed in Starting Overspeed Time (page 287)
Oil Pressure Wrn

Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 774) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 774).

Oil Pressure Sd
analog sensor curve
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 774) is configured
Description
Shutdown threshold level for OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 774).
Oil Pressure Delay

Step 1s
Visible only if the logical analog input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 774) is configured or
Setpoint visibility
logical binary input OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 674) is configured
Description
Delay for OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 774).
ECU Oil Pressure Wrn

Range [units] the range is defined by ECU sensor curve
Default value Alternative config YES
ECU sensor curve
Step the step is defined by ECU sensor curve
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configured
Description
Warning threshold level for Oil pressure which is send from ECU.

ECU Oil Pressure Sd
ECU sensor curve
Description
Shutdown threshold level for Oil pressure which is send from ECU.
ECU Oil Pressure Delay

Step 1s
Description
Delay for Oil pressure which is send from ECU.
Coolant Temperature Wrn

analog sensor curve
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 771) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 771).

Coolant Temperature Sd
analog sensor curve
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 771).
Coolant Temperature Delay

Step 1s
Visible only if the logical analog input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 771) is configured or
Setpoint visibility
logical binary input COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 664) is configured
Description
Delay for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 771).
ECU Coolant Temperature Wrn

ECU sensor curve
Description
Warning threshold level for Coolant temperature which is send from ECU.

ECU Coolant Temperature Sd
ECU sensor curve
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for Coolant temperature which is send from ECU.
ECU Coolant Temperature Delay

Step 1s
Description
Delay for Coolant temperature which is send from ECU.
Oil Temp Wrn

analog sensor curve
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input OIL TEMP (PAGE 775) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for OIL TEMP (PAGE 775).

Oil Temp Sd
analog sensor curve
Description
Shutdown threshold level for OIL TEMP (PAGE 775).
Oil Temp Delay

Step 1s
Description
Delay for OIL TEMP (PAGE 775).
ECU Oil Temp Wrn

ECU sensor curve
Description
Warning threshold level for Oil temperature which is send from ECU.

ECU Oil Temp Sd
ECU sensor curve
Description
Shutdown threshold level for Oil temperature which is send from ECU.
ECU Oil Temp Delay

Step 1s
Description
Delay for Oil temperature which is send from ECU.

Temperature Switch On
Range [units] the range is define by sensor curve (analog or ECU)
Default value sensor curve (analog or Alternative config NO
ECU)
Step the step is defined by sensor curve (analog or ECU)
Visible only if the logical binary output TEMPERATURE SWITCH (PAGE 740) is
Setpoint visibility
configured.
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output TEMPERATURE SWITCH (PAGE 740) on.
Note: Value from analog input has higher priority than ECU.
Image 9.17 Temperature Switch

Temperature Switch Off
Range [units] the range is define by sensor curve (analog or ECU)
Default value sensor curve (analog or Alternative config NO
ECU)
Step the step is defined by sensor curve (analog or ECU)
Visible only if the logical binary output TEMPERATURE SWITCH (PAGE 740) is
Setpoint visibility
configured.
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output TEMPERATURE SWITCH (PAGE 740) off.
Coolant Temperature Low Wrn

Default value Alternative config YES
analog sensor curve
Description
Threshold level for lower limit of COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 771).

Coolant Temperature Low Delay
Default value 5s Alternative config YES
Step 1s
Description
Delay for Coolant Temperature Low Wrn (page 295).
Fuel Level Wrn

analog sensor curve
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 772) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 772).
Fuel Level Sd
analog sensor curve
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 772) is configured
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 772).

Fuel Level Delay
Step 1s
Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 772) is configured or logical
Setpoint visibility
binary input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 667) is configured
Description
Delay for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 772).
ECU Fuel Level Wrn

ECU sensor curve
Description
Warning threshold level for Fuel level which is send from ECU.
ECU Fuel Level Sd

ECU sensor curve
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for Fuel level which is send from ECU.

ECU Fuel Level Delay
Step 1s
Setpoint visibility Visible only if ECU is configuredd
Description
Delay for Fuel level which is send from ECU.
Fuel Tank Volume

Range [units] 0 .. 10 000 [l]
Default value 200 l Alternative config YES
Step 1l
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 772) is or ECU is configured
Description
Define a capacity of gen-set fuel tank.
Maximal Fuel Drop

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 50 [%/h]
Default value 25 %/h Alternative config NO
Step 1%/h
Description
Setpoint indicates the maximum allowable drop of fuel in fuel tank per running hour. When the engine is not
running the maximal allowed fuel drop-off is preset to 5% of total tank volume per hour.

Maximal Fuel Drop Delay
Step s
Description
When the value of fuel drop per hour is higher than Maximal Fuel Drop (page 298) this delay stars count
down. After count down of this delay alarm Wrn Fuel Theft (page 803) is activated.
Fuel Pump On
Range [units] 0 .. Fuel Pump Off (page 300) [%]
Step 1%
Visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) is configured and
Setpoint visibility
logical binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 667) isn’t configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) on.
Image 9.19 Fuel Pump On
IMPORTANT: When binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 667) is configured then binary
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) is control by this binary input. Setpoints Fuel Pump On and
Fuel Pump Off (page 300) are not evaluated!
Note: This setpoint is visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) is configured.

Fuel Pump Off
Range [units] Fuel Pump On (page 299) .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) is configured and
Setpoint visibility
logical binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 667) isn’t configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) off.
Image 9.20 Fuel Pump Off
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) is control by this binary input. Setpoints Fuel Pump On (page
299) and Fuel Pump Off are not evaluated!
Note: This setpoint is visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) is configured.

Transfer Wrn Delay
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 60 [s]
Default value 30 s Alternative config YES
Step 1s
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) is configured
Description
If the controller does not see the fuel increase during fuel transfer within this time alarm Wrn Fuel Transfer
Failed (page 818) will be displayed and the FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) will be turned off. Alarm Wrn Fuel
Transfer Failed (page 818) will be displayed but this alarm becomes immediately inactive and it will be
possible to delete this message by the Fault reset button. If the fault is deleted the controller will initiate the
transfer again.
Subgroup: Battery Protections
Battery Undervoltage
Range [units] 8,0 V .. Battery Overvoltage (page 301) [V]
Default value 18,0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V
Description
Warning threshold for low battery voltage.
Battery Overvoltage
Range [units] Battery Undervoltage (page 301) .. 40,0 [V]
Step 0,1 V
Description
Warning threshold for high battery voltage.

Battery <> Voltage Delay
Step 1s
Description
Delay for Battery Undervoltage (page 301) and Battery Overvoltage (page 301) protection.
Battery Charger Fail Delay

Range [units] 0 .. 15 [min]
Default value 5 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Setpoint visibility Conditioned with LBI BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 616)
Description
Delay for LBI BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 616).
Subgroup: Maintenance
Maintenance Timer 1
Range [units] -10 000 ... 9 999 [h] / Disabled
Default value 1 000 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Description
Maintenance timer 1 counts down when engine is running. If reaches zero, an alarm appears, but the timer
still counting down into negative values. When the value 10000 is set, than the Maintenance function is
disabled and counter does not count. Counter value disappear from controllers statistics.

Maintenance Timer 2
Step 1h
Description
Maintenance Timer 3
Step 1h
Description

Group: Generator settingsMains Settings
Subgroup: Overload Protection
Overload BOC
Setpoint group Generator settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Overload Wrn (page 304) .. 200 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Power (page 242)
Description
Threshold level for generator overload (in % of Nominal power) protection. Protection is BOC (Breaker Open
and gen-set Cooldown).
Note: When there is no control of breakers, the type of protection is Sd not BOC.
Overload Wrn
Range [units] 0 .. Overload BOC (page 304) [%]
Description
Threshold level for generator overload (in % of Nominal power) protection. This is only warning.
Overload Delay
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Overload BOC (page 304)Overload BOC (page 304) and Overload Wrn (page 304) protection.

Subgroup: Underload Protection
Minimal Power PTM

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Description
Minimal power of the gen-set. Value of this setpoint is used in Load Control PTM (page 230).
Subgroup: Current Protection
Short Circuit BOC

Range [units] 100 .. 500 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 243)
Description
BOC occurs when generator current reaches this preset threshold.
Short Circuit BOC MPR Delay

Range [units] 0,00 .. 10,00 [s]
Step 0,01 s
Description
Delay for Short Circuit BOC (page 305) protection.

IDMT Overcurrent Delay
Range [units] 1,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
IDMT curve shape selection. IDMT Overcurrent Delay is a reaction time of IDMT protection for 200%
overcurrent Igen =2*Nominal Current (page 243)
IDMT is “very inverse” over current protection. Reaction time is not constant but depends on over current
level according to the following formula:
Overcurrent IDMT ?? ? Delay * Nominal ?? ? ?? ? Current
Reaction ? ?? time =
I gen ?? ? Nominal ?? ? Current
Note: Reaction time is limited to 3600 s = 60 minutes. IDMT protection is not active for Reaction time
values longer than 60 minutes.
Igen is maximal value of all measured phases of generator Mains current.

Table 9.1 EXAMPLE of Reaction time for different over current levels
Overcurrent
Overcurrent IDMT Delay
≤ 100 % 101 % 110 %
Reaction time 0,2 s No action 20 s 2s
2s No action 200 s 20 s
20 s No action 2000 s 200 s
Image 9.21 IDMT Overcurrent Delay

Current Unbalance BOC
Range [units] 1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal Current (page 243)
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 243)
Description
Threshold for generator current asymmetry (unbalance).
Protection is BOC (Breaker Open and genset Cooldown).
Current Unbalance BOC Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Current Unbalance BOC (page 307) protection.
Subgroup: Voltage Protection
Generator Overvoltage Sd
Range [units] Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 308) .. 200 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 246) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 246)
Description
Threshold for generator overvoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.
Note: Phase to phase and phase to neutral voltages are used for this protection.

Generator Overvoltage Wrn
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 309) .. Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 307)
Range [units]
[%]
Description
Threshold for generator overvoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.
Generator Undervoltage BOC

Range [units] 0 .. Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 309) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is used.

Generator Undervoltage Wrn
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 308) .. Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page
Range [units]
308) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator undervoltage protection. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is used.
Generator <> Voltage Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 307), Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 308), Generator
Undervoltage BOC (page 308) and Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 309) protection.
Voltage Unbalance BOC

Generator settingsBus
Settings
Range [units] 1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 246)
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 246)
Description
Threshold for generator voltage unbalance alarm.

Bus Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay
Generator settingsBus
Settings
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 309) protection.
Subgroup: Frequency Protection
Generator Overfrequency BOC

Range [units] Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 310) .. 200,0 [%]
Default value 110,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 % of Nominal Frequency (page 247)
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.
Generator Overfrequency Wrn

Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 311) .. Generator Overfrequency BOC
Range [units]
(page 310) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency.

Generator Underfrequency BOC
Range [units] 0,0 .. Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 311) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.
Generator Underfrequency Wrn

Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 311) .. Generator Overfrequency Wrn
Range [units]
(page 310) [%]
Description
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency.
Generator <> Frequency Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 310), Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 310),
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 311) and Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 311)
protection.

Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection
Reverse Power Level

Range [units] 0 .. 50 [%]
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Reverse Power Protection (page 317).
Description
Level for generator Reverse Power Protection (page 317).
Reverse Power Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Reverse Power Protection (page 317).
Description
Delay for generator Reverse Power Protection (page 317).
Subgroup: Excitation Loss Protection
Excitation Loss Level

Range [units] 0 .. 150 [%]
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Excitation Loss Protection (page 318).
Description
Level for generator Excitation Loss Protection (page 318).

Excitation Loss Delay
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Excitation Loss Protection (page 318).
Description
Delay for generator Excitation Loss Protection (page 318).
Group: Protections
Subgroup: Overload Protection
Overload Protection
Setpoint group Protections Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Enabled/Disabled/ExtDisable [-]
Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Overload protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Overload BOC

Enabled:
(page 304), Overload Wrn (page 304) and Overload Delay (page 304).
Disabled: Protection is disabled.
Protection is enabled or disabled by the state of LBI FORCE PROTECTION DISABLE
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 666)

Subgroup: Current Protection
IDMT Overcurrent Protection

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable[-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator IDMT Overcurrent protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoint IDMT

Enabled:
Overcurrent Delay (page 306).
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 666)
Current Unbalance Protection

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable[-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Current Unbalance protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Current

Enabled:
Unbalance BOC (page 307) and Current Unbalance BOC Delay (page 307).
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 666)

Subgroup: Voltage Protection
Generator <> Voltage Protection

Range [units] Enabled / Disabled / ExtDisable [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Generator <> Voltage protection. GCB closing is blocked, if
the protection is disabled!
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Generator

Overvoltage Sd (page 307), Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 308), Generator
Enabled:
Undervoltage BOC (page 308), Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 309) and
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 309).
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 666)
GCB closing, generator voltage regulation and synchronization are disabled (blocked), if the parameter is set
to Disabled. It is blocked as well, if the parameter is set to ExtDisable and LB IFORCE PROTECTION DISABLE
(PAGE 666) is active.
Voltage Unbalance Protection

Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Voltage Unbalance protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Voltage

Enabled:
Unbalance BOC (page 309) and Bus Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 310).
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 666)

Subgroup: Frequency Protection
Generator Frequency Protection

Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Generator Frequency protection. GCB closing is blocked, if
the protection is disabled!.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Generator

Overfrequency BOC (page 310), Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 310),
Enabled:
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 311), Generator Underfrequency Wrn
(page 311), and Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 311).
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 666)
GCB closing, generator frequency regulation and synchronization are disabled (blocked), if the parameter is
set to Disabled. It is blocked as well, if the parameter is set to ExtDisable and LBI FORCE PROTECTION
DISABLE (PAGE 666) is active.

Subgroup: Reverse Power Protection
Reverse Power Protection

Step [-]
Description
The protection of the generator against the reverse (negative) active power. Protection gets active when the
level of active power [kW] gets under limit given by setpoint Reverse Power Level (page 312) for time
longer than the value of setpoint Reverse Power Delay (page 312).
This setpoint adjusts behavior of generator Reverse power protection.
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Reverse Power

Enabled:
Level (page 312), Reverse Power Delay (page 312)
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 666)

Subgroup: Excitation Loss Protection
Excitation Loss Protection

Step [-]
Description
The protection protect the generator against negative value of reactive power. Protection gets active when
the level of reactive power [kVAr] gets under limit given by setpoint Excitation Loss Level (page 312) for
time longer than the value of setpoint Excitation Loss Delay (page 313).
Protection is enabled. Behavior of protection is adjusted via setpoints Excitation Loss

Enabled:
Level (page 312), Excitation Loss Delay (page 313)
ExtDisable:
(PAGE 666)
Subgroup: Speed Protection
Underspeed Protection
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of generator Underspeed protection.
Enabled: Protection is enabled.

ExtDisable:
(PAGE 666)

Group: Mains settings
Subgroup: AMF Timers
Emergency Start Delay

Setpoint group Mains settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 6 000 [s]
Step 1s
Description
Delay after the mains failure to the start command of the gen-set.
Image 9.22 Emergency Start Delay
Mains Return Delay

Range [units] 1 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjust the delay, how long mains has to be returned after mains fail to start load transfer to
mains.

MCB Close Delay
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay after mains returns to MCB closing, if the gen-set is not running(e.g. is in start-up procedure)
AMF Start
Process ControlMains
settings
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enable or disable the AMF operation (page 77).
Subgroup: Mains Voltage Limits
Mains Overvoltage
Range [units] Mains Undervoltage (page 321) .. 150 [%]
Description
Threshold for mains overvoltage. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.

Mains Undervoltage
Range [units] 50 .. Mains Overvoltage (page 320) [%]
Default value 60 % Alternative config YES
Description
Threshold for mains undervoltage. All three phases are checked. Minimum voltage out of three phases is
used.
Mains < > Voltage Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Mains Undervoltage (page 321) and Mains Overvoltage (page 320) protection.
Mains Voltage Unbalance

Range [units] 1 .. 150 [%] of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 246)
Description
Threshold for mains voltage unbalance.

Mains Voltage Unbalance Delay
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Mains Voltage Unbalance (page 321) protection.
Subgroup: Mains Frequency Limits
Mains Overfrequency
Range [units] Mains Underfrequency (page 322) .. 150 [%]
Description
Threshold for mains overfrequency.
Mains Underfrequency
Range [units] 50 .. Mains Overfrequency (page 322) [%]
Description
Threshold for mains underfrequency.

Mains < > Frequency Delay
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Mains Underfrequency (page 322) and Mains Overfrequency (page 322) protection.
Subgroup: MCB Control
MCB Logic
Range [units] Close On / Close Off [-]
Default value Close Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The set point influences the behavior of the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 726).
Close On When the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 726) is closed – MCB should be closed.
Close Off When the output MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 726) is closed – MCB should be opened.
Image 9.23 MCB Logic 1

Image 9.24 MCB Logic 2
Subgroup: AMF Settings
Return From Island

Range [units] Manual / Auto [-]
Default value Auto Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint adjust the behavior of closing MCB when the mains returns.
When Return From Island = MANUAL and there is a Mains Fail, gen-set is started and
take the load. After mains return the load have to manually transfer to mains. Also in
Manual Alarmlist will be displayed Manual Restore (page 815) alarm.
Note: Select MANUAL in case you need to manually control the moment when the
load is transferred back to the mains.
Auto No automatic mode change is performed.

MCB Opens On
Range [units] Mains Fail / Gen Run [-]
Default value Gen Run Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint adjust the behavior of opening MCB in AUTO mode when there is mains fail.
Mains Fail The command to open the MCB is given immediately after mains fail condition is evaluated.
If the mains will return into parameters after MCB was opened and before GCB is closed, timer
MCB Close Delay (page 320) is applied before MCB closing.
Gen Run MCB will be opened when engine will be running and it will be possible to transfer load from
Mains to gen-set (after stabilisation phase).
Note: This option should be used for MCBs using 230V control and not equipped with the undervoltage
coil.

Subgroup: Mains Decoupling Protection
Vector Shift Protection

Range [units] Enabled / Parallel Only / Disabled [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint selects the function of the built-in vector shift protection.
Disabled The vector shift protection is disabled.

The vector shift protection is enabled only while the gen-set is running parallel to the
Parallel Only
mains, i.e. the both MCB and GCB MGCB are closed.
The vector shift protection is active always while the MCB is closed, regardless of the
Enabled
GCB MGCB position.
Note: The vectorshift protection is recorded into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm
list. When it occurs the controller opens either MCB or GCB MGCB depending on the setpoint Vector
Shift CB Selector (page 328). If the MCB is not controlled in the particular application then GCB
MGCB is opened.
Note: If a vector shift is detected and consequently the MCB is opened, however mains voltage and
frequency remain in limits, the MCB is then reclosed again after Mains Return Delay (page 319), as the
mains is evaluated as healthy.
Vector Shift Limit

Range [units] 1 .. 45 [°]
Default value 10 ° Alternative config NO
Step 1°
Description
This setpoint adjusts the threshold level for the vector shift protection.
Note: To adjust this setpoint properly, check the value Max Vector ShiftMaxVectorS (page 575). The
value is available in InteliConfig, contains the maximal measured vector shift value since the gen-set
has been synchronized to the mains and after opening of GCB or MCB it is "frozen". In normal conditions
the value should not be higher than 3 º and the most common setting of the threshold is about 7 º.

ROCOF Protection
Range [units] Enabled / Parallel Only / Disabled [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint selects the function of the built-in ROCOF protection.
Disabled The ROCOF protection is disabled.

The ROCOF protection is enabled only while the gen-set is running parallel to the
Parallel Only
mains, i.e. the both MCB and GCB MGCB are closed.
The ROCOF protection is active always while the MCB is closed, regardless of the
Enabled
GCB MGCB position.
Note: The ROCOF protection is recorded into the history file, however it is not indicated in the Alarm list.
When it occurs the controller opens either MCB or GCB MGCB depending on the setpoint Vector Shift
CB Selector (page 328). If the MCB is not controlled in the particular application then GCB MGCB is
opened.
Note: If a ROCOF is detected and consequently the MCB is opened, however mains voltage and
frequency remain in limits, the MCB is then reclosed again after Mains Return Delay (page 319), as the
mains is evaluated as healthy.
ROCOF Windows Length

Step 1 [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the averaging level for the ROCOF Protection (page 327). It defines number of
periods of the mains voltage in which the ROCOF protection is evaluated. The higher length of ROCOF
window means less sensitive protection for short oscillations of the frequency to both directions from the
nominal value. Also delay of evaluation is higher.

ROCOF df/dt
Range [units] 0,1 .. 10,0 [Hz/s]
Default value 1,0 Hz/s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 Hz/s
Description
This setpoint adjusts the trip level for ROCOF Protection (page 327) (Rate Of Change Of Frequency).
Vector Shift CB Selector

Range [units] MCB / GCB MGCB [-]
Default value MCB Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint selects which breaker will be opened when the Vector Shift Protection (page 326) or
ROCOF Protection (page 327) protection is detected.
Note: If the GCB MGCB is selected and a mains failure occurs the GCB MGCB will be opened
immediately when the vectorshift or ROCOF is detected, however also MCB will be opened
consequently due to other mains protection as underfrequency or undervoltage.

Group: Load Shedding
Load Shedding Active
Setpoint group Load Shedding Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Disabled / Island only / ISL+Trip paral / All the time [-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Visible always
Description
This setpoint is used for adjustment when the load shedding function is active.
Disabled The Load shedding function is disabled. All the outputs are open.
Island only In Island operation (e.g. MCB is open and (M)GCB is closed) Load shedding outputs
are controlled by load shedding function.
Load shedding outputs are activated/Deactivated one by one in island
operation
All Loadshedding outputs are tripped once the genset comes into the island
operation from "NO LOAD" operation (MCB and (M)GCB were opened ->
Genset started and (M)GCB closed).
ISL+Trip paral This setting adjusts the same behavior as ISLAND ONLY but in addition to it all load
shedding outputs are closed when gen-set group goes from parallel operation ino the
island operation.
Load shedding outputs are activated/Deactivated one by one in island
operation.
All Loadshedding outputs are tripped at once when the genset comes into the
island operation from "NO LOAD" operation (MCB and (M)GCB were opened -
> Genset started and (M)GCB closed).
All Loadshedding outputs are tripped at once when the genset comes from
Parallel operation (MCB, (M)GCB closed) to island operation (MCB opens,
(M)GCB stays closed). This scenario is also valid when Test On Load is
taken.
All the time Load shedding Outputs are controlled by the load shedding function regardless of
breaker positions.
Loadshedding is active in island operation, in parallel operation too.
All Loadshedding outputs are never tripped at once.

Load Shedding Level
Range [units] Load Reconnection Level .. 200 [%] of Nominal Power (page 242)
Step 1%
Setpoint visibility Visible only if Load Shedding Active (page 329) is disabled
Description
This setpoint is used to proceeds the next Load shedding stage.When gen-set load exceeds this level for
more than Load Shedding Delay (page 330) time
Load Shedding Delay

Range [units] 0,0..600,0 [s]
Step 1s
Description
more than Load Shedding Level (page 330) time
Load Reconnection Level

Range [units] 0 .. Load Shedding Level (page 330)
Step 1%
Description
more than Load Shedding Delay (page 330) time

Load Reconnection Delay
Range [units] 0..600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint is used to proceeds the lower Load shedding stage. When gen-set load drops under Load
Reconnection Level (page 330)l for more than this delay time. The binary output for higher stage is opened.
Automatic load reconnection works only when Auto Load Reconnection (page 331) = Enabled
Auto Load Reconnection

Step [-]
Description
Switch between manual and automatic reconnection of shedded load..
Rising edge on binary input MANUAL LD RECON resets controller to the lower stage, but only
Disabled if the load is under the Load Reconnection Level (page 330). Load Reconnection Delay
(page 331) is not taken into account in this case.
Load reconnection is automatic depend on setpoints Load Reconnection Level (page 330)
Enabled and Load Reconnection Delay (page 331). Binary input MANUAL LOAD RECONNECTION
(PAGE 671) has no function.

Group: Power Management
Subgroup: Power Management Control
Power Management
Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to enable or disable the Power management (page 79) function in the particular
controller. It performs automatic load dependent starts and stops or load demand swap. If the function is
disabled the gen-set’s nominal power is not part of the power management calculation and the start and stop
of the gen-set is performed only according to the position of the binary input REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE
677) i.e. if the input is active the gen-set is running and vice versa.
Power Management Delay

Step 1s
Description
Setpoint defines delay of the Power management (page 79). When REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677)
signal is activated and the gen-sets should start, all the engines (where Power Management (page 332) is
enabled) are started and stay running for time period specified by this parameter. After this period elapses,
only the gen-set(s) needed according to the Power Management calculation stay running and the rest is
stopped.
Example: This delay is useful, when you need to start gen-sets to an unknown load. Setting for
example 360s (6 minutes) and activating REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) will force all gen-sets to
start and run for 6 minutes despite of the power management setting.
Note: By setting “0” the Power Management function is enabled immediately.

#Power Management Mode
Range [units] ABS [kW] / REL [%]
Default value ABS Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to select the Power management (page 79) mode.
The power management is based on actual active power and gen-set nominal power.
ABS [kW]
The reserves are calculated and adjusted in kW.
The power management is based on the relative load, i.e. ratio active power to nominal
REL [%]
power. The reserves are calculated and adjusted in %.
Priority
Step 1
Description
This setpoint adjusts the priority of the gen-set within the group. A lower number represents a “higher”
priority, i.e. a gen-set with lower number will start before another one with higher number.
Note: If the binary input Top Priority (page 680) is active, the gen-set gets the highest priority (0)
independent of the setpoint setting.
Note: If more than one gen-set have the same priority they will act as “one big” gen-set.
IMPORTANT: Value of the setpoint Priority is taken into account only for absolute mode of
power management (#Power Management Mode (page 333) = ABS).

#Priority Auto Swap
Range [units] Disabled / Run Hours Equal / Efficient [-]
Step [-]
Comm object 10593 Related applications MINT,
Description
This setpoint adjusts priority auto swapping.
Optimalization is disabled. Priorities are given directly by the values adjusted in

Disabled
the setpoints Priority (page 333).
This method changes the priorities (not the setpoints itself) to equalize running
Run Hours Equal hours of the gen-sets or to keep constant difference of running hours by the
controller (adjusted via setpoint #Run Hours Max Difference (page 342)).
This method changes the priorities (not the setpoints itself) to optimize which gen-
sets are running according to their capacities and actual load demand.
IMPORTANT: This priority swapping function is only for absolute
mode of power management (#Power Management Mode (page 333)
Efficient = ABS).
Optimal power band (number of running gen-sets) is calculated based on the

nominal power of each gen-set, their Run Hours and requested Load reserve. For
gen-sets with the same nominal power also run hour equalization is being
performed.
IMPORTANT: Binary input Top Priority (page 680) can be used only if #Priority Auto Swap =
Disabled.
#System Start Delay

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [-]
Step 1
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay of the system activation after the binary input REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE
677) has been activated.

#System Stop Delay
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [-]
Step 1
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay of the system deactivation after the binary input REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE
677) has been deactivated.
Subgroup: Load Reserve Set 1
#Starting Load Reserve 1

Range [units] 0 .. #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 336) [kW]
Step 1 kW
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start of next gen-set in absolute mode. i.e. #Power
Management Mode (page 333) = ABS.
IMPORTANT: Logical binary input LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 670) has to be deactivated,
otherwise setpoints of Load Reserve Set 2 are used.
Note: See Power management (page 79) chapter for more information.

#Stopping Load Reserve 1
Range [units] #Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 335) .. 32 000 [kW]
Step 1 kW
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop of next gen-set in absolute mode. i.e. #Power
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 1

Range [units] 0 .. #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 337) [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start of next gen-set in relative mode. i.e. #Power
Management Mode (page 333) = REL.

#Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1
Range [units] #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 336) .. 110 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop of next gen-set in relative mode. i.e. #Power
Subgroup: Load Reserve Set 2
#Starting Load Reserve 2

Range [units] 0 .. #Stopping Load Reserve 2 (page 338) [kW]
Step 1 kW
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start of next gen-set in absolute mode. i.e. #Power
IMPORTANT: Logical binary input LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 670) has to be activated,

#Stopping Load Reserve 2
Range [units] #Starting Load Reserve 2 (page 337) .. 32 000 [kW]
Step 1 kW
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop of next gen-set in absolute mode. i.e. #Power
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 2

Range [units] 0 .. #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 339) [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start of next gen-set in relative mode. i.e. #Power

#Stopping Rel Load Reserve 2
Range [units] #Starting Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 338) .. 110 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop of next gen-set in relative mode. i.e. #Power
Subgroup: Minimal Running Power
#Min Run Power

Default value 210 kw Alternative config NO
Step 1 kW
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust certain minimum value of the sum of nominal power of all running gen-sets. If
the function is active (by logical binary input Min Run Power Active (page 673)), then the gen-sets would
not be stopped, although the reserve for stop is fulfilled, if the total remaining nominal power drops below this
minimal value.
Note: Logical binary input Min Run Power Active (page 673)) needs to be activated on all gen-sets in
the same time.

Subgroup: Start/Stop Timing
#Next Engine Start Delay

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay for starting the next gen-set after the reserve has dropped below the reserve
for start.
#Next Engine Stop Delay

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay for stopping the gen-set after the reserve has risen above the reserve for
stop.
#Slow Stop Delay

Step 1s
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust how long the particular gen-set will suppress it's own Slow stop alarm to give
chance to another gen-set to start and replace the defective one.
Note: If there isn't any available gen-set to start, the alarm is not suppressed.

Subgroup: Over Load Next Start Protection
#Overload Next Start Protection

Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is intended for activation of the protection against the overloading of the system due to rapid
change of the load. It makes the next gen-set (in priority order) to start when the load excises the value given
by the setpoint #Overload Next Start Level (page 341) right after the delay #Overload Next Start Delay
(page 341).
#Overload Next Start Level

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Threshold level for #Overload Next Start Protection (page 341).
#Overload Next Start Delay

Step 1s
Description
Delay for #Overload Next Start Protection (page 341).

Subgroup: Run Hours Equalization
Run Hours Base

Range [units] 0,0 .. 200000,0 [h]
Default value 0,0 h Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 h
Description
Running hours base corrects actual Running hours differences between particular gen-sets.
Example:
Gen-set 1 actual Running hours = 1000 h.
Gen-set 2 actual Running hours = 2000 h.
Adjust this setpoint for Gen-set 1 = 1000 h and for Gen-set 2 = 2000 h to be on the same base for
Running Hours Equalization.
#Run Hours Max Difference

Range [units] 0 .. 65 000 [h]
Default value 100 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Description
This setpoint adjusts the "dead-band" for the running hours equalization function (#Priority Auto Swap
(page 334) = Run Hours Equal). The priorities are swapped when engine hours difference is higher than this
dead-band.
Note: The system calculates with whole hours.
Example: The difference in engine running hours has to be 11.0 hours, if #Run Hours Max Difference
is set to 10. The priorities shuffling is not done with the difference just 10.1 hours.

Subgroup: Efficient Mode
#Power Band Change Up Delay

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step [s]
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting the delay of changing the power band if the load demand rose above the
upper limit of the current power band. Setpoint is taken into account only if #Priority Auto Swap (page 334)
= Efficient.
#Power Band Change Down Delay

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step [s]
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting the delay of changing the power band if the load demand drops below the
lower limit of the current power band. Setpoint is taken into account only if #Priority Auto Swap (page 334)
= Efficient.

Subgroup: Group Settings
Control Group
Range [units] 1,2 .. 32 [-]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint selects the control group (to get more information on this function please refer to the chapter
Control groups (page 98) to which the particular gen-set belongs. If there aren't logical groups at the site,
adjust the setpoint to 1.
Group Link L
Range [units] 1,2 .. 32 [-]
Step 1s
Description
If the input GROUP LINK (PAGE 669) of this particular controller is used to provide the "group link" information
for two Control groups (to get more information refer to the chapter Control groups (page 98)), then this
setpoint is used to select which group is located at the left side of the group link breaker (bus tie breaker). If
this particular controller is not used for the group link function, adjust this setpoint to 1.

Group Link R
Range [units] 1,2 .. 32 [-]
Step 1s
Description
If the input GROUP LINK (PAGE 669) of this particular controller is used to provide the "group link" information
for two Control groups (to get more information refer to the chapter Control groups (page 98)), then this
setpoint is used to select which group is located at the right side of the group link breaker (bus tie breaker). If
this particular controller is not used for the group link function, adjust this setpoint to 1.
Group: Speed/Load ControlLoad Control

Subgroup: Speed Control
Speed Regulator Character

Setpoint group Speed/Load Control Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Positive / Negative [-]
Default value Positive Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint selects the characteristic of the speed governor output of the controller. Adjust it according to
the behavior of the remote speed input of the governor.
Positive Raising the voltage on the governor remote speed input causes engine speed to rise.
Negative Raising the voltage on the governor remote speed input causes engine speed to go down.

Speed Governor Bias
Range [units] -10,00 .. 10,00 [V]
Step 0,01 V
Description
This setpoint adjusts the initial voltage level for the speed governor output, which is present on the output, if
no speed or power regulation loop is active.
Note: To make a fine adjustment, start the gen-set in MAN mode, leave it running unloaded and then
make fine adjustment of this setpoint to achieve nominal engine speed.
Speed Governor Low Limit

Range [units] -10,00 .. 10,00 [V]
Step 0,01 V
Description
Lower limit of the speed governor output. Use this setpoint to adjust the governor output range according to
your governor type.
Speed Governor High Limit

Range [units] -10,00 .. 10,00 [V]
Step 0,01 V
Description
Upper limit of the speed governor output. Use this setpoint to adjust the governor output range according to
your governor type.

Speed Governor PWM Rate
Range [units] 500 .. 2 900 [Hz]
Default value 500 Hz Alternative config NO
Step 1 Hz
Description
This setpoint adjusts the frequency of the speed governor PWM output.
Tau Speed Governor Actuator

Range [units] 1,0 .. 300,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the transformation ratio of the speed governor output to the pulses at the
binary outputs SPEED UP (PAGE 736) and SPEED DOWN (PAGE 736). Adjust the setpoint to the pulse duration
which is needed for the speed control device to travel from minimal position to the maximal position.
Subgroup: Regulation Loops
Frequency Gain
Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the frequency control PI loop.
Note: See the chapter Regulation loops (page 102) for more information.

Frequency Int
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative integration factor (I-factor) of the frequency control PI loop.
Angle Gain
Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting of the gain factor (P-factor) of the phase angle P-control loop.
Note: During synchronization, first the frequency loop is started to match the generator frequency with
the mains or bus and after that the phase angle loop is started to match the phase angle.
Load Gain
Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the load control PI loop.

Load Int
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative integration factor (I-factor) of the load control PI loop.
Load Sharing Gain

Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the load sharing control PI loop.
Load Sharing Int

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative integration factor (I-factor) of the load sharing control PI loop.

Subgroup: Load Transfer
Close Transfer Max Duration

Range [units] 0,1 .. Load Ramp (page 353) [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
The time of parallel work of gen-set and mains in close transition.
Open Transfer Min Break

Range [units] 0,1 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Minimal duration of break in open transition when Transfer BusGen To Mains (page 352) or Transfer
Mains To Gen Bus (page 351) is chosen as open transfer.

Transfer Mains To Gen Bus
Range [units] Open / Close Only / Close Primarily / Soft Transfer [-]
Default value Soft Transfer Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint defines the type of transfer of load from mains to generator bus.
Transfer of the load from mains to generator without parallel work and
synchronization (one breaker opens and second is closed - checking feedbacks).
Open
The setpoint Open Transfer Min Break (page 350) sets the minimal duration of
break.
Transfer of the load from mains to generator with synchronization and parallel
work. The time of parallel work is given by setpoint Close Transfer Max
Close Only
Transfer of the load from mains to generator with synchronization and parallel
Close Primarily
Transfer of the load from mains to generator with parallel work and soft loading of
the gen-set. This function is proceeded like the closed transfer, but there is time
limitation of loading of the gen-set adjusted via setpoint Load Ramp (page 353).
Soft Transfer
The transfer is succeed only when the gen-set is fully loaded - mains is fully
unloaded (level of load when mains is considered as unloaded is adjusted via
setpoint Mains Unload MCB Open Window (page 353)).
Note: Close transfer of load is also affected by setpoint Mains Import Measurement (page 239).

Transfer BusGen To Mains
Range [units] Open / Close Only / Close Primarily / Soft Transfer [-]
Default value Soft Interchange Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint defines the type of transfer of load from generator to mains.
Transfer of the load from generator to mains without parallel work and
synchronization (one breaker opens and second is closed - checking feedbacks).
Open
The setpoint Open Transfer Min Break (page 350) sets the minimal duration of
break.
Transfer of the load from generator to mains with synchronization and parallel
Close Only
Transfer of the load from generator to mains with synchronization and parallel
Close Primarily
Transfer of the load from generator to mains with parallel work and soft unloading
of the gen-set. This function is proceeded like the closed transfer, but there is time
limitation of unloading of the gen-set adjusted via setpoint Load Ramp (page
Soft Transfer
353). The transfer is succeed only when the gen-set is fully unloaded (level of load
when gen-set is considered as unloaded is adjusted via setpoint Unload MGCB
Open LevelGenerator Unload GCB Open Level (page 352)).
Unload MGCB Open LevelGenerator Unload GCB Open Level

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the value of the power when the GCB MGCB is opened during unloading of the gen-set.
Note: It is set usually higher than 0 to prevent the engine to go to reverse power.

Mains Unload MCB Open Window
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the value which defines the level where the mains is considered as unloaded.
Note: This setpoint is window. It means that when you adjust this setpoint to 10%, there is window from
-10% to +10%. The reason is import/export function.
Load Ramp
Step 1s
Description
The max duration of soft transition(time for gen-set loading / unloading).

Group: Voltage/PF Control
Subgroup: Voltage Control
Voltage Regulator Character

Setpoint group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Positive / Negative [-]
Default value Positive Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint selects the characteristic of the voltage governor output of the controller. Adjust it according to
the behavior of the remote voltage input of the governor.
Raising the voltage on the remote voltage adjustment input causes the generator voltage
Positive
to raise.
Negative Raising the voltage on the governor remote speed input causes engine speed to go down.
Voltage Regulator Bias

Range [units] -10,00 .. 10,00 [V]
Step 0,01 V
Description
This setpoint adjusts the initial level for the voltage governor output. This level is present on the output if no
regulation loop is active.

Voltage Regulator Low Limit
Range [units] -10,00 .. 10,00 [V]
Step 0,01 V
Description
Lower limit of the voltage governor output. Use this setpoint to adjust the governor output range according to
your governor type.
Voltage Regulator High Limit

Range [units] -10,00 .. 10,00 [V]
Step 0,01 V
Description
Upper limit of the voltage governor output. Use this setpoint to adjust the governor output range according to
your governor type.
Tau Voltage Governor Actuator

Range [units] 1,0 .. 300,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the transformation ratio of the voltage governor output to the pulses at the
binary outputs AVR UP (PAGE 706) and AVR DOWN (PAGE 706). Adjust the setpoint to the pulse duration
which is needed for the voltage control device to travel from minimal position to the maximal position.

Subgroup: Regulation Loops
Voltage Gain
Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the voltage control PI loop.
Voltage Int
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative integration factor (I-factor) of the voltage control PI loop.
PF Gain
Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the PF control PI loop.

PF Int
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative integration factor (I-factor) of the PF control PI loop.
VAr Sharing Gain

Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the VAr sharing control PI loop.
VAr Sharing Int

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative integration factor (I-factor) of the VAr sharing control PI loop.

Group: Synchronisation
Synchronization Type
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Phase Match / Slip Synchro [-]
Default value Phase Match Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the type of synchronization.
This type of synchronization is based on voltage and phase shift match. Limits are
adjusted via setpoints Voltage Window (page 359) and Phase Window (page
Phase Match
359). When voltage and phase shift are match, Dwell Time (page 359) starts
countdown. After that the command for breaker closing is activated.
This type of synchronization regulates the value of frequency to the value Mains/Bus
frequency + Slip Frequency (page 360) (Mains frequency in SPtM, Bus frequency
in MINT application). When this frequency is reached, Dwell Time (page 359)
Slip Synchro starts countdown. After that the command for breaker closing is activated. The
closing breaker command is issued in advance due to latency of breakers (adjusted
via setpoints GCB MGCB Latency (page 360) and MCB Latency (page 361)).
Note: Condition of Voltage Window (page 359) has to be also fulfilled.
Synchronization Timeout
Range [units] OFF / 1 .. 1800 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximum duration of synchronizing.
Note: If this setpoint is adjusted to OFF then automatic restart of synchronization occurs every 180s.
This method helps to synchronize successfully even in difficult conditions.

Voltage Window
Range [units] 0,0 .. 100,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint adjusts maximum difference between generator and mains/bus voltage in respective phases
for synchronization.
Phase Window
Range [units] 0 .. 90 [°]
Default value 10 ° Alternative config NO
Step 1°
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximum absolute value of difference between actual phase angle between the
generator and mains/bus voltages for synchronization.
Dwell Time
Range [units] 0,0 .. 25,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
The period of time that the phase angle difference must be within Phase Window (page 359) and voltage
difference within Voltage Window (page 359) before the breaker is closed.

Slip Frequency
Range [units] -0,50 .. 0,50 [Hz]
Default value -0,25 Hz Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 Hz
Description
Slip frequency for slip synchronization (Synchronization Type (page 358) = Slip Synchro).
Slip Frequency Window

Range [units] 0,01 .. 0,50 [Hz]
Default value 0,15 Hz Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 Hz
Description
Window of slip frequency for slip synchronization (Synchronization Type (page 358) = Slip Synchro).
GCB MGCB Latency

Range [units] 20 .. 1 000 [ms]
Default value 80 ms Alternative config NO
Step 1 ms
Description
Latency of GCB MGCB.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is enable, when Synchronization Type (page 358) has Split
Synchro value

MCB Latency
Range [units] 20 .. 1 000 [ms]
Default value 80 ms Alternative config NO
Step 1 ms
Description
Latency of MCB.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is enable, when Synchronization Type (page 358) has Split
Synchro value
Group: Droop Settings

Subgroup: Droop Settings
Load/Var Sharing Regulation Type

Setpoint group Droop Settings Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Isochronous / Droop / Emergency Droop [-]
Default value Isonchronous Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts how the active and reactive power is regulated. The droop is primarily intended for
multiple parallel operation in island to ensure the load sharing and VAr sharing when intercontroller
communication fails.
The active and reactive power is regulated based on data communicated

Isochronous
between the controller units (intercontroller communication).
The active and reactive power is not regulated based on data communicated
between the units but the speed request and voltage request is calculated from
Droop actual voltage and actual frequency of the system.
The speed request is correlative to active power and the voltage request is
correlative to reactive power.
Regulation of active and reactive power is based on standard isochronous
Emrg Droop regulation based on intercontroller communication but it can be conditionally
turned to droop

Dead Bus GCB Close Master
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the behavior of GCB for droop regulation in AUTO mode. If the bus values are without
the limits then the controller is prohibited to close it’s GCB because of safety reasons.
If the bus values are without the limits then the controller is prohibited to close it’s GCB
Disabled
because of safety reasons. Closing of GCB can be done manually in MAN mode.
If the bus values are without the limits, controller is allowed to close it´s GCB to the dead
Enabled
bus.
Subgroup: Frequency Droop
Frequency Droop Slope

Range [units] 0,0 .. 20,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint defines the slope of the load droop correlation. The slope is set as a droop of frequency in
percentages of the requested system frequency (Basic settings: Nominal Frequency (page 247)) on the
range of the requested power from 0 to 100% of Basic settings: Nominal Power (page 242).

Frequency Droop Offset
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint defines the value of requested power on the requested system frequency (Basic settings:
Nominal Frequency (page 247)). Allows to shift the droop correlation line up or down.
Subgroup: Voltage Droop
Voltage Droop Slope

Range [units] 0,0 .. 20,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint defines the slope of the VAr droop correlation. The slope is set as a droop of voltage in
percentages of the generator nominal voltage (Basic settings: Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 246)) on the
range of the requested reactive power from 0 to 100% of nominal reactive power (value of nominal reactive
power is not given by setpoint but it is calculated from setpoint Nominal Power (page 242) whilst the
PF=0,8).

Voltage Droop Offset
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint defines the value of requested reactive power on the nominal voltage (Basic settings: Nominal
Voltage Ph-N (page 246)). Allows to shift the droop correlation line up or down.
Subgroup: Emergency Droop Settings
#Number Of Controller On CAN

Step 1
Description
This setpoint defines the minimum number of units supposed to be connected to CAN2. See values CAN16
and CAN32 for information about number of controllers on CAN2 bus. Controller counts itself as well, the
number is always 1 or higher, it is never 0. If the number of controllers detected by the controller on CAN2 is
lower than the number in this setpoint, the system falls in emergency droop, it means that regulations are
switched to droop after delay defined by #Emergency Droop On Delay (page 365). If the intercontroller
communication recovers (the number of controllers detected on CAN2 gets equal or higher than value in this
setpoint, then the system turns the regulations back to isochronous mode after delay defined by setpoint
#Emergency Droop Off Delay (page 365).
Note: This function is available only when Load/Var Sharing Regulation Type (page 361) =
Emergency Droop.

#Emergency Droop On Delay
Range [units] 0,0 .. 10,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay for switching from isochronou regulation to droop regulation when number of
controller detected by the controller on CAN2 is lower than the number in the setpoint #Number Of
Controller On CAN (page 364).
Emergency Droop.
#Emergency Droop Off Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 10,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay for switching from droop regulation to isochronous regulation when number of
controller detected by the controller on CAN2 is equal or higher than the number in the setpoint #Number Of
Controller On CAN (page 364).
Emergency Droop.

Group: General Analog Inputs
General Analog Input 1
Analog Protection 1 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 1.0.0
analog sensor curve
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical analog input AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 744) is configured
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 744).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 744) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.
Analog Protection 1 Sd
analog sensor curve
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 744).

Analog Protection 1 Delay
Step 1s
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 744).
Analog Switch 1 On
analog sensor curve
Setpoint visibility Visible only if the logical binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 696) is configured
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 696) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 764) analog input.
Image 9.25 General analog input 1 switch

Analog Switch 1 Off
analog sensor curve
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 696) off. The value is measured from

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 2 On
analog sensor curve
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 764) on. The value is measured from

Analog Switch 2 Off
analog sensor curve
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 764) off. The value is measured from

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 3 On
analog sensor curve
Description

Analog Switch 3 Off
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 4 On
analog sensor curve
Description

Analog Switch 4 Off
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 5 On
analog sensor curve
Description

Analog Switch 5 Off
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 6 On
analog sensor curve
Description

Analog Switch 6 Off
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 7 On
analog sensor curve
Description

Analog Switch 7 Off
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 8 On
analog sensor curve
Description

Analog Switch 8 Off
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 9 On
analog sensor curve
Description

Analog Switch 9 Off
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 10 On
analog sensor curve
Description

Analog Switch 10 Off
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 11 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 12 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 13 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 14 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 15 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 16 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 17 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 18 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 19 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 20 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description
Group: Scheduler
Subgroup: Time & Date
Time
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] HH:MM:SS [-]
Default value 0:0:0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Real time clock adjustment.

Date
Range [units] DD/MM/YYYY [-]
Default value 1.1.2015 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Actual date adjustment.
Time Stamp Period

Range [units] 0 .. 240 [min]
Default value 60 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Description
Time interval for periodic history records.
Note: History record is made only when engine is running.
#Summer Time Mode

Range [units] Disabled / Winter / Summer / Winter - S / Summer - S [-]
Step [-]
Description
Behavior of switching between winter and summer time.
Disable Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is disabled.

Winter Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is enabled and it is set to winter
(Summer) (summer) season.
Winter - S
Modification for southern hemisphere.
(Summer - S)

Subgroup: Timer 1
Timer 1 Setup
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description

Timer 1 Function
Range [units] Disable / No Func / TEST / Test OnLd / MFail Blk / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
It is possible to choose from following timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 1 (PAGE 713) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require controller
running in AUTO mode.
IMPORTANT: Binary output is activated always when timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.
Timer 1 has the highest priority. Timer 8 has the lowest priority. So if Timer 1 is configured for OFF mode and
Timer 8 is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in OFF mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already running.
Disable The Timer is disabled.

No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Auto Run When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) binary input.
TEST When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
binary input Remote TEST.
TEST OnLd When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Remote TEST On Load binary input.
MFail Blk When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Mains Fail Block binary input.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Remote OFF binary input.

Timer 1 Repetition
Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 428)
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 1 Function (page 428).
Off Timer 1 Function (page 428) will not be activated.

Once Timer 1 Function (page 428) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 1 Function (page 428) will be repeatedly activated.
Timer 1 First Occur. Date

Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Date of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 428).
Timer 1 First Occur. Time

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 428).

Timer 1 Duration
Step [-]
Description
Timer 1 Function (page 428) duration time.
Timer 1 Repeated
Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 1 Function (page 428).
Daily Timer 1 Function (page 428) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 1 Function (page 428) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 1 Function (page 428) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen days of
chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 1 Function (page 428) is repeated in adjusted period.

Timer 1 Refresh Period
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
Refresh period of Timer 1 Function (page 428). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 1 Repeated (page 430).
Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer will be
activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
second day from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 428), the Timer 1
Function (page 428) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer will be
activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
Weekly
second week from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 428), the Timer 1
Function (page 428) will be activated in selected days adjusted by Timer 1 Day
(page 432).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer will be
activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
second month from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 428), the Timer 1
Monthly
Function (page 428) will be activated in selected day of month adjusted by Timer
1 Repeat Day In Month (page 433) or in selected days of week of month
adjusted by Timer 1 Day (page 432) and Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page
434).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer will
be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 428), the
Timer 1 Function (page 428) will be activated.

Timer 1 Weekends
Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Behavior of Timer 1 Function (page 428) on weekends.
Timer 1 Function (page 428) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 1
Including
Function (page 428) can be active.
Timer 1 Function (page 428) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 1 Function
Skip
(page 428) isn’t active.
Timer 1 Function (page 428) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 1
Function (page 428) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the weekend,
Postpone
than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is counted from
original date of first occurrence date.
Timer 1 Day
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down buttons.
To change the value of day use Enter button.

Timer 1 Repeat Day
Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 1 Function (page 428).
Repeated Day Chose one day in month when Timer 1 Function (page 428) will be activated.
Repeated Day In Week Chose days in one week when Timer 1 Function (page 428) will be activated.
Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week

Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.
6 List of setpoints (page 222)
Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 1 Function (page 428) will be activated.

Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month
Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 1 Function (page 428) will be activated.
Subgroup: Timer 2
Timer 2 Setup
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description

Timer 2 Function
Range [units] Disable / No Func / TEST / Test OnLd / MFail Blk / Mode OFF [-]
Default value No Func Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
It is possible to choose from following Timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 2 (PAGE 714) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require controller
running in AUTO mode.
IMPORTANT: Binary output is activated always when timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.
Timer 1 has the highest priority. Timer 8 has the lowest priority. So if Timer 1 is configured for OFF mode and
Timer 8 is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in OFF mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already running.
Disable The Timer is disabled.

No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
Auto Run When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) binary input.
TEST When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
binary input Remote TEST.
TEST OnLd When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Remote TEST On Load binary input.
MFail Blk When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Mains Fail Block binary input.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Remote OFF binary input.

Timer 2 Repetition
Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 2 Function (page 435).
Off Timer 2 Function (page 435) will not be activated.

Once Timer 2 Function (page 435) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 2 Function (page 435) will be repeatedly activated.
Timer 2 First Occur. Date

Step [-]
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 2 Function (page 435).
Timer 2 First Occur. Time

Step [-]
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 435).

Timer 2 Duration
Step [-]
Description
Timer 2 Function (page 435) duration time.
Timer 2 Repeated
Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 2 Function (page 435).
Daily Timer 2 Function (page 435) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 2 Function (page 435) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 2 Function (page 435) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen days of
chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 2 Function (page 435) is repeated in adjusted period.

Timer 2 Refresh Period
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
Refresh period of Timer 2 Function (page 435). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 2 Repeated (page 437).
Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer will be
activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
second day from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 435), the Timer 2
Function (page 435) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer will be
activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
Weekly
second week from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 435), the Timer 2
Function (page 435) will be activated in selected days adjusted by Timer 2 Day
(page 439).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer will be
activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
second month from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 435), the Timer 2
Monthly
Function (page 435) will be activated in selected day of month adjusted by Timer
2 Repeat Day In Month (page 440) or in selected days of week of month
adjusted by Timer 2 Day (page 439) and Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month (page
441).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer will
be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 435), the
Timer 2 Function (page 435) will be activated.

Timer 2 Weekends
Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Behavior of Timer 2 Function (page 435) on weekends.
Timer 2 Function (page 435) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 2
Including
Function (page 435) can be active.
Timer 2 Function (page 435) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 2 Function
Skip
(page 435) isn’t active.
Timer 2 Function (page 435) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 2
Function (page 435) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the weekend,
Postpone
than timer will be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is counted from
original date of first occurrence date.
Timer 2 Day
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down buttons.
To change the value of day use Enter button.

Timer 2 Repeat Day
Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 2 Function (page 435).
Repeated Day Chose one day in month when Timer 2 Function (page 435) will be activated.
Repeated Day In Week Chose days in one week when Timer 2 Function (page 435) will be activated.
Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week

Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.
Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 2 Function (page 435) will be activated.

Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month
Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 2 Function (page 435) will be activated.
Subgroup: Rental Timers
Rental Timer 1
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 8 760 [h]
Step 1h
Description
Another engine start is not allowed when this timer elapsed. This timer is based on engine running hours. The
alarm Rental Timer 1 Elapsed (page 798) will be recorded in alarm list and the binary output AL RENTAL
TIMER 1 (PAGE 694) will close.
IMPORTANT: To reset Rental Timer 1 (page 441) we have to set up Rental Timer 1 (page 441)
again. It means go to setpoint group Scheduler and to the setpoint Rental Timer 1 (page 441).
Then press enter button , change the value if it is necessary and press enter button
again.
When the Rental Timer 1 (page 441) elapsed during engine run the gen-set will not stop immediately. The
adjustable Rental Timer BOC (page 445)timer will start in this moment. The engine will be cooled and
stopped when the Rental Timer BOC (page 445) time elapsed.

Image 9.65 Rental Timer 1
The Running Hours Overrun counter will start increment when the engine is continue running after the Rental
Timer 1 (page 441) elapsed.
Note: There is no priority between Rental Timer 1 and Rental Timer 2. The sooner timer will activated the
Rental Timer BOC (page 445) protection.

Rental Timer 1 Wrn
Range [units] Disabled / 1.. Rental Timer 1 (page 441) [h]
Step 1h
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Rental Timer 1 (page 441)
Description
Alarm Wrn Rental Timer 1 (page 810) comes up after xx running hours from adjusting the Rental Timer 1
(page 441). Hours are adjusted by this setpoint.
Image 9.66 Rental Timer 1 Wrn
Rental Timer 2
Step 1 day
Description
Another engine start is not allowed when this timer elapsed. This timer is based on date. At the midnight of
the last day the alarm Rental Timer 2 Elapsed (page 799) will be recorded in alarm list and the binary
output AL RENTAL TIMER 2 (PAGE 694) will close.
IMPORTANT: To reset Rental Timer 2 (page 443) we have to set up Rental Timer 2 (page 443)
again. It means go to setpoint group Scheduler and to the setpoint Rental Timer 2 (page 443).
Then press enter button , change the value if it is necessary and press enter button
again.
IMPORTANT: To disable Rental Timer 2 (page 443) set date to 01/01/2015.

When the Rental Timer 2 (page 443) elapsed during engine run the gen-set will not stop immediately. The
adjustable Rental Timer BOC (page 445) timer will start in this moment. The engine will be cooled and
stopped when the Rental Timer BOC (page 445) time elapsed.
The Running Hours Overrun counter will start increment when the engine is continue running after the Rental
Timer 2 (page 443) elapsed.
Note: There is no priority between Rental Timer 1 and Rental Timer 2. The sooner timer will activated the
Rental Timer BOC (page 445) protection.

Rental Timer 2 Wrn
Range [units] Disabled / 01/01/2015 .. Rental Timer 2 (page 443) [DD/MM/YYYY]
Step 1 day
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Rental Timer 2 (page 443)
Description
Alarm Wrn Rental Timer 2 (page 810) comes up xx days before the Rental Timer 2 (page 443). Days are
adjusted by this setpoint.
Image 9.68 Rental Timer 2 Wrn
Rental Timer BOC

Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 210 [h]
Default value 24 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Conditioned by the setpoints Rental Timer 1 (page 441) and Rental Timer 2 (page
Setpoint visibility
443)
Description
This timer will start after Rental Timer 1 (page 441) or Rental Timer 2 (page 443) elapsed in case that the
engine is still running. When this timer elapsed the engine is cooled and stopped.

Group: Geo-Fencing
Home Latitude
Setpoint group Geo-Fencing Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] -90,0000..90,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Description
This setpoint adjust latitude of "home" position. Home is position where gen-set should runs. Positions on
north hemisphere have positive value, position on south hemisphere have negative value.
Note: This value with Home Longitude (page 446) are used for counting Fence Radius 1 (page 447)
and Fence Radius 2 (page 447).
Note: This value can be also obtained automatically via logical binary input GEO HOME POSITION (PAGE
668). In case of activation of this binary input for at least 2 seconds, setpoint will be adjusted
automatically from actual coordinates from GPS signal.
Home Longitude
Range [units] -180,0000..180,0000 [°]
Default value 0,0000 ° Alternative config NO
Step 0,0001 °
Description
This setpoint adjust longitude of "home" position. Home is position where gen-set should runs. Positions on
east hemisphere have positive value, position on west hemisphere have negative value.
Note: This value with Home Latitude (page 446) are used for counting Fence Radius 1 (page 447)
and Fence Radius 2 (page 447).
Note: This value can be also obtained automatically via logical binary input GEO HOME POSITION (PAGE
668). In case of activation of this binary input for at least 2 seconds, setpoint will be adjusted
automatically from actual coordinates from GPS signal.

Fence Radius 1
Range [units] 0,0..99,9 [km]
Default value 0,0 km Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 km
Description
Radius for circle area 1. When the gen-set leaves this area, Fence 1 Protection (page 449) is activated
after Fence 1 Delay (page 447).
Note: The center of this circle area is defined by "Home" position - setpoints Home Longitude (page
446) and Home Latitude (page 446).
Fence Radius 2
Range [units] 0,0..99,9 [km]
Default value 0,0 km Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 km
Description
Radius for circle area 2. When the gen-set leaves this area, Fence 2 Protection (page 450) is activated
after Fence 2 Delay (page 448).
Note: The center of this circle area is defined by "Home" position - setpoints Home Longitude (page
446) and Home Latitude (page 446).
Fence 1 Delay
Step 1s
Description
Delay for Fence 1 Protection (page 449).

Fence 2 Delay
Step 1s
Description
Delay for Fence 2 Protection (page 450).
Geo-Fencing
Range [units] Disabled / Enabled / LBI Enable [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables geo-fencing function.
Disabled Fence 1 Protection (page 449) and Fence 2 Protection (page 450) are disabled.
Enabled Fence 1 Protection (page 449) and Fence 2 Protection (page 450) are enabled.
Fence 1 Protection (page 449) and Fence 2 Protection (page 450) are enabled only
LBI Enable
when logical binary input .GEO-FENCING ENABLED (PAGE 669) is active.

Fence 1 Protection
Range [units] HistRecOnl / Wrn / Sd / BOC[-]
Default value HistRecOnl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Protection type for geo-fencing 1 protection. Fence of circle area is adjusted by setpoint Fence Radius 1
(page 447). Delay for protection is adjusted by setpoint Fence 1 Delay (page 447).
Protection types
HistRecOnl Position of gen-set is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used
for protection. History record is made if position is out of Fence Radius 1 (page 447).
Wrn Position of gen-set is used for warning protection only. Protection is activated when
position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 1 (page 447).
Sd Position of gen-set is used for shutdown protection. Protection is activated when
BOC Position of gen-set is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection. Protection
is activated when position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 1 (page 447).
Note: Protection is activated also when GPS signal is lost for Fence 1 Delay (page 447).

Fence 2 Protection
Range [units] HistRecOnl / Wrn / Sd / BOC[-]
Default value HistRecOnl Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Protection type for geo-fencing 2 protection. Fence of circle area is adjusted by setpoint Fence Radius 2
(page 447). Delay for protection is adjusted by setpoint Fence 2 Delay (page 448).
Protection types
HistRecOnl Position of gen-set is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used
for protection. History record is made if position is out of Fence Radius 2 (page 447).
Wrn Position of gen-set is used for warning protection only. Protection is activated when
Sd Position of gen-set is used for shutdown protection. Protection is activated when
BOC Position of gen-set is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection. Protection
is activated when position of the gen-set is out of Fence Radius 2 (page 447).
Note: Protection is activated also when GPS signal is lost for Fence 2 Delay (page 448).
Group: Plug-In Modules

Slot A
Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.0.0
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot A.

Slot B
Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 1.0.0
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot B.
Group: CU AIN Calibration

Subgroup: Analog Input 1
CU AIN1 Calibration
Setpoint group CU AIN Calibration Related FW 1.0.0
0 (number of decimal is
given by sensor curve)
Description
Calibrating constant to adjust the measured value of controller analog inputs. Physical dimension of
calibrating constant is corresponding to Analog input.
Note: Unit is adjusted via InteliConfig in configuration of analog input 1.


Description
CU AIN3 Calibration
Description

CU AIN4 Calibration
Description
Group: Alternate Config

Subgroup: Basic settingsConfiguration 1
Connection Type 1
Range [units] Monophase / Splitphase / 3Ph3Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph4Wire / Autodetect [-]
Step [-]
Description
Connection type:

Split Phase
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye

Split Phase Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V
Split Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V
Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 615) is active.

Nominal Power 1
Step 1 kW
Description
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

Step 1 kW
Description

Nominal Current 1
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Step 1A
Description
It is current limit for generator current protections and means maximal continuous generator current. Nominal
Current can be different from generator rated current value.
Nominal Frequency 1
Step 1 Hz
Description
Nominal RPM 1
Range [units] 100 .. 4000 [RPM]
Step 1 RPM
Description

Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1
Range [units] 80 .. 20000 [V]
Step 1V
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 453).
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to neutral).
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1

Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Step 1V
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 453).
Description
Connection type 2
Step [-]
Description
Connection type:


Split Phase
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Split Phase Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V
Split Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V
Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V

Nominal Power 2
Step 1 kW
Description

Step 1 kW
Description

Nominal Current 2
Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [A]
Step 1A
Description
Nominal Frequency 2
Step 1 Hz
Description
Nominal RPM 2
Range [units] 100 .. 4000 [RPM]
Step 1 RPM
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 20000 [V]
Step 1V
Setpoint visibility Conditioned by the setpoint Connection type 2 (page 457).
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
Connection type 3
Step [-]
Description
Connection type:


Split Phase
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Split Phase Delta
L1 >=100V; L1 <=140V
L2 >=140V
or
L3 >=100V; L3 <=140V
L1 >=100V
L2 >=100V
or
L3 >=100V
Split Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 >=100V
Mono Phase
L1 >=100V
L2 <= 20V
or
L3 <= 20V

Nominal Power 3
Step 1 kW
Description

Step 1 kW
Description

Nominal Current 3
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Step 1A
Description
Nominal Frequency 3
Step 1 Hz
Description
Nominal RPM 3
Range [units] 100 .. 4 000 [RPM]
Step 1 RPM
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description

Group: CM-RS232-485
COM1 Mode
Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / DualSlave / Dual Master [-]
Step [-]
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM1 channel.

COM1 Communication Speed

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
466)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM1 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line can
be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
466)
Description
here.
COM2 Mode
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS / DualSlave / Dual Master [-]
Step [-]
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM2 channel.

COM2 Communication Speed

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
467)
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM2 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line can
be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
467)
Description
here.
Group: CM-GPRS
Mode
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Range [units] Email+SMS / SMS Only [-]
Default value Email+SMS Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjust the communication mode of module.
Controller is connected to the Internet and is able to send e-mails as well as SMS. The
Email+SMS controller is also accessible via AirGate. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used. Also
APN Name (page 480) has to be adjusted.
SMS Only Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required.
IMPORTANT: When this setpoint is changed the controller has to be restarted to apply
changes.

APN Name
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant module is installed + conditioned by the setpoint Mode (page 479)
Description
APN (Access Point Name) of the GPRS/4G network, provided by GSM operator.
APN User Name

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
User name for the GPRS/4G Access Point if authentication is required. But mostly it is not required and
should be left blank.
APN User Password

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
User password for the GPRS/4G Access Point if authentication is required. But mostly it is not required and

Email Address 1
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 2
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 3
Step [-]
Description

Email Address 4
Step [-]
Description
E-mail/SMS Language
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
SMTP User Name

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description

SMTP User Password
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
SMTP Server Address

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels. If the device is connected to AirGate the AirGate SMTP server at "airgate.comap.cz" may be
used. Ports 25 and 9925 are supported. After controller connects to AirGate for the first time (or with new
public IP address), it may not be able to send emails for first 5-10 minutes.

SMTP Sender Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(CM-GPRS module)
Description
followed.
Time Zone
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Event Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Wrn Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
BOC Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Sd Messages
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

Telephone Number 2
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 3
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description

Telephone Number 4
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
DNS IP Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which is needed to translate domain names in
email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.

AirGate Connection
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enable or disable AirGate connection via CM-GPRS or via CM-4G-GPS.
DISABLED: Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required. AirGate is not used.
ENABLED This mode uses the “AirGate” service. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used. The
AirGate server address is adjusted by the setpoint AirGate Address (page 260).
changes.
ComAp TCP Port

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65 535[-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(CM-GPRS module)
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the port number, which is used for Ethernet connection to a PC with any of
ComAp PC program (i.e. InteliConfig). This setpoint should be adjusted to 23, which is the default port used
by all ComAp PC programs. A different value should be used only in special situations as e.g. sharing one
public IP address among many controllers or to overcome a firewall restrictions.
IMPORTANT: If AirGate is used, this setpoint has to be adjusted to 23.

Group: CM-4G-GPS
Mode
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Range [units] Email+SMS / SMS Only [-]
Default value Email+SMS Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjust the communication mode of module.
Controller is connected to the Internet and is able to send e-mails as well as SMS. The
Email+SMS controller is also accessible via AirGate. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used. Also
APN Name (page 480) has to be adjusted.
SMS Only Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required.
changes.
Required Connection Type

Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] 2G/3G/4G/Automatic [-]
Default value Automatic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts preferred connection type of CM-4G-GPS module.

APN Name
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
APN (Access Point Name) of the GPRS/4G network, provided by GSM operator.
APN User Name

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
User name for the GPRS/4G Access Point if authentication is required. But mostly it is not required and
APN User Password

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
User password for the GPRS/4G Access Point if authentication is required. But mostly it is not required and

Email Address 1
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 2
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 3
Step [-]
Description

Email Address 4
Step [-]
Description
E-mail/SMS Language
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
SMTP User Name

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description

SMTP User Password
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
SMTP Server Address

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels. If the device is connected to AirGate the AirGate SMTP server at "airgate.comap.cz" may be
used. Ports 25 and 9925 are supported. After controller connects to AirGate for the first time (or with new
public IP address), it may not be able to send emails for first 5-10 minutes.

SMTP Sender Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(CM-GPRS module)
Description
followed.
Time Zone
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Event Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Wrn Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
BOC Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Sd Messages
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description

Telephone Number 2
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 3
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description

Telephone Number 4
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
AirGate Connection
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enable or disable AirGate connection via CM-GPRS or via CM-4G-GPS.
DISABLED: Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required. AirGate is not used.
ENABLED This mode uses the “AirGate” service. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used. The
AirGate server address is adjusted by the setpoint AirGate Address (page 260).
changes.

ComAp TCP Port
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65 535[-]
Step [-]
Setpoint visibility
(CM-GPRS module)
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the port number, which is used for Ethernet connection to a PC with any of
ComAp PC program (i.e. InteliConfig). This setpoint should be adjusted to 23, which is the default port used
by all ComAp PC programs. A different value should be used only in special situations as e.g. sharing one
public IP address among many controllers or to overcome a firewall restrictions.
IMPORTANT: If AirGate is used, this setpoint has to be adjusted to 23.
Group: EM-BIO8-EFCP
Earth Fault Current Protection
Setpoint group EM-BIO8-EFCP Related FW 1.0.0
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint can block or allow Earth fault Current protection.
DISABLED Earth fault current protection is blocked.

ENABLED Earth fault current protection is allowed. Behavior of Earth fault current protection is set
by these setpoints: Earth Fault CT Input Range (page 490), Earth Fault CT Ratio
(page 490), Earth Fault Delay (page 490) and Earth Fault Sd (page 491).

Earth Fault Delay
Range [units] 0,03 .. 5,00 [s]
Step 0,01 s
Description
Delay for Earth Fault Current protection.
Earth Fault CT Input Range

Range [units] 1 [A] / 5 [A]
Default value 5A Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
There are 2 physical inputs for Earth Fault Current Protection (page 489). Value of this setpoint has to be
set on value of physical input which is presently in use.
Earth Fault CT Ratio

Range [units] 1 .. 2000 [1/(1or5)A]
Default value 500 1/(1or5)A Alternative config NO
Step 1A/1A; 1A/5A
Description
Earth Fault current transformer ratio.
Note: Type of units depends on setpoint Earth Fault CT Input Range (page 490) which have to be set
before this setpoint.

Earth Fault Sd
Range [units] 0,03 .. 5,00 [A]
Default value 0,30 A Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 [A]
Description
Limit value for Earth Fault Current protection.
Group: PLC
PLC Setpoint 1
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 1.0.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Setpoint visibility Only if relevant setpoint is used in PLC
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig
Image 9.69 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig
PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit

PLC Setpoint 2
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 3
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 4
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 5
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 6
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 7
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 8
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 9
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 10
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 11
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 12
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 13
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 14
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 15
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 16
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 17
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 18
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 19
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 20
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 21
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 22
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 23
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 24
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 25
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 26
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 27
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 28
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 29
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 30
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 31
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 32
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 33
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 34
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 35
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 36
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 37
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 38
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 39
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 40
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 41
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 42
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 43
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 44
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 45
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 46
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 47
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 48
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 49
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 50
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 51
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 52
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 53
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 54
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 55
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 56
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 57
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 58
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 59
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 60
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 61
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 62
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 63
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 64
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

9.1.2 Values
What values are:
Values (or quantities) are analog or binary data objects, measured or computed by the controller, that are
intended for reading from the controller screen, PC, MODBUS, etc. Values are organized into groups according
to their meaning.
Invalid flag
If valid data is not available for a particular value, the invalid flag is set to it. This situation may be due to the
following:
The value is not being evaluated in the scope of the current application and configuration.
Sensor fail has been detected on an analog input.
The configured ECU or extension module does not provide the particular value.
The communication with the ECU or extension module is interrupted.
A value containing the invalid flag is displayed as “####” in InteliConfig and on the controller screen. If such a
value is read out via MODBUS, it will contain the data 32768 in the case of signed values and 65535 in the case
of unsigned values.
List of values groups

Group: Engine 559
Group: Generator 563
Group: Load 572
Group: Mains/Bus 573
Group: Power Management 575
Group: Speed/Load ControlLoad Control 579
Group: Voltage/PF Control 580
Group: Controler I/O 580
Group: Statistics 582
Group: InfoInfo 587
Group: Log Bout 591
Group: Ethernet 594
Group: CM-GPRS 597
Group: CM-4G-GPS 602
Group: Date/Time 608
Group: Plug-In I/O 608
Group: PLC 609
For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of values (page 556).

List of values
Engine Generator kW L2 564 Mains/Bus Voltage L3-L1 574
DEF Level 559 Generator kW L3 564 Mains/Bus Voltage L3-N 574
DPF Ash Load 559 Generator kVA 564 Mains/Bus Current L1 574
DPF Soot Load 559 Generator kVA L1 564 Mains Import kW 574
ECU-BIN 1 559 Generator kVA L2 565 Mains Import kVAr 574
ECU-BIN 2 560 Generator kVA L3 565 Mains Power Factor 575
ECU-BIN 3 560 Generator kVAr 565 Mains Load Character 575
ECU-BIN 4 560 Generator kVAr L1 565 Max Vector

Generator kVAr L2 566 ShiftMaxVectorS 575
ECU-BIN 5 560
ECU-BIN 6 561 Generator kVAr L3 566
Power Management
ECU-BIN 7 561 Generator Load Character 566
Generator Load Character Engine Priority 575
ECU-BIN 8 561
L1 566 Actual Reserve 576
ECU-BIN 9 561
Generator Load Character Actual Relative Reserve 576
ECU-BIN-EXT-1 562
L2 567 Start Reserve 576
ECU Frequency Select 562
Generator Load Character Stop Reserve 576
ECU State 562
L3 567 Start Relative Reserve 577
RPM 563
Generator Power Factor 567 Stop Relative Reserve 577
Speed Required RPM 563
Generator Power Factor Actual Active Power In
L1 567 PM 577
Generator Generator Power Factor Actual Reactive Power In
Generator Frequency 568 L2 567 PM 577
Generator Voltage L1-L2 568 Generator Power Factor Running Nominal Power In
Generator Voltage L1-N 568 L3 568 PM 577
Generator Voltage L2-L3 568 Generator Current L1 569 Running Nominal Power
Generator Voltage L2-N 569 Generator Current L2 570 Of All 578
Generator Voltage L3-L1 569 Generator Current L3 570 Available Nominal Power 578
Generator Voltage L3-N 569 Load kW 572 Minimal Running Nominal
Slip Angle 570 Load kVAr 572 Power 578
Slip Frequency 570 Load Power Factor 572 Actual Power Band 578
Nominal Current 571 Load Character 572 Next Power Band 579
Nominal Power 571

Mains/Bus Speed/Load Control
Nominal Voltage 571
Mains/Bus Frequency 573 Active Power Required 576
Earth Fault Current 571
Mains/Bus Voltage L1-L2 573 Speed Regulator Output 579
Load Mains/Bus Voltage L1-N 573 Speed Request 579
Generator kW 563 Mains/Bus Voltage L2-L3 573 Requested RPM 579
Generator kW L1 563 Mains/Bus Voltage L2-N 573

Voltage/PF Control Total Fuel Consumption 586 Log Bout
Reactive Power Required 580 Log Bout 1 591
Info
Voltage Regulator Output 580 Log Bout 2 592
Application Mode 587
Voltage Request 580 Log Bout 3 592
Load Shedding
Log Bout 4 592
StatusStatLdShed 587
Controler I/O Log Bout 5 592
Engine State 587
E-STOP 580 Log Bout 6 592
Breaker State 587
Analog Input 1 581 Log Bout 7 593
Timer Text 588
Connection Type 588
SPI Module A 588
SPI Module B 588
Battery Volts 581 Log Bout 11 593
Timer Value 589
Binary Inputs 582
ID String 589
Binary Outputs 582 Ethernet
FW Version 589
D+ 582 AirGate Status 594
Application 589
CAN16 590 AirGate ID 594
FW Branch 589
CAN32 590 Primary DNS 594
Password Decode 590
Reg16 590 Secondary DNS 594
Reg32 591 ETH Interface Status 595
Log Bout
Gen Loaded 16 591 Ethernet PHY mode 595
Log Bout 1 591
Gen Loaded 32 591 Current Gateway 595
Log Bout 2 592
Current IP Address 595
Log Bout 3 592
Statistics Last Email Result 596
Log Bout 4 592
Genset kVArh 582 MAC Address 596
Log Bout 5 592
Genset kWh 583 Current Subnet Mask 597
Log Bout 6 592
Mains kVArh 583
Log Bout 7 593
Mains kWh 583 CM-GPRS ; CM-4G-
Log Bout 8 593
Maintenance 1 583 GPS (4G part)
Log Bout 9 593
Maintenance 2 584 AirGate Status 597
Log Bout 10 593
Maintenance 3 584 AirGate ID 597
Log Bout 11 593
Num E-Stops 584 Connection Type 598
Num Starts 584 Cell Diag Code 598
Date/Time
Rental 1 584 Cell ErrorRate 599
Time 608
Rental 2 585 Cell Signal Lev 600
Date 608
Running Hours 585 Cell Status 600
Shutdowns 585 Last Email Result 601
Plug-In I/O
Time Till Empty 585 Operator 602
EM BIO A 608
Time Till Empty 586 AirGate ID 603
EM BIO B 609
Time Till Empty 586 AirGate Status 604

Connection Type 604
Cell Diag Code 604
Cell ErrorRate 606
Cell Signal Lev 606
Cell Status 606
Last Email Result 607
Operator 608
CM-4G-GPS (GPS part)

Altitude 602
HomePosDist 602
Latitude 602
Longitude 603
Satellites 603
Date/Time
Time 608
Date 608
Plug-In I/O
EM BIO A 608
EM BIO B 609
PLC
PLC Resource 1 609
PLC Resource 2 609
PLC Resource 3 609
PLC Resource 4 609
PLC Resource 5 610
PLC Resource 6 610
PLC Resource 7 610
PLC Resource 8 610
PLC-BOUT 1 610
PLC-BOUT 2 611
PLC-BOUT 3 611
PLC-BOUT 4 611
PLC-BOUT 5 611
PLC-BOUT 6 611
PLC-BOUT 7 612

Group: Engine
DEF Level
Value group Engine Related FW 1.0.0
Units %
Description
The level of diesel exhaust fluid tank.
6 back to List of values
DPF Ash Load

Units %
Description
The rate of ash in DPF (Diesel particulate filter).
DPF Soot Load

Units %
Description
The rate of soot in DPF (Diesel particulate filter).
ECU-BIN 1
Units Depends on ECU value
Description
This is one of the inputs, which are defined by ECU. Order of values depends on type of ECU.
Note: Usually there are engine speed[RPM], fuel rate[L/h], coolant temperature[°C], intake temperature
[°C], oil pressure[bar], boost pressure[bar], load[%], oil temperature[°C] etc.

ECU-BIN 2
Description
ECU-BIN 3
Description
ECU-BIN 4
Description
ECU-BIN 5
Description

ECU-BIN 6
Description
ECU-BIN 7
Description
ECU-BIN 8
Description
ECU-BIN 9
Description

ECU-BIN-EXT-1
Description
ECU Frequency Select

Units -
Description
Shows selected frequency of ECU. The value is calculated from setpoint Nominal Frequency (page 247)
If is Nominal Frequency (page 247) in range from 45 Hz to 54 Hz, is considered as 50 Hz
application. The value is set to 0.
If is Nominal Frequency (page 247) in range from 55 Hz to 65 Hz, is considered as 60 Hz
application. The value is set to 1.
ECU State
Units -
Description
Shows binary status (0 or 1) of ECU:
ECU Yellow Lamp
ECU Red Lamp
Wait To Start

RPM
Units RPM
Description
This value contains the current engine speed. The value is obtained from one of the following sources:
ECU, if an ECU is configured
Pickup input
Generator frequency
Speed Required RPM

Units RPM
Description
Requested engine speed.
Group: Generator
Generator kW
Value group Generator Related FW 1.0.0
Units kW
Description
Generator active power.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.
Generator kW L1
Units kW
Description
Generator active power in phase L1.

Generator kW L2
Units kW
Description
Generator kW L3
Units kW
Description
Generator kVA
Units kVA
Description
Generator apparent power.
Generator kVA L1
Units kVA
Description
Generator apparent power L1.

Generator kVA L2
Units kVA
Description
Generator kVA L3
Units kVA
Description
Generator kVAr
Units kVAr
Description
Generator reactive power.
Generator kVAr L1
Units kVAr
Description
Generator reactive power in phase L1.

Generator kVAr L2
Units kVAr
Description
Generator kVAr L3
Units kVAr
Description
Generator Load Character

Units [-]
Description
Character of the generator load. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is resistive load (power
factor = 1).
Generator Load Character L1

Units [-]
Description
Character of the generator load in the L1 phase. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is
resistive load (power factor = 1).

Units [-]
Description

Units [-]
Description
Generator Power Factor

Generator Generator Related FW 1.0.0
Units [-]
Description
Generator power factor.
Generator Power Factor L1

Units [-]
Description
Generator power factor in phase L1.

Units [-]
Description

Units [-]
Description
Generator Frequency
Units Hz
Description
Frequency of generator.
Generator Voltage L1-L2

Units V
Description
Generator phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.
Generator Voltage L1-N

Units V
Description
Generator voltage on phase 1.

Units V
Description

Units V
Description

Units V
Description

Units V
Description
Generator Current L1
Units A
Description
Generator current phase L1.

Units A
Description
Units A
Description
Slip Angle
Units °
Description
Slip angle during synchronization.
Slip Frequency
Units Hz
Description
Slip frequency during synchronization.

Nominal Current
Units A
Description
Generator nominal current.
Nominal Power
Units V
Description
Generator nominal power.
Nominal Voltage
Units V
Description
Generator nominal voltage.
Earth Fault Current

Units A
Description
Measured value of fault for evaluation of earth fault protection.

Group: Load
Load kW
Value group Load Related FW 1.0.0
Units kW
Description
Load active power.
Load kVAr
Units kVAr
Description
Load reactive power.
Load Power Factor

Load Load Related FW 1.0.0
Units [-]
Description
Load power factor.
Load Character
Units A
Description
Character of the load. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is resistive load (power factor = 1).

Group: Mains/Bus
Mains/Bus Frequency
Value group Mains Related FW 1.0.0
Units Hz
Description
Frequency of mains/bus.
Mains/Bus Voltage L1-L2

Units V
Description
Mains/Bus phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.
Mains/Bus Voltage L1-N

Units V
Description
Mains/Bus voltage on phase 1.

Units V
Description

Units V
Description

Units V
Description

Units V
Description
Mains/Bus Current L1
Units A
Description
Mains current in phase L1.
Mains Import kW
Units kW
Description
Imported kW from mains.
Mains Import kVAr

Units kVAr
Description
Imported kVAr from mains.

Mains Power Factor
Units Hz
Description
Mains power factor.
Mains Load Character

Units Hz
Description
Character of mains load. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is resistive load (power factor =
1).
Max Vector ShiftMaxVectorS

Value group MainsMains protect Related FW 1.0.0
Units Hz
Description
This is maximal measured value of vector shift of the generator voltage. It is set to zero always when
Controller goes to parallel to mains operation (When Vector Shift Protection = PARALLEL ONLY) or when
MCB gets closed (when Vector shift protection = ENABLED).
Group: Power Management

Engine Priority
Value group Power Management Related FW 1.0.0
Units -
Description
This value shows current priority number. It corresponds to the setpoint Priority (page 333) except following
situations:
If at least one of binary inputs TOP PRIORITY (PAGE 680) is configured on some source and is active
#Priority Auto Swap (page 334) is active

Actual Reserve
Units kW
Description
Actual absolute reserve in power management.
Actual Relative Reserve

Units %
Description
Actual relative reserve in power management.
Active Power Required

Value group Speed/Load Control Related FW 1.0.0
Units kW
Description
This value contains actual required load level, which is used as the input into the load regulation loop in the
parallel to mains operation.
Start Reserve
Units kW
Description
Actual absolute reserve for start.
Stop Reserve
Units kW
Description
Actual absolute reserve - when the reserve is higher than this value the last started gen-set (the gen-set with
the highest priority) is stopped.

Start Relative Reserve
Units %
Description
Actual relative reserve for start.
Stop Relative Reserve

Units %
Description
Actual relative reserve - when the relative reserve is higher than this value the last started gen-set (the gen-
set with the highest priority) is stopped.
Actual Active Power In PM

Units kW
Description
Actual value of active power from all gen-sets running in power management.
Actual Reactive Power In PM

Units kVAr
Description
Actual value of reactive power from all gen-sets running in power management.
Running Nominal Power In PM

Units kW
Description
Actual nominal power of all gen-sets in power management, which are running.

Running Nominal Power Of All
Units kW
Description
Actual nominal power of all gen-sets, which are running.
Available Nominal Power

Units kW
Description
Available nominal power of all gen-sets in power management.
Minimal Running Nominal Power

Units kW
Description
Actual minimal nominal power of all gen-sets, which are running.
Actual Power Band

Units -
Description
State of all gen-sets in actual power band of power management. 1 means that gen-set is running, 0 means
that gen set is stopped.
Note: This value is evaluated only in controller with the lowest CAN address.

Next Power Band
Units -
Description
State of all gen-sets in next higher power band of power management.. 1 means that gen-set is running, 0
means that gen set is stopped.
Note: This value is evaluated only in controller with the lowest CAN address.
Group: Speed/Load ControlLoad Control

Speed Regulator Output
Units V
Description
This is the actual voltage on the speed governor output of the controller. In case the output is switched to
PWM mode, the relation is 10 V ~ 100 % PWM. -10 V is 0 % PWM
Speed Request
Units %
Description
This value contains the speed control signal expressed in %. This value is used for digital interfacing (via a
communication bus) with ECUs that require the requested speed in %.
Requested RPM
Units RPM
Description
This value contains the speed which is currently requested by the controller from the attached ECU. This
value is used for digital interfacing (via a communication bus) with ECUs that require the requested speed
directly in RPM.

Group: Voltage/PF Control
Reactive Power Required
Value group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 1.0.0
Units kVAr
Description
Requested reactive power.
Voltage Regulator Output

Units V
Description
Actual voltage between the AVR OUT and AVR COM terminals.
Voltage Request
Units %
Description
Internal Voltage request of internal Voltage regulator.
Group: Controler I/O

E-STOP
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 1.0.0
Units [-]
Description
Shows number of E-STOP input - the same principle of visualization like binary inputs.
Principle of value (principle of normally close binary input):
1 - E-STOP has voltage - state is OK
0 - E-STOP has no voltage - protection is active

Analog Input 1
Units Configurable
Description
This is the value of the analog input 1 of the controller.
Analog Input 2
Units Configurable
Description
Analog Input 3
Units Configurable
Description
Analog Input 4
Units Configurable
Description
Battery Volts
Units V
Description
Controller supply voltage.

Binary Inputs
Units [-]
Description
State of the binary inputs of the controller.
Binary Outputs
Units [-]
Description
State of the binary outputs of the controller.
D+
Units V
Description
D+ terminal voltage.
Group: Statistics
Genset kVArh
Value group Statistics Related FW 1.0.0
Units kVArh
Description
Counter of gen-set reactive power.

Genset kWh
Units kWh
Description
Counter of gen-set active power.
Mains kVArh
Units kVArh
Description
Counter of mains reactive power.
Mains kWh
Units kWh
Description
Counter of mains active power.
Maintenance 1
Units hours
Description
Countdown until next maintenance 1. Initial value can be set in Maintenance Timer 1 (page 302).

Maintenance 2
Units hours
Description
Maintenance 3
Units hours
Description
Num E-Stops
Units [-]
Description
Emergency stop alarms counter.
Num Starts
Units [-]
Description
Engine start commands counter. The counter is increased by 1 even if the particular start command will take
more than one attempt.
Rental 1
Units hours
Description
Remaining hours of Rental Timer 1 (page 441).

Rental 2
Units days
Description
Remaining hours of Rental Timer 2 (page 443).
Running Hours
Units hours
Description
Engine operation hours counter. The engine hours are incremented in the controller while the engine is
running.
Note: If an ECU is configured and it provides engine hours value, the value is taken from the ECU.
Shutdowns
Units [-]
Description
Shutdown alarms counter. This counter counts all occurrences of a shutdown alarm, not only real shutdowns
of the gen-set, i.e. the counter is increased by 2 if two shutdown alarms appear simultaneously.
Time Till Empty

Units days
Description
Assessment in days when the fuel tank will be empty.
Note: This value is based on setpoint Fuel Tank Volume (page 298) and value from ECU Fuel Rate.
For correct calculation of this value is necessary to have configured ECU which send Fuel Rate value,
otherwise this value can’t be calculated.

Time Till Empty
Units hours
Description
Assessment in hours when the fuel tank will be empty.
Time Till Empty

Units minutes
Description
Assessment in minutes when the fuel tank will be empty.
Total Fuel Consumption

Units L
Description
Value containing total amount of consumed fuel by engine. The controller automatically updates this value
every 30 s. The controller can calculate it in three ways:
Direct reading from ECU
Calculation based on actual fuel consumption reading from ECU
Calculation from fuel level drop in tank (using Fuel Level Analog Input + Fuel Tank Volume (page
298) setpoint)
Note: The accuracy of Total Fuel Consumption depends on the precision of ECU values or precision of
Fuel Tank Volume (page 298) and fuel level sensor.

Group: InfoInfo
Application Mode
Value group IL Info Related FW 1.0.0
Units [-]
Description
This Value mirrors the active application in the controller.
The intend of use it to display the value of the active application in InteliConfig or at the screen of the
controller.
Load Shedding StatusStatLdShed

Value group IL InfoLoad shedding Related FW 1.0.0
Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual “load shedding stage. The Value can get the values of the range 0 to 3, where 0
means no load shedding stage is active and 1, 2 or 3 means that the corresponding loadshedding stage is
active.
Engine State
Value group Info Related FW 1.0.0
Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual “engine state” message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.
Breaker State
Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual “breaker state” message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

Timer Text
Units [-]
Description
The value contains the numeric code of the “Current process timer” text which is shown on the main screen
of the controller.
The assignment of texts to the codes can be obtained using InteliConfig. Open any connection (also offline
with a previously saved archive) and go to the Tools ribbon -> Generate CFG image (all). The resulting file
will contain the assignment of texts to the codes.
Connection Type
Units [-]
Description
The text of this value represents the connection type which is adjusted in setpoint Connection type (page
244).
SPI Module A
Units [-]
Description
The name of plug-in module which is inserted in slot A.
SPI Module B
Units [-]
Description
The name of plug-in module which is inserted in slot B.

Timer Value
Units [HH:MM:SS]
Description
The value contains the "Current process timer" value which is shown on the main screen of the controller.
ID String
Units [-]
Description
Name of controller which is used in InteliConfig in command bar.
FW Version
Units [-]
Description
Major and minor firmware version number.
Application
Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual application in controller.
FW Branch
Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual branch of firmware in controller.

Password Decode
Units [-]
Description
This value contains a number which can be used for retrieving a lost password. Send this number together
with the controller serial number to your distributor if you have lost your password.
CAN16
Units V
Description
Bits of this value show "1" if the controller receives messages from the controller which has address
corresponding with the bit position. Bit 0 represents address 1 etc. This value contains information about
controllers with addresses 1-16.
CAN32
Units V
Description
Bits of this value show "1" if the controller receives messages from the controller which has address
corresponding with the bit position. Bit 0 represents address 17 etc. This value contains information about
Reg16
Units
Description
Bits of this value show "1" if the controller which has address corresponding with the bit position plays active
role in the power management. Bit 0 represents address 1 etc. This value contains information about

Reg32
Units
Description
Gen Loaded 16
Units V
Description
Gen Loaded 32
Units V
Description
Group: Log Bout

Log Bout 1
Value group Log Bout Related FW 1.0.0
Units [-]
Description
State of binary outputs.

Log Bout 2
Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 3
Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 4
Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 5
Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 6
Units [-]
Description

Log Bout 7
Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 8
Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 9
Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 10
Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 11
Units [-]
Description

Group: Ethernet
AirGate Status
Value group Ethernet Related FW 1.0.0
Units [-]
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.
Code Description
0 Ethernet cable is disconnected
1 Controller registered, waiting for authorization
2 Not possible to register, controller blacklisted
3 Not possible to register, server has no more capacity
4 Not possible to register, other reason
5 Controller registered and authorized
AirGate ID
Units [-]
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
InteliConfig or any other supported PC tool.
Primary DNS
Units [-]
Description
Current domain name server.
Secondary DNS
Units [-]
Comm object Related applications MINT, SPtM
Description

ETH Interface Status
Units [-]
Description
Current status of ethernet communication.
Ethernet PHY mode

Units [-]
Comm object Related applications MINT, SPtM
Description
Current Gateway
Units [-]
Description
Current gateway address.
Current IP Address
Units [-]
Description
Current IP address of the controller.

Last Email Result
Units [-]
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.
Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
8 HELO command was refused.
9 EHLO command was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
20 QUIT command was refused.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
27 Email address can’t be read.
30 SMTP server address translation error (from DNS server).
31 Error reading email content data (24327).
MAC Address
Units [-]
Description
Current MAC address of the controller ethernet interface.

Current Subnet Mask
Units [-]
Description
Current subnet mask.
Group: CM-GPRS
AirGate Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 1.0.0
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
Code Description
0 SIM card is not inserted
AirGate ID
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description

Connection Type
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
The type of data connection.
Cell Diag Code

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
Diagnostic code for the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS module.
GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 Modul is switched off
3 Module is switched on
4 Module – error in initialization
5 Module – not possible to set the APN
6 Module – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 Module – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 Module – not accepted DNS IP address
9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or
11
unknown status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by
14
locked SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected
19 No CDMA network

20 Unsuccessful registration to CDMA network
21 SIMCom/ME909s: can´t read FW version
22 SIMCom: GSM signal not found
23 SIMCom: can´t detect module speed
24 SIMCom: HW reset issued
25 PUK is required
26 Error of SIM card detected
27 ME909s: can't set module bps
28 ME909s: can't set link configuration
29 ME909s: can't do power-off
30 ME909s: can't do power-on
31 ME909s: can't do hardware reset
32 ME909s: ME909s not started
33 ME909s: switch off issued
34 ME909s: switch on issued
35 ME909s: HW reset issued
36 ME909s: can't switch echo off
37 ME909s: can't find out state of registration
38 ME909s: GSM signal not found
39 ME909s: no SIM memory for SMS
40 ME909s: waiting for registration
41 Can't read operator name
42 ME909s: can't set flow control
43 APN not typed
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate
Cell ErrorRate
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Description
This value contains information about relative quality of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS module
or by CM-4G-GPS module. The lower value means higher quality of signal.

Cell Signal Lev
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Description
This value contains information about relative strength of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS
module or by CM-4G-GPS module. It is a relative value helping to find the best signal and for troubleshooting
cases.
Cell Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the GSM modem.

Last Email Result
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
Code Description
4 Maximum length of data can’t be read.
5 No appeal to send command.
6 Command can’t be send.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
18 SMTP server refused the data of email.
21 Lost of connection.
23 Error during closing the connection.
24 No answer from server.
28 Error of encoding.
29 There was no attempt to send email.

Operator
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
The name of operator which to SIM card is connected.
Note: If roaming service is used then prefix "R" is added before the name of operator.
Group: CM-4G-GPS
Altitude
CM-4G-GPS (GPS
part)
Units m
Description
Actual GPS altitude.
HomePosDist
CM-4G-GPS (GPS
part)
Units km
Description
Actual distance from home position. Home position is adjusted via setpoints Home Latitude (page 446)
and Home Longitude (page 446) or by binary input GEO HOME POSITION (PAGE 668).
Latitude
CM-4G-GPS (GPS
part)
Units [-]
Description
Actual GPS latitude. Positions on north hemisphere have positive value, position on south hemisphere have
negative value.

Longitude
CM-4G-GPS (GPS
part)
Units [-]
Description
Actual GPS longitude. Positions on east hemisphere have positive value, position on west hemisphere have
negative value.
Satellites
CM-4G-GPS (GPS
part)
Units [-]
Description
Number of available satellites for GPS location.
AirGate ID
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description

AirGate Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
Code Description
0 SIM card is not inserted
Connection Type
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
The type of data connection.
Cell Diag Code

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
Diagnostic code for the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS module.
Code Description
0 OK. No error.

SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or
11
unknown status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by
14
locked SIM card
15 Unknown modem
19 No CDMA network
25 PUK is required

43 APN not typed
Cell ErrorRate
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Description
This value contains information about relative quality of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS module
or by CM-4G-GPS module. The lower value means higher quality of signal.
Cell Signal Lev

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Description
This value contains information about relative strength of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS
module or by CM-4G-GPS module. It is a relative value helping to find the best signal and for troubleshooting
cases.
Cell Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the GSM modem.

Last Email Result
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
Code Description
4 Maximum length of data can’t be read.
5 No appeal to send command.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
21 Lost of connection.
23 Error during closing the connection.
24 No answer from server.
28 Error of encoding.
29 There was no attempt to send email.

Operator
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
The name of operator which to SIM card is connected.
Note: If roaming service is used then prefix "R" is added before the name of operator.
Group: Date/Time
Time
Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.0.0
Units HH:MM:SS
Description
Shows setup time.
Date
Value group Date/Time Related FW 1.0.0
Units DD.MM.YYYY
Description
Shows setup date.
Group: Plug-In I/O

EM BIO A
Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 1.0.0
Units [-]
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot A.

EM BIO B
Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 1.0.0
Units [-]
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot B.
Group: PLC
PLC Resource 1
Value group PLC Related FW 1.0.0
Units [-]
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).
PLC Resource 2
Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 3
Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 4
Units [-]
Description

PLC Resource 5
Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 6
Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 7
Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 8
Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 1
Units [-]
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

PLC-BOUT 2
Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 3
Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 4
Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 5
Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 6
Units [-]
Description

PLC-BOUT 7
Units [-]
Description

9.1.3 Logical binary inputs
What Logical binary inputs are:
Logical binary inputs are inputs for binary values and functions.
Alphabetical groups of Logical binary inputs

LBI: A 615
LBI: B 616
LBI: C 664
LBI: D 664
LBI: E 665
LBI: F 665
LBI: G 667
LBI: H 669
LBI: I 669
LBI: L 670
LBI: M 671
LBI: N 673
LBI: O 674
LBI: R 674
LBI: S 680
LBI: T 680
For full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary inputs alphabetically (page 614).

Logical binary inputs alphabetically
Access Lock 615 BIN Protection 33 648 Mains Fail Block 671
Alternate Config 2 615 BIN Protection 34 649 Manual Load
Alternate Config 3 615 BIN Protection 35 650 Reconnection 671
AMF Start Block 615 BIN Protection 36 651 MCB Button 671
Battery Charger 616 BIN Protection 37 652 MCB Feedback 672
BIN Protection 1 616 BIN Protection 38 653 Min Run Power Active 673
BIN Protection 02 617 BIN Protection 39 654 NCB Feedback 673
BIN Protection 03 618 BIN Protection 40 655 Not Used 673
BIN Protection 04 619 BIN Protection 41 656 Oil Pressure 674
BIN Protection 05 620 BIN Protection 42 657 Regeneration Force 674
BIN Protection 06 621 BIN Protection 43 658 Regeneration Inhib 674
BIN Protection 07 622 BIN Protection 44 659 Remote AUTO 675
BIN Protection 08 623 BIN Protection 45 660 Remote Ctrl Lock 675
BIN Protection 09 624 BIN Protection 46 661 Remote MAN 675
BIN Protection 10 625 BIN Protection 47 662 Remote OFF 676
BIN Protection 11 626 BIN Protection 48 663 Remote Start/Stop 677
BIN Protection 12 627 Coolant Temp 664 Remote TEST 678
BIN Protection 13 628 Droop Unload Disl 664 Remote Test On Load 679
BIN Protection 14 629 Emergency MAN 665 Sd Override 680
BIN Protection 15 630 Emergency Stop 665 Start Button 680
BIN Protection 16 631 Fault Reset Button 665 Stop Button 680
BIN Protection 17 632 Force Droop Oper 665 Top Priority 680
BIN Protection 18 633 Force Island 666

BIN Protection 19 634 Force Parallel 666
BIN Protection 20 635 Force Protection Disable 666
BIN Protection 21 636 Fuel Level 667
BIN Protection 22 637 Fuel Pump On/Off 667
BIN Protection 23 638 GCB Button 667
BIN Protection 24 639 GCB Feedback 668
BIN Protection 25 640 Geo Home Position 668
BIN Protection 26 641 Geo-Fencing Enabled 669
BIN Protection 27 642 Group link 669
BIN Protection 28 643 Horn Reset Button 669
BIN Protection 29 644 Idle Speed 669
BIN Protection 30 645 Lang Selection 1 670
BIN Protection 31 646 Lang Selection 2 670
BIN Protection 32 647 Load Res 2 Active 670

LBI: A
Access Lock
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MINT, SPtM
Comm object 1
Description
When this input is closed, no setpoints can be adjusted from controller’s front panel and controller mode
(OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) cannot be changed.
Note: Access Lock does not protect setpoints and mode changing from InteliConfig. To avoid
unqualified changes the selected setpoints have to be password protected.
Also the buttons Fault Reset and Horn Reset are not blocked at all and buttons Start and Stop
in MAN mode are not blocked.
6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically
Alternate Config 2
Comm object 859
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the second set (setpoints with number 2).
Alternate Config 3
Comm object 860
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Config group are switched to the third set (setpoints with number 3).
AMF Start Block

Comm object 211
Description
This binary input can allow or block the AMF start. In case of running gen-set in AUTO mode gen-set goes to
cooling procedure and stops.

LBI: B
Battery Charger
Comm object 623
Description
When binary input is active and his delay Battery Charger Fail Delay (page 302) is out of time than alarm
Battery Charger Fail (page 795) is activated, written into history log and logical binary output AL BATTERY
CHARGER (PAGE 686) is activated.
BIN Protection 1
Comm object 9999
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.
Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
Stp Binary input is used for slow stop protection
BOC Binary input is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Sd Binary input is used for shutdown protection.
MP Mains protection without reset. Protection is signalized with red LED status but the
alarm is not in alarm list.
MPR Mains protection with reset. Protection is signalized with red LED status and alarm
is recorded in alarm list.
BO Breaker open protection without reset. Protection is signalized with red LED status
but the alarm is not in alarm list.
BOR Breaker open protection with reset. Protection is signalized with red LED status
and alarm is recorded in alarm list.
FLS Sensor fail protection.

BIN Protection 02
Comm object 9998
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 03
Comm object 9997
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 04
Comm object 9996
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 05
Comm object 9995
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 06
Comm object 9994
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 07
Comm object 9993
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 08
Comm object 9992
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 09
Comm object 9991
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 10
Comm object 9990
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 11
Comm object 9989
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 12
Comm object 9988
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 13
Comm object 9987
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 14
Comm object 9986
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 15
Comm object 9985
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 16
Comm object 9984
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 17
Comm object 9983
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 18
Comm object 9982
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 19
Comm object 9981
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 20
Comm object 9980
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 21
Comm object 9979
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 22
Comm object 9978
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 23
Comm object 9977
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 24
Comm object 9976
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 25
Comm object 9975
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 26
Comm object 9974
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 27
Comm object 9973
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 28
Comm object 9972
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 29
Comm object 9971
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 30
Comm object 9970
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 31
Comm object 9969
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 32
Comm object 9968
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 33
Comm object 9967
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 34
Comm object 9966
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 35
Comm object 9965
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 36
Comm object 9964
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 37
Comm object 9963
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 38
Comm object 9962
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 39
Comm object 9961
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 40
Comm object 9960
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 41
Comm object 9959
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 42
Comm object 9958
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 43
Comm object 9957
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 44
Comm object 9956
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 45
Comm object 9955
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 46
Comm object 9954
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 47
Comm object 9953
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 48
Comm object 9952
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

LBI: C
Coolant Temp
Comm object 625
Description
Binary input for COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 771) protection.
Protection types
monitored.
active.
LBI: D
Droop Unload Disl
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications MINT
Comm object 597
Description
Activation of this logical binary input avoids the soft unload function of the gen-set if it is running in droop.
GCB is opened immediately after the stop request or pressing of GCB button. If this input is not active the
unloading is given by the setpoint Load Ramp (page 353).
Note: This function is used when there is no other gen-set to take over the load of the gen-set which is
being unloaded.

LBI: E
Emergency MAN
Comm object 45
Description
This input is designed to allow the gen-set or breakers to be controlled externally, not by the controller. This
feature can be useful in case of or in case of some failure, which disables the gen-set or breakers to be
controlled by the controller, but the gen-set itself is operational.
The controller behaves in the following way:
Shows the text EmergMan in the engine status on the main screen.
Stops all functions regarding the gen-set or breaker control, deactivates all outputs related to it.
Stop Fail alarm is not being evaluated and stop solenoid is not activated if nonzero speed is detected.
When the input is deactivated, the controller takes control according to the situation in the moment of
deactivation, i.e. the gen-set remains running loaded if it was running and GCB was closed in the
moment the input was deactivated.
Emergency Stop
Comm object 40
Description
When this binary input is activated, gen-set is immediately stopped. Also binary outputs are disconnected.
Alarm Emergency Stop (page 820) is activated.
LBI: F
Fault Reset Button
Comm object 191
Description
Binary input has the same function as Fault Reset button on the InteliGen 500 front panel.
Force Droop Oper

Comm object 788
Description
When this logical binary input is active, the regulations is forced to droop (the same behavior like the setpoint
Load/Var Sharing Regulation Type (page 361) = Droop.

Force Island
Related FW 1.0.0 Related applications SPtM
Comm object 787
Description
Activation of this logical binary input start the gen-set and go to island operation. Transition of load from
mains is adjusted via setpoint Transfer Mains To Gen Bus (page 351).
Force Parallel
Comm object 786
Description
Activation of this logical binary input start the gen-set system and go to parallel operation if mains is healthy.
Island operation is not allowed.
Force Protection Disable

Comm object 920
Description
Selected protections are disabled, if LBI: Force Protection Disable is active..
Activation and deactivation of this binary input will create history record:
Force Protection Disable active
Force Protection Disable inactive
Behaviour depends on configuration of LBI - normally close or normally open.

Fuel Level
Comm object 626
Description
Binary input for FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 772) protection.
Protection types
monitored.
active.
Fuel Pump On/Off

Comm object 694
Description
This binary input is used for manual control of binary output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715).
Note: This binary input is basically designed for ON and OFF switch (switch with arrestment in these
positions) because controller reacts to rising and falling edge of signal in this input.
output FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) is control by this binary input. Setpoints Fuel Pump On (page
299) and Fuel Pump Off (page 300) are not evaluated!
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure analog input FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 772) for proper
function of this binary input.
LBI: G
GCB Button
Comm object 193
Description
Binary input has the same function as GCB button on the InteliGen 500 front panel. It is evaluated in
MAN mode only.

GCB Feedback
Comm object 63
Description
Use this input for indication whether the generator circuit breaker is open or closed.
Image 9.133 GCB Feedback 1
Image 9.134 GCB Feedback 2
Note: InteliGen 500 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure
the feedback to binary inputs.
Geo Home Position

Comm object 219
Description
This binary input can be used to adjust home position of gen-set. In case that binary input is active, setpoints
Home Latitude (page 446) and Home Longitude (page 446) are adjusted automatically from actual
coordinates from GPS signal.
Note: Input has to be activated for at least 2 seconds.

Geo-Fencing Enabled
Comm object 218
Description
This binary input enables or disables Fence 1 Protection (page 449) and Fence 2 Protection (page 450) if
Geo-Fencing (page 448) is adjusted to value "LBI Enable".
Group link
Comm object 59
Description
This input is used for logical connection and disconnection of two gen-set groups selected with setpoints
Group Link L (page 344) and Group Link R (page 345). If the input is active, then the two selected groups
will perform power management, load sharing and kVAr sharing together as one large group.
Note: This function is independent on the group which the particular controller belongs to, i.e. the
controller can provide linking function e.g. for groups 3,4 although it belongs to group 2.
LBI: H
Horn Reset Button
Comm object 192
Description
Binary input has the same function as Horn reset button on the InteliGen 500 front panel.
LBI: I
Idle Speed
Comm object 624
Description
This binary input changes cooling speed from nominal to idle.

LBI: L
Lang Selection 1
Comm object 107
Description
Use this binary input with binary input LANG SELECTION 2 (PAGE 670) to choose required language of
controller. The system is based on binary numbers.
Binary input Binary number Active language

Language Selection 1 is active 1 First language (English)
LANG SELECTION 2 (PAGE 670) is active 2 Second language
Language Selection 1 and LANG SELECTION
3 Third language
2 (PAGE 670) are active
Lang Selection 2
Comm object 108
Description
Use this binary input with binary input LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 670) to choose required language of
controller. The system is based on binary numbers.
Binary input Binary number Active language

LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 670) is active 1 First language (English)
Lang Selection 2 is active 2 Second language
LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 670) and Lang
3 Third language
Selection 2 are active
Load Res 2 Active

Comm object 49
Description
Activation of this logical binary input changes the set of load reserve setpoint, which are used in Power
management (page 79). This input is used to activate the load reserve set 2 instead of the set 1, which is
active by default.

LBI: M
Mains Fail Block
Comm object 622
Description
If the input is closed, the automatic start of the gen-set at Mains failure is blocked. In case of running gen-set
in AUTO mode, timer Mains Return Delay (page 319) is started and when it elapses GCB is opened, gen-
set goes to cooling procedure and stops. When GCB is opened after Open Transfer Min Break (page 350)
the MCB is closed.
Note: This input simulates healthy Mains.
Manual Load Reconnection

Comm object 60
Description
This input is used for manual reconnection of the last disconnected part of the load, if the load has dropped
below the setpoint Load Reconnection Level (page 330). This works only if automatic reconnection is
disabled, i.e. the setpoint Auto Load Reconnection (page 331) = Disabled.
MCB Button
Comm object 194
Description
This binary input has the same function as MCB button on the InteliGen 500 front panel. It is evaluated in
MAN mode only.

MCB Feedback
Comm object 65
Description
Use this input for indication whether the mains circuit breaker is open or closed.
Image 9.135 MCB Feedback 1
Image 9.136 MCB Feedback 2
Note: InteliGen 500 controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure

Min Run Power Active
Comm object 52
Description
This input is used to activate the function minimal running power, which is adjusted via setpoint #Min Run
Power (page 339).
LBI: N
NCB Feedback
Comm object 67
Description
This input is used for connection of feedback contact from the neutral contactor. If the input is active, the
controller will consider the neutral contactor as closed and vice versa. See also setpoint #Neutral
Contactor Control (page 237).
Not Used
Comm object 184
Description
Binary input has no function. Use this configuration when binary input is not used.

LBI: O
Oil Pressure
Comm object 43
Description
Binary input for OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 774) protection.
Protection types
monitored.
active.
IMPORTANT: This binary input is also used for evaluating engine running condition.
Example: Normally close connection - when LBI is closed then oil pressure is OK and is higher than
starting oil pressure.
Note: In case that you want to use binary input of oil pressure sensor just for protection please use one
of the BIN PROTECTION 1 (PAGE 616).
LBI: R
Regeneration Force
Comm object 680
Description
When this binary input is activated, the controller send request for force regeneration of DPF (diesel
particulate filter) to ECU.
Note: ECU with Tier IV support is required for proper functionality.
Regeneration Inhib
Comm object 679
Description
When this binary input is activated, the controller sends request to inhibit regeneration of DPF (diesel
particulate filter) to ECU.
Note: ECU with Tier IV support is required for proper functionality.

Remote AUTO
Comm object 620
Description
The controller is switched to the AUTO mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
binary input is closed. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
This binary input has the lowest priority from Remote OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST binary inputs
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)
Remote Ctrl Lock
Comm object 4
Description
If the input is active, the controller will not accept any actions regarding the system control – e.g. writing of
commands and setpoint changes via remote communication interfaces.
Remote MAN
Comm object 618
Description
The controller is switched to the MAN mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
Remote TEST
Remote MAN

Remote OFF
Comm object 617
Description
The controller is switched to the OFF mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
Remote TEST
Remote MAN

Remote Start/Stop
Comm object 38
Description
Use this input to start and stop the gen-set in AUTO mode and TEST mode.
Taken action in SPtM application (AUTO Mode)

Start genset, synchronization, parallel operation (baseload/Imp/Exp),
Regardless the Mains params OK.
Active
Start the genstet to Island if Mains Not OK
Reverse synchronisation when mains gets restored
Inactive Unloading of the genset if it is running in parallel, stop the genset.
Taken action in MINT application (AUTO Mode)
Start the Genset - After Powermanagement/ #System Start Delay (Actually is
Active using the existing REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) internaly (this LBI is not
visible in any application)).
Stop the Genset - After Powermanagement/ #System Stop Delay (Actually is
Inactive using the existing LBI REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677) internaly (this LBI is not
visible in any application)).
Taken action in AMF application (AUTO Mode)
Start the genset and stay running with opened GCB if Mains OK.
Active Go to Island if Mains fails (due to AMF function).
If Mains is not OK the AMF function starts the genset to Island anyway.
Stop the genset if Mains is OK.
Inactive
If Mains not Ok the genset stays running due to AMF function anyway.
Taken action in MRS application (AUTO Mode)
Start the Genset - No delay
Active
Close GCB
Open GCB
Inactive
Stop the Genset - No delay
Note: In the SPTM and AMF application there are more LBIs that can influence the state of the
application and can be in the collision with the Common LBI Remote Start/Stop.

Remote TEST
Comm object 621
Description
The controller is switched to the TEST mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
Remote TEST
Remote MAN

Remote Test On Load
Comm object 61
Description
Closing of the GCB in MRS and MINT or transferring of the load from the mains to genset in SPTM and AMF
Application TEST Remote TEST On Load

Active: Gen-set is put to TEST mode. On the top of it the load
is transfered to the genset. The same behaviour like the LBI
FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 666). The load transfer according to the
settings is performed.
Note: Whenever the LBI REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 677)
is active, the LBI REMOTE TEST ON LOAD (PAGE 679) has
SPtM
higher priority because it takes the same action like LBI
FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 666)
Inactive: Gen-set comes back to the original mode and

behaves accordingly to this mode and other conditions. (the
load can be transfered back to the mains (OFF, AUTO) or stay
on the genset (MAN).
Active: Gen-set is put to TEST mode. On the top of it the GCB
is closed. The same behaviour like the LBI REMOTE
Gen-set started and
MRS START /STOP (PAGE 677)
running until the
TEST mode Inactive: Gen-set comes back to the original mode and
deactivated. behaves accordingly to this mode and other conditions.
Active: Gen-set is put to TEST mode. On the top of it the GCB
is closed (synchronized if the common bus bar is not dead).
The same behaviour like the LBI REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE
MINT
677).
Inactive: Gen-set comes back to the original mode and
behaves accordingly to this mode and other conditions.
Active: Gen-set is put to TEST mode. On the top of it the load
is transfered to the genset. The same behaviour like the LBI
FORCE ISLAND (PAGE 666). The open load transfer is
performed.
AMF
Inactive: Genset comes back to the original mode and
behaves accordingly to this mode and other conditions. (the
load can be transfered back to the mains (OFF, AUTO) or stay
on the genset (MAN).

LBI: S
Sd Override
Comm object 44
Description
If this input is active, all alarms except Emergency Stop and Overspeed are suppressed. The suppressed
alarms will be displayed in the alarm list, but they will not take effect regarding the gen-set control.
Note: Sd Override (page 680) is indicated in the alarm list if Sd Override mode is active to inform the
operator that the engine is not protected.
IMPORTANT: MISUSE OF THIS INPUT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE GEN-SET!
Start Button
Comm object 189
Description
Binary input has the same function as Start Button on the InteliGen 500 front panel. It is evaluated in
MAN mode only.
Stop Button
Comm object 190
Description
Binary input has the same function as Stop Button on the InteliGen 500 front panel. It is evaluated in
MAN Mode only.
LBI: T
Top Priority
Comm object 199
Description
If this input is active, the controller will have the highest priority in the group independent of the setpoint
Priority (page 333).

9.1.4 Logical binary outputs
What Logical binary outputs are:
Logical binary outputs are outputs for binary values and functions.
Alphabetical groups of Logical binary outputs

LBO: A 684
LBO: B 706
LBO: C 710
LBO: D 711
LBO: E 711
LBO: F 714
LBO: G 716
LBO: H 722
LBO: I 723
LBO: L 725
LBO: M 725
LBO: N 730
LBO: P 731
LBO: R 734
LBO: S 735
LBO: T 740
For full list of Logical binary outputs go to the chapter Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 682).

Logical binary outputs alphabetically
Air Valves 684 AL Maintenance 1 692 BIN 1 Status 706

AL AIN 1 Sd+BOC 684 AL Maintenance 2 692 BIN 2 Status 707
AL AIN 1 Wrn 684 AL Maintenance 3 692 BIN 3 Status 707
AL AIN 2 Sd+BOC 685 AL Oil Press Sd 692 BIN 4 Status 708
AL AIN 2 Wrn 685 AL Oil Press Wrn 692 BIN 5 Status 708
AL AIN 3 Sd+BOC 685 AL Overcurrent 693 BIN 6 Status 709
AL AIN 3 Wrn 685 AL Overload BOC 693 BIN 7 Status 709
AL AIN 4 Sd+BOC 685 AL Overload Wrn 693 BIN 8 Status 710
AL AIN 4 Wrn 686 AL Overspeed 693 Cooling Pump 710
AL Battery Flat 686 AL Rental Timer 1 694 Cooling 711
AL Battery Charger 686 AL Rental Timer 2 694 Display Fail 711
AL Battery Voltage 686 AL Start Fail 695 ECU Communic Error 711
AL Common BOC 686 AL Stop Fail 695 ECU Communic OK 711
AL Common Fls 687 AL Underspeed 695 ECU Power Relay 712
AL Common SdMPR 687 Alarm 695 ECU Red Lamp 712
AL Common Stp 687 AIN Switch01 696 ECU Run Stop 713
AL Common Wrn 687 AIN Switch02 696 ECU Wait To Start 713
AL CoolantTemp Low 688 AIN Switch03 697 ECU Yellow Lamp 713
AL CoolantTemp Sd 688 AIN Switch04 697 Exercise Timer 1 713
AL CoolantTemp Wrn 688 AIN Switch05 698 Exercise Timer 2 714
AL D+ Fail 688 AIN Switch06 698 FltRes 714
AL Earth Fault 688 AIN Switch07 699 Frequency Select 714
AL Fence 1 689 AIN Switch08 699 Fuel Pump 715
AL Fence 2 689 AIN Switch09 700 Fuel Solenoid 715
AL Fuel Level Sd 689 AIN Switch10 700 GCB Close/Open 716
AL Fuel Level Wrn 689 AIN Switch11 701 GCB OFF Coil 717
AL Gen Freq Wrn 689 AIN Switch12 701 GCB ON Coil 718
AL GenBus Frequency 690 AIN Switch13 702 GCB UV Coil 718
AL Gen Overfrequency 690 AIN Switch14 702 GeneratorBus Healthy 720
AL Gen Overvoltage 690 AIN Switch15 703 Glow Plugs 720
AL Gen Underfrequency 690 AIN Switch16 703 Heartbeat 722
AL Gen Undervoltage 690 AIN Switch17 704 HEST Lamp 722
AL Gen Voltage Wrn 691 AIN Switch18 704 Horn 722
AL GenBus Voltage 691 AIN Switch19 705 Idle/Nominal 723
AL Mains Fail 691 AIN Switch20 705 Ignition 723
AL Mains Frequency 691 AVR Down 706 Ignition On 724
AL Mains Voltage 691 AVR Up 706 Load Shedding Stage 1 725

Load Shedding Stage 2 725
Load Shedding Stage 3 725
Mains Healthy 725
Manual Ready 726
MCB Close/Open 726
MCB OFF Coil 727
MCB ON Coil 728
MCB UV Coil 729
Mode AUTO 730
Mode MAN 730
Mode OFF 730
Mode TEST 730
NCB Close/Open 730
Not In AUTO 731
Not Used 731
Peak Shaving Active 731
Power Switch 732
Prestart 732
Ready To AMF 734
Ready To Load 734
Ready 734
RegenerationNeededRegen
Needed 735
Running 735
Sd Override 735
Speed Down 736
Speed Up 736
Starter 737
Still Log 0 737
Still Log 1 737
Stop Pulse 738
Stop Solenoid 738
Supplying Load 739
System Reserve OK 739
Temperature Switch 740

LBO: A
Air Valves
Comm object 1247
Description
This output closes together with binary output PRESTART (PAGE 732) and opens after the engine is stopped
or in case that engine is not ready.
Image 9.137 Air Valves
6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically
AL AIN 1 Sd+BOC
Comm object 1386
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the analog input 1 of the controller
present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.
AL AIN 1 Wrn
Comm object 1382
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the analog input 1 of the controller present in the
alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.

AL AIN 2 Sd+BOC
Comm object 1387
Description
AL AIN 2 Wrn
Comm object 1383
Description
AL AIN 3 Sd+BOC
Comm object 1388
Description
AL AIN 3 Wrn
Comm object 1384
Description
AL AIN 4 Sd+BOC
Comm object 1389
Description

AL AIN 4 Wrn
Comm object 1385
Description
AL Battery Flat
Comm object 1292
Description
This output is active when the Sd Battery Flat (page 821) or Wrn Battery < Voltage (page 801)Wrn
Battery Voltage (page 795) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Battery Charger
Comm object 1272
Description
This output is active when the Battery Charger Fail (page 795) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirmed.
AL Battery Voltage
Comm object 1293
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Battery Voltage (page 795)Wrn Battery > Voltage (page 800) or Wrn
Battery < Voltage (page 801) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Common BOC
Comm object 9
Description
Output closes when any BOC alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No BOC alarm is active and
Fault reset button is pressed

AL Common Fls
Comm object 6
Description
Output closes when any sensor fail alarm appears.
No sensor fail alarm is active and
AL Common SdMPR
Comm object 4
Description
Output closes when any shutdown mains protection with reset alarm appears.
No shutdown mains protection with reset alarm is active and
AL Common Stp
Comm object 5
Description
Output closes when any slow stop alarm appears.
No slow stop alarm is active and
AL Common Wrn
Comm object 3
Description
Output closes when any warning alarm appears.
No warning alarm is active and

AL CoolantTemp Low
Comm object 1295
Description
The output is closed when there is the Wrn Coolant Temperature Low (page 801) alarm from the
COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 771) in the alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.
6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 682)
AL CoolantTemp Sd
Comm object 1421
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 771) in the
AL CoolantTemp Wrn
Comm object 1420
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 771) in the alarmlist or
isn’t confirmed.
Note: Binary output is also active if protection type is set to HistRecOnl and threshold level for history
record is reach.
AL D+ Fail
Comm object 1260
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Charging Alternator Fail (page 800) alarm is present in the alarmlist or
isn’t confirm.
AL Earth Fault
Comm object 1294
Description
This output is active when the Sd Earth Fault Current (page 822) alarm is present in alarm list or isn’t
confirm.
Note: It is strongly recommended to use this output only onetime.

AL Fence 1
Comm object 1548
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Fence 1 Alarm (page 802) or BOC Fence 1 Alarm (page 831) or Sd
Fence 1 Alarm (page 823) (depends on configuration of alarm type) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.
AL Fence 2
Comm object 1549
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Fence 2 Alarm (page 803) or BOC Fence 2 Alarm (page 832) or Sd
Fence 2 Alarm (page 823) (depends on configuration of alarm type) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.
AL Fuel Level Sd
Comm object 1423
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown or BOC alarm from the FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 772) in the
AL Fuel Level Wrn

Comm object 1422
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 772) in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirmed.
record is reach.
AL Gen Freq Wrn

Comm object 1267
Description
This output is active generator frequency warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

AL GenBus Frequency
Comm object 1266
Description
This output is active when at least one generator frequency BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.
AL Gen Overfrequency
Comm object 1264
Description
This output is active when at least one generator overfrequency alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Gen Overvoltage
Comm object 1261
Description
This output is active when at least one generator overvoltage alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Gen Underfrequency
Comm object 1265
Description
This output is active when at least one generator underfrequency alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.
AL Gen Undervoltage
Comm object 1262
Description
This output is active when at least one generator undervoltage alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

AL Gen Voltage Wrn
Comm object 1289
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage warning alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.
AL GenBus Voltage
Comm object 1263
Description
This output is active when at least one generator voltage BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.
AL Mains Fail
Comm object 197
Description
Output for signaling Mains Failure. This output is active when at least one mains frequency BOC or Sd alarm
or at least one mains voltage BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.
AL Mains Frequency
Comm object 1271
Description
This output is active when at least one mains frequency BOC or Sd alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.
AL Mains Voltage
Comm object 1270
Description
This output is active when at least one mains voltage BOC or Sd alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.

AL Maintenance 1
Comm object 1254
Description
This output is active when the Alarm Maintenance 1 is present in the alarmlist. It means that counter of
maintenance is on zero or the Alarm Maintenance 1 isn’t confirm.
AL Maintenance 2
Comm object 1255
Description
AL Maintenance 3
Comm object 1256
Description
AL Oil Press Sd
Comm object 1419
Description
The output is closed when there is the shutdown alarm from the OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 774) in the alarmlist or
isn’t confirmed.
AL Oil Press Wrn

Comm object 1418
Description
The output is closed when there is the warning alarm from the OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 774) in the alarmlist or
isn’t confirmed.
record is reach.

AL Overcurrent
Comm object 109
Description
This output is active when the BOC Overcurrent IDMT (page 836) or BOC Short Circuit (page 837)
alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Overload BOC
Comm object 1268
Description
This output is active when the Sd Overload (page 828) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Overload Wrn
Comm object 1269
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Overload (page 810) alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Overspeed
Comm object 779
Description
This output is active when the Sd Overspeed (page 829) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

AL Rental Timer 1
Comm object 1370
Description
The binary output closes when the Rental Timer 1 (page 441) elapsed.
AL Rental Timer 2
Comm object 1371
Description
The binary output closes when the Rental Timer 2 (page 443) elapsed.

AL Start Fail
Comm object 1291
Description
This output is active when the Sd Start Fail (page 830) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Stop Fail
Comm object 339
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Stop Fail (page 811) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Underspeed
Comm object 1296
Description
This output is active when the Sd Underspeed (page 830) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
Alarm
Comm object 2
Description
The output is designed to be used as external alarm indication such as a red bulb in the control room etc. The
output is active when at least one unconfirmed alarm is present in the alarmlist and remains active until
confirmation of alarm.

AIN Switch01
Comm object 1400
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 1 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 1 On (page 367) and Analog Switch 1 Off (page 368). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 764) analog input.
AIN Switch02
Comm object 1401
Description

AIN Switch03
Comm object 1402
Description
AIN Switch04
Comm object 1403
Description

AIN Switch05
Comm object 1787
Description
AIN Switch06
Comm object 1788
Description

AIN Switch07
Comm object 1789
Description
AIN Switch08
Comm object 1790
Description

AIN Switch09
Comm object 1791
Description
AIN Switch10
Comm object 1792
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 10 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 10 On (page 394) and Analog Switch 10 Off (page 395).
The value is measured from AIN SWITCH 10 (PAGE 767) analog input.

AIN Switch11
Comm object 1793
Description
AIN Switch12
Comm object 1794
Description

AIN Switch13
Comm object 1795
Description
AIN Switch14
Comm object 1796
Description

AIN Switch15
Comm object 1797
Description
AIN Switch16
Comm object 1798
Description

AIN Switch17
Comm object 1799
Description
AIN Switch18
Comm object 1800
Description

AIN Switch19
Comm object 1801
Description
AIN Switch20
Comm object 1802
Description

AVR Down
Comm object 55
Description
This output together with the complementary output AVR UP (PAGE 706) is designed for voltage and power
factor control at gen-sets, where the AVR does not support analog control.
AVR Up
Comm object 54
Description
This output together with the complementary output AVR DOWN (PAGE 706) is designed for voltage and
power factor control at gen-sets, where the AVR does not support analog control.
LBO: B
BIN 1 Status
Comm object 1374
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 1 is active and open when Binary Input 1 is inactive. When Binary
Input 1 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.
Note: When LBI 1 is used like protection, then state of this LBO is connected with this protection e.g.
when LBI is inactive but alarm of protection is not confirm in alarmlist, LBO is still active.
Image 9.160 Binary Input 1 Status

BIN 2 Status
Comm object 1375
Description
Alarmlist.
BIN 3 Status
Comm object 1376
Description
Alarmlist.

BIN 4 Status
Comm object 1377
Description
Alarmlist.
BIN 5 Status
Comm object 1378
Description
Alarmlist.

BIN 6 Status
Comm object 1379
Description
Alarmlist.
BIN 7 Status
Comm object 1380
Description
Alarmlist.

BIN 8 Status
Comm object 1381
Description
Alarmlist.
LBO: C
Cooling Pump
Comm object 40
Description
This output is dedicated for coolant pump control. It is closed in the moment the gen-set is started and
remains closed until the gen-set is stopped and After Cooling Time (page 282) elapses or the cranking
pause or the Emergency Stop occurs or the controller is switched to OFF mode.
Image 9.168 Cooling Pump

Cooling
Comm object 74
Description
The output closes when gen-set is in Cooling state.
LBO: D
Display Fail
Comm object
Description
This output indicates controller display failure.
LBO: E
ECU Communic Error
Comm object 348
Description
This output is active when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the ECU is not established or
has dropped out.
Note: When ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 712) is not configured, output is evaluated all the time. If ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 712) is configured, output is evaluated only when engine is not stop (ECU POWER
RELAY (PAGE 712) is active).
ECU Communic OK
Comm object 347
Description
This output is active when an ECU is configured, connected and the communication with the ECU is
established.
Note: When ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 712) is not configured, output is evaluated all the time. If ECU
POWER RELAY (PAGE 712) is configured, output is evaluated only when engine is not stop (ECU POWER
RELAY (PAGE 712) is active).

ECU Power Relay
Comm object 116
Description
This output is to be used for control of “keyswitch” input of an ECU. If the particular ECU does not have
keyswitch or a similar input, it can be used for control of DC power for the ECU.
The output closes together with PRESTART (PAGE 732) and remains closed for the entire duration that the
engine is running. It is opened at the moment that the engine comes to a stop (i.e. together with the FUEL
SOLENOID (PAGE 715)).
Image 9.169 ECU Power Relay
IMPORTANT: This LBO also affects evaluation of Sd ECU Communication Fail (page 822) or
Wrn ECU Communication Fail (page 802) alarms. With configured LBO ECU Power Relay,
these alarms are evaluated only when this LBO is active. Without configured LBO ECU
Power Relay, these alarm are evaluated all the time.
ECU Red Lamp

Comm object 350
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active “red lamp” flag, i.e. it has detected a critical malfunction
and the engine should not be operated until a service check is performed. This flag is taken from the DM1
frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag in their own proprietary frames and some do
not provide the flag at all.

ECU Run Stop
Comm object 958
Description
Signal for starting and stopping of ECU.
ECU Wait To Start

Comm object 959
Description
This output is active when the ECU Wait To Start lamp is received.
ECU Yellow Lamp

Comm object 349
Description
This output is active when the ECU sends an active “yellow lamp” flag, i.e. it has detected a non-critical
malfunction. This flag is taken from the DM1 frame on standard J1939 ECUs. Some ECUs provide this flag
in their own proprietary frames and some do not provide the flag at all.
Exercise Timer 1
Comm object 1250
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 1. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 427) subgroup. This output is
active when Timer 1 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 427) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 434).

Exercise Timer 2
Comm object 1251
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 2. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 434) subgroup. This output is
active when Timer 2 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 427) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 434).
LBO: F
FltRes
Comm object 592
Description
This output provides 1s pulse when:
Fault Reset button is pressed on the controller front facia or
Fault Reset button is pressed on any of external local/remote terminals or
Fault Reset command is received via communication line or
the input FAULT RESET BUTTON is activated.
Frequency Select
Comm object 1815
Description
The Frequency select output is opened when Nominal Frequency (Frequency Settings) is equal to 50Hz and
closed when Nominal Frequency (Frequency Settings) is equal to 60Hz.

Fuel Pump
Comm object 1253
Description
Output closes when the value of Fuel Level lies under the value of Fuel Pump On (page 299) setpoint and
opens when value of Fuel Pump Off (page 300) is reached.
This output also can be closed by binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 667). In this case the binary
output FUEL PUMP ON (PAGE 299) is closed until the binary input FUEL PUMP ON/OFF (PAGE 667) is active
or until the value of Fuel Pump Off (page 300) is reached.
Note: Setpoints Fuel Pump On (page 299) and Fuel Pump Off (page 300) are invisible until
configuration of this LBO.
Fuel Solenoid
Comm object 22
Description
This output controls the fuel solenoid valve.
The output closes before binary output STARTER (PAGE 737).The lead time is adjusted by setpoint Fuel
Solenoid Lead (page 276).
Image 9.170 Fuel Solenoid 1
Image 9.171 Fuel Solenoid 2

The output opens when:
Emergency Stop comes
cooled gen-set is stopped
in pause between repeated starts
LBO: G
GCB Close/Open
Comm object 41
Description
The output controls the generator circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued.
Note: InteliGen 500 controllers can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure
Image 9.172 GCB Close command
Image 9.173 Repeated GCB Close command

Image 9.174 GCB Open command
GCB OFF Coil

Comm object 43
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5
seconds.
Image 9.175 GCB OFF Coil command

GCB ON Coil
Comm object 42
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of generator circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5 second
pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.
Image 9.176 GCB ON Coil close command
Image 9.177 Repeated GCB ON coil close command
GCB UV Coil
Comm object 44
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of generator circuit breaker. The output is active the

whole time when the generator is running. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the
breaker has to be switched off.
Image 9.178 GCB UV Coil close command
Image 9.179 GCB UV Coil open command

GeneratorBus Healthy
Comm object 77
Description
This output is active when the generatorbus voltage, frequency and voltage unbalance is within limits. It is
deactivated:
immediately when the voltage/frequency/voltage unbalance gets out of limits (when GCB is not
closed)
or
with an appropriate delay after the voltage/frequency/voltage unbalance has got out of limits (when
GCB is closed)
Glow Plugs
Comm object 1252
Description
This output is dedicated for diesel engine only. This output will close for exact time pre-set by setpoint Glow
Plugs Time (page 275) before every starting attempt. The output opens in same time as the STARTER
(PAGE 737) output closes (100 ms after PRESTART (PAGE 732) output opens).
Image 9.180 Glow Plugs

When the Glow Plugs Time (page 275) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 272) then the Glow
Plugs Time (page 275) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 272) is long as Cranking Fail Pause (page 272).
Image 9.181 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 1
When the Glow Plugs Time (page 275) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 272) then the Glow
Plugs Time (page 275) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 272) is long as normal Glow Plugs Time (page
275).
Image 9.182 Glow Plugs in Cranking Fail Pause 2

LBO: H
Heartbeat
Comm object 81
Description
This output toggles on/off in a period of 500 ms whenever the controller is switched on and functional.
HEST Lamp
Comm object 1373
Description
This output is closed if ECU send signal HEST Lamp. If ECU stop send HEST LAMP signal binary input will
be opened without no matter if alarms in alarmlist are confirmed or not.
Horn
Comm object 1
Description
The output designed to be used for acoustic indication of a newly appeared alarm. The output is activated
each time a new alarm has appeared and remains active until one of the following events occurs:
Fault reset is pressed
Horn reset is pressed

Horn Timeout (page 251) has elapsed

LBO: I
Idle/Nominal
Comm object 39
Description
This output is used for switching between idle speed and nominal speed of the engine during the startup
phase, if this feature (input) is available on the particular engine. In the case of some EFI engines, the
idle/nominal switching is performed over the communication bus.
The output Idle/Nominal closes after the timer Idle Time (page 276) elapses. The Idle Time (page 276)
starts to countdown when Starting RPM (page 273) reached. The underspeed protection is not evaluated
during fixed 5 seconds period after reaching Starting RPM (page 273). A Start Fail protection occurs if the
RPM drop below 2RPM during idle.
Image 9.183 Idle/Nominal
Note: Connect binary output Idle/Nominal to speed governor to switch the speed:
opened = Idle
closed = Nominal
(for normally open contact type)
Ignition
Comm object 37
Description
This output is dedicated to controlling the ignition at a gas engine. The output is closed together with binary
output FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 715) in the moment when the timer Sd Ventilation Time (page 280) elapsed
and the gen-set reaches at least 30 RPM during cranking. The timer Sd Ventilation Time (page 280)
become active when the gen-set has been stopped for any Sd protection or the controller has been turned on
only before first cranking attempt. The output is opened 500ms after all Additional running engine indication
Additional running engine indications (page 132) will be inactive. The output is opened when the gen-
set has to be stopped or in pause during repeated starts.

Image 9.184 Ignition 1
Image 9.185 Ignition 2
Ignition On
Comm object 1257

Description
This input is on since start button is pressed till the unit is completely stopped (or the engine doesn’t start or
Sd or E-Stop becomes active)
Note: This function is the same as ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 712) . Ignition ON stays there from
historical reasons.

LBO: L
Load Shedding Stage 1
Comm object 51
Description
Particular instances of the load shedding functionality
The load shedding outputs are activated (load is beeing shedd) in the order 1, 2, 3.
The load shedding outputs are deactivated (load is beeing reconnected) in the order 3, 2, 1.
The load disconnected by the LBO Nr.1 is the less essential load of these three possible loads instances.

Comm object 52
Description

Comm object 53
Description
LBO: M
Mains Healthy
Comm object 78
Description
This output is active while mains failure is not detected and mains voltage and frequency is within limits.

Manual Ready
Comm object 1258
Description
This output is active when controller is in MAN mode and the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it
i.e. no red alarm is activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 680) is active (Output READY (PAGE 734) is active).
MCB Close/Open
Comm object 45
Description
The output controls the mains circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued.
Note: InteliGen 500 controllers can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure
Image 9.186 MCB Close command
Image 9.187 Repeated MCB Close command

Image 9.188 MCB Open command
MCB OFF Coil

Comm object 47
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of mains circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the
moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5
seconds.
Image 9.189 MCB OFF Coil command

MCB ON Coil
Comm object 46
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of mains circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5 second
pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed.
Image 9.190 MCB ON Coil close command
Image 9.191 Repeated MCB ON coil close command

MCB UV Coil
Comm object 48
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of mains circuit breaker. The output is active the whole
time when the controller is switched on. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the
breaker has to be switched off.
Image 9.192 MCB UV Coil close command
Image 9.193 MCb UV Coil open command

Mode AUTO
Comm object 19
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in AUTO mode.
Mode MAN
Comm object 18
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in MAN mode.
Mode OFF
Comm object 17
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in OFF mode.
Mode TEST
Comm object 20
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in TEST mode.
LBO: N
NCB Close/Open
Comm object 50
Description
Neutral circuit breaker Close/Open output controls the generator neutral circuit breaker. It is intended for
contactors – provides a continual active signal if NCB should be closed.

Not In AUTO
Comm object 1248
Description
This output is active when controller isn’t in AUTO mode.
Not Used
Comm object 286
Description
Output has no function.
LBO: P
Peak Shaving Active
Comm object 2118
Description
Active anytime, when the peak shaving start condition is fulfilled.

Power Switch
Comm object 290
Description
This is an output from the Power switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of
the setpoints Power Switch On (page 282) and Power Switch Off (page 283). When the dummy load
function is used the switching ON of Power switch is block when the engine isn’t running and is allowed 30 s
after start of the engine.
Image 9.194 Power Switch
Note: Setpoints Power Switch On (page 282) and Power Switch Off (page 283) are invisible until
configuration of this LBO.
Prestart
Comm object 36
Description
This output can be used for control of any device, which has to be activated just before start. The output is
closed for time period of Prestart Time (page 273). The output opens 100 ms before the STARTER (PAGE
737) output closes.
Image 9.195 Engine start

When the Prestart Time (page 273) is longer than Cranking Fail Pause (page 272) then the Prestart
Time (page 273) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 272) is long as Cranking Fail Pause (page 272) minus
100ms.
Image 9.196 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 1
When the Prestart Time (page 273) is shorter than Cranking Fail Pause (page 272) then the Prestart
Time (page 273) in Cranking Fail Pause (page 272) is long as normal Prestart Time (page 273).
Image 9.197 Prestart in Cranking Fail Pause 2

LBO: R
Ready To AMF
Comm object 324
Description
The output is closed if the gen-set is ready to start automatically and take the load if the mains fails, i.e.:
the controller is in AMF operating mode
the controller is in AUTO controller mode and
no red alarm is present in the alarmlist
when the red alarm is confirmed during Stop Valve and other requirements are fulfilled then the LBO is
still inactive until the state ready
Ready To Load
Comm object 58
Description
The output is closed whenever the GCB is closed or can be closed i.e. the stabilization phase is finished, the
gen-set is running and the Minimal Stabilization Time (page 278) timer has elapsed.
and the gen-set voltage and frequency are within limits.
If GCB is open then gen-set voltage and frequency must be in limits.
If GCB is close then gen-set voltage and frequency can be out of limits, but protection delay can’t be count
down. If gen-set voltage and frequency will return into limits until delay is count down then output is still
closed.
Ready
Comm object 62
Description
The binary output is closed, when the engine is stopped and it is possible to start it i.e. no red alarm is
activated or SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 680) is active.
The binary output is switch on when the Ready state occurs.
The binary output is switch off when the Prestart or the Not Ready or the Stop state occurs i.e. always
except Ready state.

RegenerationNeededRegen Needed
Comm object 1372
Description
This output is closed when DPF lamp from ECU is active.
Running
Comm object 67
Description
The output is designed to be used as an indication that the gen-set is running. The output closes if FUEL
SOLENOID (PAGE 715) is closed and STARTER (PAGE 737) and PRESTART (PAGE 732) are open. The out
remains close until engine stop and cooling period elapses.
Image 9.198 Running
LBO: S
Sd Override
Comm object 962
Description
The output is closed if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 680) input is active and open if SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 680) input is
inactive. This output is usually used to send information about SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 680) input into ECU.

Speed Down
Comm object 57
Description
This output together with the complementary output SPEED UP (PAGE 736) are designed for speed and power
control at gen-sets where the speed governor does not support analogue control.
Speed Up
Comm object 56
Description
This output together with the complementary output SPEED DOWN (PAGE 736) are designed for speed and
power control at gen-sets where the speed governor does not support analogue control.

Starter
Comm object 24
Description
This output is dedicated for starter motor control. The number of cranking attempts is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Attempts (page 271) in Engine Settings group. Cranking fail pause is adjusted by setpoint
Cranking Fail Pause (page 272).
Image 9.199 Starter
The starter output opens when:

the “firing” speed is reached
maximum time of cranking is exceeded
request to stop comes up
D+ value is higher than 80%
Oil pressure value is higher than Starting Oil Pressure (page 274)
Generator voltage > 25% of Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 246) or Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page
246) (any phase)
Still Log 0
Comm object 26
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 0.
Still Log 1
Comm object 27
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 1.

Stop Pulse
Comm object 25
Description
Output is active for 1 second after STOP SOLENOID (PAGE 738) output activation. This signal is sent to ECU
in case of engine stop request.
Image 9.200 Stop Pulse
Stop Solenoid
Comm object 23
Description
This output is dedicated to control the stop solenoid (valve). The output closes when an engine stop
command is received and is deactivated 12 s after last running engine indication went off, i.e. engine is
stopped.
Image 9.201 Stop Solenoid 1

Image 9.202 Stop Solenoid 2
Note: If Additional running engine indications (page 132) went off during 5 s pause than Stop
Solenoid is not activated again otherwise stop solenoid is activated again.
Supplying Load
Comm object 1249
Description
The binary output depends on measured generator active power. Power is compared with generator nominal
active power with use of hysteresis and with delay of switch 1 s.
When the measured active power is equal or bigger than 5 % of Nominal Power (page 242) for 1 s than the
binary output is closed.
When the measured active power is equal or lower than 3 % of Nominal Power (page 242) for 1 s than the
binary output is opened.
System Reserve OK
Comm object 87
Description
This LBO is active when System Reserve is higher than the actual reserve for start of next gen-sets.

LBO: T
Temperature Switch
Comm object 563
Description
This is an output from the Temperature switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Temperature Switch On (page 294) and Temperature Switch Off (page 295).
Note: Setpoints Temperature Switch On (page 294) and Temperature Switch Off (page 295) are
invisible until configuration of this LBO.

9.1.5 Logical analog inputs
What Logical analog inputs are:
Logical analog inputs are inputs for analog values.
Alphabetical groups of Logical analog inputs

LAI: A 743
LAI: C 771
LAI: D 772
LAI: F 772
LAI: M 773
LAI: N 773
LAI: O 774
For full list of Logical analog inputs go to the chapter Logical analog inputs alphabetically (page 742).

Logical analog inputs alphabetically
AIN Prot01 744 AIN Switch 18 769

AIN Prot04 747 Coolant Temp 771
AIN Prot05 748 Display Brightness 772
AIN Prot06 749 Fuel Level 772
AIN Prot07 750 Mains Import
AIN Prot08 751 Measurement 773
AIN Prot09 752 Not Used 773
AIN Prot10 753 Oil Pressure 774
AIN Prot11 754 Oil Temp 775
AIN Prot12 755

AIN Prot13 756
AIN Prot14 757
AIN Prot15 758
AIN Prot16 759
AIN Prot17 760
AIN Prot18 761
AIN Prot19 762
AIN Prot20 763
AIN Switch 01 764
AIN Switch 02 764
AIN Switch 03 764
AIN Switch 04 765
AIN Switch 05 765
AIN Switch 06 765
AIN Switch 07 766
AIN Switch 08 766
AIN Switch 09 766
AIN Switch 10 767
AIN Switch 11 767
AIN Switch 12 767
AIN Switch 13 768
AIN Switch 14 768
AIN Switch 15 768
AIN Switch 16 769
AIN Switch 17 769

LAI: A

AIN Prot01
Comm object 9999
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. For more information about
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 41. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints
Analog Protection 1 Wrn (page 366) and Analog Protection 1 Sd (page 366). Delay is adjusted by
setpoint Analog Protection 1 Delay (page 367).
Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn+Stp Analog value is used for warning and slow stop protection
Stp Analog value is used for slow stop protection
Wrn+BOR Analog value is used for warning and breaker open protection
BOR Analog value is used for breaker open protection
Wrn+MPR Analog value is used for warning and mains protection
MPR Analog value is used for mains protection
Wrn + BOC Analog value is used for warning and BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
BOC Analog value is used for BOC (Breaker Open and Cooling) protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and shutdown protection.
Sd Analog value is used for shutdown protection.
Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.
Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.
6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Prot02
Comm object 9998
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot03
Comm object 9997
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot04
Comm object 9996
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot05
Comm object 9995
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot06
Comm object 9994
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot07
Comm object 9993
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot08
Comm object 9992
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot09
Comm object 9991
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot10
Comm object 9990
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot11
Comm object 9989
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot12
Comm object 9988
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot13
Comm object 9987
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot14
Comm object 9986
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot15
Comm object 9985
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot16
Comm object 9984
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot17
Comm object 9983
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot18
Comm object 9982
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot19
Comm object 9981
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot20
Comm object 9980
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Switch 01
Comm object 209
Description
wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 41. This analog input controls logical binary output AIN
SWITCH01 (PAGE 696). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints Analog
Switch 1 On (page 367) and Analog Switch 1 Off (page 368).
Note: This function is not suitable for tristate or binary analog sensors.
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.
AIN Switch 02
Comm object 210
Description
AIN Switch 03
Comm object 211
Description

AIN Switch 04
Comm object 212
Description
AIN Switch 05
Comm object 278
Description
AIN Switch 06
Comm object 279
Description

AIN Switch 07
Comm object 280
Description
AIN Switch 08
Comm object 281
Description
AIN Switch 09
Comm object 282
Description

AIN Switch 10
Comm object 283
Description
AIN Switch 11
Comm object 284
Description
AIN Switch 12
Comm object 285
Description

AIN Switch 13
Comm object 286
Description
AIN Switch 14
Comm object 287
Description
AIN Switch 15
Comm object 288
Description

AIN Switch 16
Comm object 289
Description
AIN Switch 17
Comm object 290
Description
AIN Switch 18
Comm object 291
Description

AIN Switch 19
Comm object 292
Description
AIN Switch 20
Comm object 293
Description

LAI: C
Coolant Temp
Comm object 67
Description
Logical analog input designed for coolant temperature value received from analog sensor. For more
information about wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 41. Limits for this protection are
adjusted by setpoints Coolant Temperature Wrn (page 289) and Coolant Temperature Sd (page 290).
Delay is adjusted by setpoint Coolant Temperature Delay (page 290).
Protection types
protection.
Alarm
Note: This analog function can by also configured on binary input as binary function. In this case chose
COOLANT TEMP (PAGE 664) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted
via the same setpoint like for analog function.

LAI: D
Display Brightness
Comm object
Description
Use this function to adjust display brightness. It is necessary to set Brightness control to External to use the
function Display brightness settings (page 192)
LAI: F
Fuel Level
Comm object 78
Description
Logical analog input designed for fuel level value received from analog sensor. For more information about wiring
of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 41. Limits for this protection are adjusted by setpoints Fuel Level
Wrn (page 296) and Fuel Level Sd (page 296). Delay is adjusted by setpoint Fuel Level Delay (page 297).
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

IMPORTANT: For right behavior of this function, curve for analog input has to be in
percentage.
FUEL LEVEL (PAGE 667) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted via
the same setpoint like for analog function.
LAI: M
Mains Import Measurement
Comm object 5
Description
Logical analog input designed for Mains import measurement (page 154). Value from this input is used in
load transfer from mains to generator. Load transfer is considered to be finished when this value is lower then
Mains Unload MCB Open Window (page 353)
LAI: N
Not Used
Comm object 230
Description
Input has no function.

LAI: O
Oil Pressure
Comm object 9
Description
Logical analog input designed for oil pressure value received from analog sensor. For more information about
Oil Pressure Wrn (page 287) and Oil Pressure Sd (page 288). Delay is adjusted by setpoint Oil
Pressure Delay (page 288).
Protection types
protection.
Wrn + Sd Analog value is used for warning and Sd protection.
Sd Analog value is used for Sd protection.
Alarm
OIL PRESSURE (PAGE 674) binary input in the list of binary inputs. Delay of this binary input is adjusted
via the same setpoint like for analog function.

Oil Temp
Comm object 77
Description
Logical analog input designed for oil temperature value received from analog sensor. For more information
about wiring of analog inputs see Analog inputs on page 41. Limits for this protection are adjusted by
setpoints Oil Temp Wrn (page 291) and Oil Temp Sd (page 292). Delay is adjusted by setpoint Oil Temp
Delay (page 292).
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

9.1.6 PLC
List of PLC groups
Group: Basic Logical functions 778
Group: Comparison of analog inputs 781
Group: Time functions 783
Group: Other functions 787
For full list of PLC blocks go to the chapter List of PLC blocks (page 777).

List of PLC blocks
Group: Basic logical

functions
OR/AND 778
XOR/RS 780
Group: Comparison of
analog inputs
Comparator With
Hysteresis 781
Comparator With Delay 782
Group: Time functions

Timer 783
Delay 785

Group: Basic Logical functions
OR/AND
PLC group Basic logical functions
Related FW 1.0.0
Related applications MINT, SPtM
Comm object 1
Inputs
Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1..8 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1..8
Outputs
Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block performs logical operation OR / AND of 2 - 8 binary operands. The inputs as well as the output can be
inverted.
Function OR
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
Function AND
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
There have to be at least 2 inputs every time. There may be up to 8 inputs configured.

Image 9.204 Configuration of OR/AND block
6 back to List of PLC blocks

XOR/RS
PLC group Basic logical functions
Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 2
Inputs

Input 1..2 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1..2
Outputs

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block provides logical function of two values - XOR or RS flip-flop. Both inputs and output can be
inverted.
Function XOR
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
Function RS
R S Qn+1
0 0 Qn
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 1 0
Image 9.205 Configuration of XOR/RS block

Group: Comparison of analog inputs
Comparator With Hysteresis
PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 3
Inputs

Input Analog No Any Compared value
Input ON Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching on
Input OFF Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching off
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block compares the input value with the comparative levels. The behavior depends on whether the ON
level is higher than OFF level or vice versa.
Image 9.206 Different On and Off levels

Image 9.207 Configuration of Comp Hyst block
Note: Level On and Level Off can be constants or values from controller.
IMPORTANT: In case that values on inputs have different decimal numbers than the values
are converted and the name of block is red. It is strongly recommended to use values with
the same decimal numbers.
Comparator With Delay

PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 4
Inputs

Input 1 Analog No Any Compared value
Input 2 Analog No Same as Input 1 Comparative level
Delay Analog No 0.0..3000,0 [s] Comparative delay
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block works as an analog switch. It compares the input value with the comparative level. The output will
switch on if the input is equal or higher than the comparative level for time longer than the delay.

Image 9.208 Principle of delay
Image 9.209 Configuration of Comp Time block
Note: Input 2 and Delay can be constants or values from controller.
Group: Time functions

Timer
PLC group Time functions
Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 14
Inputs

The timer runs only if this input is
Run Binary No 0/1
active or not connected
This input reloads the timer to the
Reload Binary No 0/1
initial value
Reload
Analog No 0,0..3276,7 [s] Initial value of the timer
value
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Timer output
Description
The block works as a countdown timer which is decreased by 1 every PLC cycle. The timer initial value is
adjustable by the "Reload value" input. The timer is automatically reloaded with the initial value when it
reaches zero or it can be reloaded in any other moment using the "reload" input. The timer is held at reload
value until the reload input is deactivated. The timer output is inverted always when the timer is reloaded.
Image 9.210 Principle of timer
Image 9.211 Configuration of Timer block
Note: Input reload value can be constant or value from controller.
Note: If you want the output to start at logical 0, tick First down option. Otherwise the output will start at
logical 1.
IMPORTANT: In case that inputs are not connected and First down option isn´t tick, than
output is active.

Delay
PLC group Time functions
Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 33
Inputs

Input Binary No 0/1 Input signal to be delayed
Delay of the rising edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200,0..3200,0 [s,
Analog No length generated by rising edge of the
up m, h]
input
Delay of the falling edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200,0..3200,0 [s,
Analog No length generated by falling edge of the
down m, h]
input
Resets the output to logical 0. The
output remains in logical 0 until new
Input reset Binary No 0/1
rising edge appears on Input (when
Input reset is deactivated already)
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Output signal
Description
This block can work in two modes of operation:
Delay mode - the rising edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time up" when a rising
edge at the input is detected. The falling edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time
down" when a falling edge at the input is detected. If the delayed falling edge at the output came
earlier than the delayed rising edge, then no pulse would be generated at the output.
Pulse mode - a pulse of "input time up" length is generated at the output when a rising edge is
detected, a pulse of "input time down" length is generated at the output when a falling edge is
detected.

Image 9.212 Delay modes principles
Image 9.213 Configuration of Delay block
Note: If Input time up or Input time down value is <0, this input is internally set to zero.
Note: Input time up and Input time down values can be constants or values from controller.
Note: Use Pulse on edge option to choose between delay and pulse mode.

Group: Other functions
Force History Record
PLC group Other functions
Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 9
Inputs

A record with configured text is
Input Binary No 0/1 recorded into the controller history
when the input is activated.
Outputs
No outputs.
Description
This block writes a record with defined text into the history when the input is activated.
Image 9.214 Configuration of Force Hist block
Note: Maximal number of characters for history message is 15.
Force Protection
Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 10
Inputs

The input activates yellow level of the
Lvl 1 Binary No 0/1
configured protection if it is configured
The input activates red level of the
Lvl 2 Binary No 0/1 configured protection if a red level
protection is configured
The input activates sensor fail if a fls
Fls Binary No 0/1
protection is configured

Outputs
No outputs.
Description
This block issues alarms of configured type and text when appropriate binary input is activated.
Image 9.215 Configuration of Force Prot block
Available protections are:

Monitoring
HistRecOnl
AL Indic
Wrn
Wrn+BOC
BOC
Wrn+Sd
Sd
Note: Maximal number of characters for alarmlist message is 15.
Note: Prefix of protection (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC) is added automatically into alarmlist message.

Counter
Related FW 1.0.0
Comm object 11
Inputs

Input at which
Input Count Up Binary No 0/1 the edges are
counted
Counter value
limit for
Input Preset Limit Analog No 0..32767 [-]
activation of the
output
Input Clear Binary No 0/1 Reset input
Outputs

Output is
activated when
Output Binary No 0/1
the counter value
exceeds the limit
Description
The block works as a counter of edges (selectable rising, falling or both) with reset input and adjustable
counting limit. The maximal counter value is 32767. The counter value is lost when the controller is switched
off. The output is activated when the counter value is equal or higher than Input Preset Limit and stays active
until the block reset is done using Input Clear. Activating of the Input Clear resets the counter value to 0 and
deactivates the output. Holding the Input Clear active blocks the counting.
Image 9.216 Configuration of the Counter block

9.2 Alarms
9.2.3 Fail sensor and other types 837
What alarms are:

The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. For more information see Alarm management on page 111.
9.2.1 Alarms level 1

Warnings 793
Other type 811
For full list of Alarms level 1 go to List of alarms level 1 (page 791).
What alarms level 1 are:
The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level. For more information see Alarm types - Level 1 on page 113.

List of alarms level 1
Alarm Email 1 Fail 793 Wrn Coolant Temp 801 Wrn Check DPF Status 808
Alarm Email 2 Fail 793 Wrn Coolant Temperature Wrn Maintenance 1 808
Alarm Email 3 Fail 793 Low 801 Wrn Maintenance 2 808
Alarm Email 4 Fail 793 Wrn ECU Communication Wrn Maintenance 3 809
Fail 802
Alarm SMS 1 Fail 794 Wrn MCB Fail 809
ECU Red Lamp 802
Alarm SMS 2 Fail 794 Wrn Oil Pressure 809
ECU Yellow Lamp 802
Alarm SMS 3 Fail 794 Wrn Overload 810
Wrn Fence 1 Alarm 802
Alarm SMS 4 Fail 794 Wrn Override All Sd 810
Wrn Fence 2 Alarm 803
Battery Charger Fail 795 Wrn Rental Timer 1 810
Wrn Fuel Level 803
Wrn Battery Voltage 795 Wrn Rental Timer 2 810
Wrn Fuel Theft 803
Bus CCW Rotation 795 Wrn Reverse Synchro Fail 810
Wrn GCB Fail 803
Default Credentials 795 Wrn Stop Fail 811
Wrn Generator L1 >
ECU Wait To Start 796 ATT Filter Lamp 811
Voltage 804
Wrn Emergency Droop ATT HEST Lamp 812
Wrn Generator L1 <
Active 796 ATT SCR Error Lamp 812
Voltage 804
Event Email 1 Fail 796 ATT DEF Level Lamp 812
Wrn Generator L1L2 >
Event Email 2 Fail 796 ATT Inhibited Lamp 812
Voltage 804
Event Email 3 Fail 796 Dead Bus GCB Blocked 812
Wrn Generator L1L2 <
Event Email 4 Fail 797 Voltage 805 EM(A) - a message lost 813
Event SMS 1 Fail 797 Wrn Generator L2 > EM(A) - configuration
Event SMS 2 Fail 797 Voltage 805 mistake 813
Event SMS 3 Fail 797 Wrn Generator L2 < EM(A) - insufficient 813
Event SMS 4 Fail 798 Voltage 805 EM(A) - missing or
Generator CCW Rotation 798 Wrn Generator L2L3 > damaged 813
Voltage 805 EM(B) - a message lost 814
Mains CCW Rotation 798
Wrn Generator L2L3 < EM(B) - configuration
Rental Timer 1 Elapsed 798
Voltage 806 mistake 814
Rental Timer 2 Elapsed 799
Wrn Generator L3 > EM(B) - insufficient 814
Rental Timer Block Start 799
Voltage 806
EM(B) - missing or
Soft Transfer Fail 799
Wrn Generator L3 < damaged 814
Speed Regulation Limit 799 Voltage 806
Generator CCW Rotation 814
Voltage Regulation Limit 799 Wrn Generator L3L1 >
Mains CCW Rotation 815
Wrn AIN Prot 800 Voltage 807
Manual Restore 815
Wrn Charging Alternator Wrn Generator L3L1 <
Module(slotA) - comm.
Fail 800 Voltage 807
outage 815
Wrn BadPwrCfg 800 Wrn Generator >
Module(slotA) - false
Wrn Battery > Voltage 800 Frequency 807
module 816
Wrn Battery < Voltage 801 Wrn Generator <
Module(slotA) - 816
Frequency 807
Wrn BIN Protection 801

unattended
Module(slotA) -
unexpected 816
Module(slotA) - unknown
module 816
Module(slotB) - comm.
outage 817
Module(slotB) - false
module 817
Module(slotB) -
unattended 817
Module(slotB) -
unexpected 817
Module(slotB) - unknown
module 818
Default Credentials 820
Default Credentials 822

Warnings
Alarm Email 1 Fail
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 1 (page 481) and email
wasn’t send.
6 back to List of alarms level 1
Alarm Email 2 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.
Alarm Email 3 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.
Alarm Email 4 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.

Alarm SMS 1 Fail
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 486) and SMS
wasn’t send.
Alarm SMS 2 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.
Alarm SMS 3 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.
Alarm SMS 4 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.

Battery Charger Fail
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Battery Charge Fail
Alarm evaluated Mains is OK
This alarm is activated when logical binary input BATTERY CHARGER (PAGE 616) is
Description
active.
Wrn Battery Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Battery Voltage
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is out of limits.
The following setpoints are related to it:
Description Battery Undervoltage (page 301)
Battery Overvoltage (page 301)
Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 302)
Bus CCW Rotation

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Bus CCW Rotation
Related applications MINT
The controller detects phase sequence on bus voltage terminals. This protection is
Description
important after controller installation to avoid wrong voltage phase connection.
Default Credentials
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Default Credentials
Alarm evaluated Default password / access code are used
The alarm is issued, if the factory default password and/or access code are used
and engine is running. Factory default password and access code are “0”.
Description IMPORTANT: Change password and/or access code to be able to
operate a genset! Sd Default Credentials alarm is issued, if the default
credentials are used and engine is not running!

ECU Wait To Start
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message ECU Wait To Start
Alarm evaluated Only when ECU is connected
This alarm is activated when ECU send information that ECU Wait To Start lamp
Description is activated. LBO ALARM (PAGE 695)is not activated, after deactivation of lamp,
alarm automatically disappear.
Wrn Emergency Droop Active

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Emergency Droop Active
Description This alarm is issued when Emergency Droop regulation as active.
Event Email 1 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event Email 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
wasn’t send.
Event Email 2 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.
Event Email 3 Fail

Alarm Type Other

wasn’t send.
Event Email 4 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.
Event SMS 1 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event SMS 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
wasn’t send.
Event SMS 2 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.
Event SMS 3 Fail

Alarm Type Other

wasn’t send.
Event SMS 4 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.
Generator CCW Rotation

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Generator CCW Rotation
The controller detects phase sequence on generator voltage terminals. This
Description protection is important after controller installation to avoid wrong voltage phase
connection.
Mains CCW Rotation

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Mains CCW Rotation
The controller detects phase sequence on mains voltage terminals. This protection
Description
is important after controller installation to avoid wrong voltage phase connection.
Rental Timer 1 Elapsed

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Rental Timer 1 Elapsed
Description This alarm is activated when Rental Timer 1 (page 441) elapses.

Rental Timer 2 Elapsed
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Rental Timer 2 Elapsed
Description This alarm is activated when Rental Timer 2 (page 443) elapses.
Rental Timer Block Start

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Rental Timer Block Start
Alarm is active when there is start command and Rental Timer 1 (page 441) or
Description
Rental Timer 2 (page 443) elapsed.
Soft Transfer Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Soft Transfer Fail
Alarm evaluated During transition of load
This alarm is issued when the unloading was not successful (Load Ramp (page
Description
353) + 10 % gets elapsed).
Speed Regulation Limit

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Speed Regulation Limit
Alarm evaluated Gen-set is running
This alarm is issued when speed governor output (Speed control outputs (page
Description
105)) stays close to one of the limit values for more than 2 seconds.
Voltage Regulation Limit

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Voltage Regulation Limit
This alarm is issued when AVR output (Voltage control outputs (page 107))
Description
stays close to one of the limit values for more than 2 seconds.

Wrn AIN Prot

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn + Name of analog input
This alarm indicates that value the general analog protection is out of warning
Description
protection limit.
Wrn Charging Alternator Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Charging Alternator Fail
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
This alarm is issued if the engine is running and the voltage on the D+ terminal is
lower than 80% of the controller supply voltage. This alarm works similar to the red
Description
“battery” alarm indicator on a vehicle dashboard.
The setpoint has to be in Charge Fail or Enabled position to enable this alarm.
Wrn BadPwrCfg
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn BadPwrCfg
Related applications MINT
This alarm is issued when there is different power format on controller which are
Description
connected via CAN2.
Wrn Battery > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message All the time
Alarm evaluated Wrn Battery > Voltage
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too high. The
following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Battery Overvoltage (page 301)

Wrn Battery < Voltage
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Battery < Voltage
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is too low. The
following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Battery Undervoltage (page 301)
Wrn BIN Protection

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn + Name of binary input
Binary input also can be adjusted like alarm. In this case message in alarmlist
Description contains prefix - Wrn and binary input name. This alarm occurs, when appropriate
binary input is active.
Wrn Coolant Temp

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Coolant Temp
This alarm indicates that the coolant temperature is higher than the temperature set
Description
in Coolant Temperature Wrn (page 289) setpoint.
Wrn Coolant Temperature Low

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Coolant Temperature Low
This alarm indicates that the coolant temperature is lower than the temperature set
Description
in Coolant Temperature Low Wrn (page 295) setpoint.

Wrn ECU Communication Fail
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn ECU Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 712) - only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 712) - all the time
This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU is not established or has dropped out.
ECU Red Lamp

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message ECU Red Lamp
This alarm occurs when an red ECU alarm is logged in Alarm List.
Description Note: This lamp can be ignored during prestart phase. Use InteliConfig to
enable this function.
ECU Yellow Lamp

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message ECU Yellow Lamp
This alarm occurs when an yellow ECU alarm is logged in Alarm List.
Description Note: This lamp can be ignored during prestart phase. Use InteliConfig to
enable this function.
Wrn Fence 1 Alarm

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fence 1 Alarm
This alarm evaluates the GPS position of gen-set. The following setpoint are
related to it:
Description Geo-Fencing (page 448)
Fence 1 Protection (page 449)
Fence Radius 1 (page 447)

Wrn Fence 2 Alarm

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fence 2 Alarm
related to it:
Wrn Fuel Level

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Level
This alarm indicates that the fuel level is lower than the level set in Fuel Level
Description
Wrn Fuel Theft

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Theft
This alarm occurs when the fuel level value measured at relevant AI (Fuel Level)
Description
drops faster than is the limit adjusted by setpoint Maximal Fuel Drop (page 298).
Wrn GCB Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn GCB Fail

This alarm will occur when the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 668) input does not match
the expected position given by the GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 716) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback persists.
If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
Description
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be issued
immediately.
The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to an open or
close command within 2 seconds.
Wrn Generator L1 > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L1 > Voltage
Alarm evaluated Generator excited only
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phase 1. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Description
Generator Overvoltage Wrn (page 308)
Generator <> Voltage Delay (page 309)
Wrn Generator L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L1 < Voltage
Description
Generator Undervoltage Wrn (page 309)
Wrn Generator L1L2 > Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L1L2 > Voltage
This alarm evaluates the generator phase to phase voltage between phases 1 and
2. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description

Wrn Generator L1L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Description

Alarm Type Warning
Description

Alarm Type Warning
Description

Alarm Type Warning

Description

Alarm Type Warning
Description

Alarm Type Warning
Description

Alarm Type Warning
Description

Alarm Type Warning
Description

Alarm Type Warning
Description
Wrn Generator > Frequency

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator > Frequency
This alarm evaluates the generator frequency in the phase L1. The following
Description
Generator Overfrequency Wrn (page 310)
Generator <> Frequency Delay (page 311)
Wrn Generator < Frequency

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Generator < Frequency
Description
Generator Underfrequency Wrn (page 311)

Wrn Check DPF Status

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Check DPF Status
Alarm evaluated When ECU is configured
This alarm occurs when ECU send alarm message about Tier IV protection.
Description
Note: Tier IV protection have to be supported by ECU.
Wrn Maintenance 1
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Maintenance 1
Adjust the setpoint Maintenance Timer 1 (page 302) to the interval of the next
maintenance check. The value of the setpoint will count down while the engine is
Description running and if reaches zero, this alarm will be issued. The alarm message will
remain in the alarm list (even if the controller is switched off and on again) until the
setpoint is re-adjusted to a positive value.
Wrn Maintenance 2
Alarm Type Warning

Wrn Maintenance 3
Alarm Type Warning
Wrn MCB Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn MCB Fail
This alarm will occur when the MCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 672) input does not match
the expected position given by the MCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 726) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback disappears.
immediately.
Self-opening of the breaker is not considered a fault and if all mains values
are within limits, the command to reclose the breaker is issued after delay
Description
given by the setpoint Mains Return Delay (page 319) has elapsed.
The alarm will be also issued, if the breaker does not respond to the close
command within 2 seconds. After this period has elapsed the output MCB
Close/Open is deactivated again and the next attempt to close the breaker
will occur first after the alarm is reset.
The alarm will be also issued if the breaker does not respond to the open
command within 2 seconds. The output MCB Close/Open will stay
deactivated. Closing of GCB is blocked until this alarm becomes inactive.
Wrn Oil Pressure

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Oil Pressure
This alarm indicates that the oil pressure is lower than the pressure set in Oil
Description
Pressure Wrn (page 287) setpoint.

Wrn Overload
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Overload
The alarm is issued when the gen-setmains power is over the limit for time period
longer than the delay. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Overload Wrn (page 304) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 304) Overload Del adjusts the delay.
Wrn Override All Sd

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Override All Sd
Description This alarm occurs when binary input SD OVERRIDE (PAGE 680) is activated.
Wrn Rental Timer 1

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Rental Timer 1
This alarm occurs xx hours before Rental Timer 1 (page 441) elapsed. Hours are
Description
adjusted by setpoint Rental Timer 1 Wrn (page 443).
Wrn Rental Timer 2

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Rental Timer 2
This alarm occurs xx hours before Rental Timer 2 (page 443) elapsed. Hours are
Description
adjusted by setpoint Rental Timer 2 Wrn (page 445).
Wrn Reverse Synchro Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Reverse Synchro Fail
Alarm evaluated During synchronization

Related applications
This alarm is issued when gen-set is synchronizing to the mains/bus via MCB and
Description
Synchronization Timeout (page 358) gets elapsed.
Wrn Stop Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Stop Fail
Alarm evaluated While the engine shall be stopped
This alarm occurs if the gen-set shall be stopped, but some symptom indicates that
it is not stopped. The period when the gen-set shall be stopped begins after the
FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE 715) has been switched off and time delay Stop Time
(page 281) has elapsed and lasts for the entire time the FUEL SOLENOID (PAGE
715) or STARTER (PAGE 737) are off.
Description
Image 9.217 Stop Fail
Note: Gen-set cannot be started until this alarm is inactive and reset.
Other type
ATT Filter Lamp
Alarm Type Alarm indication
Alarmlist message Aftertreatment
Description Indicates the Aftertreatment filter needs to be regenerated.

ATT HEST Lamp
Description Indicates High exhaust system temperature.
ATT SCR Error Lamp

Description Indicates SCR system problems.
ATT DEF Level Lamp

Description Indicates DEF fluid low level.
ATT Inhibited Lamp

Description Indicates Aftertreatment regeneration is inhibited.
Dead Bus GCB Blocked

Alarmlist message Dead Bus GCB Blocked
This alarm is issued when controller is in AUTO mode and Droop operation is
Description
active.

EM(A) - a message lost
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - a message lost
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between controller
Description
and module in slot.
EM(A) - configuration mistake

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - configuration mistake
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.
EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - insufficient
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.
EM(A) - missing or damaged

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - missing or damaged
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in slot
Description
(in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in slot).

EM(B) - a message lost
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(B) - a message lost
Description
and module in slot.
EM(B) - configuration mistake

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(B) - configuration mistake
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.
EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(B) - insufficient
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.
EM(B) - missing or damaged

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(B) - missing or damaged
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in slot
Description
(in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in slot).
Generator CCW Rotation

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Generator CCW Rotation

The controller detects phase sequence on generator voltage terminals. This
protection is important after controller installation to avoid wrong voltage phase
Description connection. There is a fixed defined phase sequence in InteliGen 500 controller:
T35 = N, T36 = L1, T37 = L2 and T38 = L3. When the phases are connected in a
different order, alarms are detected. This alarm prevent circuit breaker closing.
Mains CCW Rotation

Alarmlist message Mains CCW Rotation
The controller detects phase sequence on mains voltage terminals. This protection
is important after controller installation to avoid wrong voltage phase connection.
Description There is a fixed defined phase sequence in InteliGen 500 controller: T39 = N, T40 =
L1, T41 = L2 and T42 = L3. When the phases are connected in a different order,
alarms are detected. This alarm prevent circuit breaker closing.
Manual Restore
Alarmlist message Manual Restore
Alarm is activated when controller is in AUTO mode, Return From Island (page
Description
324) setpoint is set to manual, load is on gen-set a mains has returned.
Module(slotA) - comm. outage

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Description
and module in slot.

Module(slotA) - false module
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - fake module
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.
Module(slotA) - unattended
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unattended
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.
Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unexpected
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.
Module(slotA) - unknown module

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unknown module
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.

Module(slotB) - comm. outage
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - comm. outage
Description
and module in slot.
Module(slotB) - false module

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - fake module
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.
Module(slotB) - unattended
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unattended
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.
Module(slotB) - unexpected
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unexpected
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.

Module(slotB) - unknown module
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unknown module
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.
Wrn Fuel Transfer Failed

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Fuel Transfer Failed
Alarm evaluated When FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) is active
This alarm will occur when there is no increase of fuel level when FUEL PUMP
Description
(PAGE 715) is active.
Wrn Transferring Fuel

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Transferring Fuel
Alarm evaluated When FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) is active
Description This alarm will occur when FUEL PUMP (PAGE 715) is active.
9.2.2 Alarms level 2

Shutdown 820
Other type 830
For full list of Alarms level 2 go to List of alarms level 2 (page 819).
What alarms level 2 are:
The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached. For
more information see Alarm types - Level 2 on page 113.

List of alarms level 2
Emergency Stop 820 Sd Overload 828 BOC Rental Timer 836

E-Stop 820 Sd Overspeed 829 BOC Reverse Power 837
Sd AIN Protec 820 Sd RPM Measurement BOC Short Circuit 837
Sd Battery Flat 821 Fail 829 STP Bus Measurement
Sd BIN Protection 821 Sd Short Circuit 829 Error 837
Sd Coolant Temp 821 Sd Start Fail 830 STP Synchronization Fail 837
Sd Current Unbalance 821 Sd Underspeed 830
Sd Earth Fault Current 822 BOC AIN Prot 830
Sd ECU Communication BOC BIN Protection 830

Fail 822 BOC Coolant Temp 831
Sd Fence 1 Alarm 823 BOC Current Unbalance 831
Sd Fence 2 Alarm 823 BOC Excitation Loss 831
Sd Fuel Level 823 BOC Fence 1 Alarm 831
Sd GCB Fail 823 BOC Fence 2 Alarm 832
Sd Generator L1 > Voltage 824 BOC Fuel Level 832
Sd Generator L1 < Voltage 824 BOC Generator L1 <
Sd Generator L1L2 > Voltage 832
Voltage 824 BOC Generator L1L2 <
Sd Generator L1L2 < Voltage 832
Voltage 825 BOC Generator L2 <
Sd Generator L2 > Voltage 825 Voltage 833
Sd Generator L2 < Voltage 825 BOC Generator L2L3 <

Voltage 833
Sd Generator L2L3 >
Voltage 825 BOC Generator L3 <
Voltage 833
Sd Generator L2L3 <
Voltage 826 BOC Generator L3L1 <
Voltage 834
Sd Generator L3 > Voltage 826
BOC Generator >
Sd Generator L3 < Voltage 826
Frequency 834
Sd Generator L3L1 >
BOC Generator <
Voltage 827
Frequency 834
Sd Generator L3L1 <
BOC Gen Voltage
Voltage 827
Unbalance Ph-Ph 834
Sd Generator > Frequency 827
BOC Gen Voltage
Sd Generator < Frequency 827
Unbalance Ph-N 835
Sd Generator Voltage
BOC NCB Fail 835
Unbalance Ph-Ph 828
BOC Oil Pressure 835
Sd Generator Voltage
BOC Overcurrent IDMT 836
Unbalance Ph-N 828
BOC Overload 836
Sd Oil Pressure 828

Shutdown
Default Credentials
Alarm Type Shutdown
Description
IMPORTANT: Change password and/or access code to be able to
operate a genset!
Emergency Stop
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Emergency Stop
Alarm is activated when binary input EMERGENCY STOP (PAGE 665) is activated.
The gen-set shuts down in the moment the input is activated and starting is
blocked until the input is deactivated and fault reset is pressed.
Description Note: Use red emergency button placed on the switchboard door and connect
it to a binary input of the controller. Then configure the function Emergency
Stop to this binary input. It is recommended to use NC contact of the button.
Note: The MCB control is not affected by this alarm.
E-Stop
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message E-Stop
Alarm is activated when dedicated E-Stop input is activated. The gen-set shuts
Description down in the moment the input is activated and starting is blocked until the input is
deactivated and fault reset is pressed.
Sd AIN Protec
Alarm Type Sd
Alarmlist message Sd + Name of analog input

This alarm indicates that value the general analog protection is out of shutdown
Description
protection limit.
Sd Battery Flat
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Battery Flat
Alarm evaluated During cranking
This alarm will be issued if the controller was reset during cranking of the gen-set.
If this situation occurs, the controller supposes the starting battery is so exhausted
Description
that its voltage drops so low when starter motor is energized that it causes
controller reset.
Sd BIN Protection
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd + Name of binary input
Description contains prefix - Sd and binary input name. This alarm occurs, when appropriate
binary input is active.
Sd Coolant Temp
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Coolant Temp
Description
in Coolant Temperature Sd (page 290) setpoint.
Sd Current Unbalance
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Current Unbalance

This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase currents, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase current at any given time. The following
Description
Current Unbalance BOC (page 307) adjusts the maximum allowed
difference between the highest and lowest phase current at any given time.
Current Unbalance BOC Delay (page 307) adjusts the alarm delay.
Default Credentials
Alarm Type Shutdown
Description
IMPORTANT: Change password and/or access code to be able to
operate a genset!
Sd Earth Fault Current

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Earth Fault Current
This alarm indicates that the value of earth fault current is higher than adjusted
limit. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description Earth Fault Sd (page 491) adjusts the maximum allowed earth fault
current.
Earth Fault Delay (page 490) adjusts the alarm delay.
Sd ECU Communication Fail

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd ECU Communication Fail
With configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 712) - only when this LBO is
Alarm evaluated active
Without configured LBO ECU POWER RELAY (PAGE 712) - all the time
This alarm occurs when an ECU is configured, but the communication with the
Description
ECU is not established or has dropped out.

Sd Fence 1 Alarm
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fence 1 Alarm
related to it:
Sd Fence 2 Alarm
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fence 2 Alarm
related to it:
Sd Fuel Level
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Fuel Level
This alarm indicates that the fuel level is lower than the level set in Fuel Level Sd
Description
(page 296) setpoint.
Sd GCB Fail
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd GCB Fail

This alarm will occur when the GCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 668) input does not match
the expected position given by the GCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 716) output. It stays
Description
immediately.
Sd Generator L1 > Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 > Voltage
Description
Generator Overvoltage Sd (page 307)
Sd Generator L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1 < Voltage
This alarm evaluates the generator phase voltage in phases 1. The following
Description
Generator Undervoltage BOC (page 308)
Sd Generator L1L2 > Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 > Voltage
Description

Sd Generator L1L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator L1L2 < Voltage
Description

Alarm Type Shutdown
Description

Alarm Type Shutdown
Description

Alarm Type Shutdown

Description

Alarm Type Shutdown
Description

Alarm Type Shutdown
Description

Alarm Type Shutdown
Description

Alarm Type Shutdown
Description

Alarm Type Shutdown
Description
Sd Generator > Frequency

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator > Frequency
Description
Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 310)
Sd Generator < Frequency

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator < Frequency
Description
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 311)

Sd Generator Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase to phase voltage, i.e. the
difference between highest and lowest phase to phase voltage at any given time.
Description
Voltage Unbalance BOC (page 309) adjusts the maximum allowed
difference between the highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time.
Bus Voltage Unbalance BOC Delay (page 310) adjusts the alarm delay.
Sd Generator Voltage Unbalance Ph-N

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Generator Voltage Unbalance Ph-N
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase voltage, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time. The following
Description
Sd Oil Pressure
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Oil Pressure
This alarm indicates that the oil pressure is lover than the pressure set in Oil
Description
Pressure Sd (page 288) setpoint.
Sd Overload
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Overload

The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the following
Description setpoints:
Overload BOC (page 304) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 304) adjusts the delay
Sd Overspeed
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Overspeed
This alarm occurs immediately when the engine speed has exceeded the limit. The
Description behavior of the overspeed alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
Overspeed Sd (page 285) adjust the overspeed limit
Sd RPM Measurement Fail

Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd RPM Measurement Fail
Alarm evaluated During cranking
The alarm is issued if the engine speed has not exceeded the Starting RPM (page
Description 273) within the Maximum Cranking Time (page 272), although some of
additional running engine indication sources indicate that the engine has started.
Sd Short Circuit
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Short Circuit
This is a fast overcurrent protection. The following setpoints are related to this
alarm:
Description
Short Circuit BOC (page 305) adjusts the short current limit
Short Circuit BOC MPR Delay (page 305) adjusts the delay in fine steps

Sd Start Fail
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Start Fail
Alarm evaluated When the gen-set is being started
This alarm will be issued after all attempts to start the gen-set have run out but the
Description gen-set did not start. The following setpoints are related to this alarm:
Cranking Attempts (page 271) adjust the number of attempts
Sd Underspeed
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd Underspeed
Alarm evaluated Engine running only
This alarm will be issued when the gen-set is running and then stops by itself, i.e.
the RPM drops under the value of setpoint Starting RPM (page 273).
Description
The underspeed alarm starts to be evaluated after successful gen-set start and is
being evaluated for the entire time that the fuel solenoid is on.
Other type
BOC AIN Prot
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC + Name of analog input
This alarm indicates that the value of general analog protection is out of BOC
Description
protection limit.
BOC BIN Protection

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC + Name of binary input
Description contains prefix - BOCMPRBOR and binary input name. This alarm occurs, when
appropriate binary input is active.

BOC Coolant Temp
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Coolant Temperature
Description
in Coolant Temperature Sd (page 290) setpoint.
BOC Current Unbalance

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Current Unbalance
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase currents, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase current at any given time. The following
Description
Current Unbalance BOC (page 307) adjusts the maximum allowed
difference between the highest and lowest phase current at any given time.
Current Unbalance BOC Delay (page 307) adjusts the alarm delay.
BOC Excitation Loss

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Excitation Loss
The alarm is issued when the level of reactive power (-kVAr) gets under limit given
Description by setpoint Excitation Loss Level (page 312) for time longer then the value of
setpoint Excitation Loss Delay (page 313).
BOC Fence 1 Alarm

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fence 1 Alarm
related to it:

BOC Fence 2 Alarm

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fence 2 Alarm
related to it:
BOC Fuel Level

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Fuel Level
This alarm indicates that the fuel level is lower than the level set level in Fuel
Description
Level Sd (page 296) setpoint.
BOC Generator L1 < Voltage

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1 < Voltage
Description
BOC Generator L1L2 < Voltage

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator L1L2 < Voltage

Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description

Alarm Type BOC
Description
BOC Generator > Frequency

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator > Frequency
Description
Generator Overfrequency BOC (page 310)
BOC Generator < Frequency

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Generator < Frequency
Description
Generator Underfrequency BOC (page 311)
BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-Ph

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance ph-ph

This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase to phase voltages, i.e. the
difference between highest and lowest phase to phase voltage at any given time.
Description
BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance Ph-N

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Gen Voltage Unbalance ph-n
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase voltages, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase voltage at any given time. The following
Description
BOC NCB Fail
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC NCB Fail
This alarm will occur when the NCB FEEDBACK (PAGE 673) input does not match
the expected position given by the NCB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 730) output. It stays
Description
immediately.
BOC Oil Pressure

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Oil Pressure

This alarm indicates that the oil pressure is lover than the pressure set in Oil
Description
Pressure Sd (page 288) setpoint.
BOC Overcurrent IDMT
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message Sd + Name of binary input
The overcurrent alarm is based on IDMT principle. The reaction time of an IDMT
alarm is not fixed, but depends on how much is the protected value (generator
current in this case) above the limit (Nominal Current (page 243)). The higher is
the overcurrent, the shorter the reaction time will be. All generator phases are
evaluated.
Description
The behaviour of the overcurrent alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
IDMT Overcurrent Delay (page 306) defines the reaction time of the
protection when the current is twice the amount of nominal value.
Nominal Current (page 243) set the nominal current level, where the
alarm starts to be evaluated. The reaction time is infinite at this point.
BOC Overload
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Overload
The alarm is issued when the gen-set power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the following
Description setpoints:
Overload BOC (page 304) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 304) adjusts the delay
BOC Rental Timer
Alarm Type Shutdown
Alarmlist message BOC Rental Timer
Description This alarm occurs when Rental Timer BOC (page 445) elapses.

BOC Reverse Power
Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Reverse Power
The alarm is issued when the level of active power (-kW) gets under limit given by
Description setpoint Reverse Power Level (page 312) for time longer then the value of
setpoint Reverse Power Delay (page 312).
BOC Short Circuit

Alarm Type BOC
Alarmlist message BOC Short Circuit
This is a fast overcurrent protection. The following setpoints are related to this
alarm:
Description
Short Circuit BOC (page 305) adjusts the short current limit
Short Circuit BOC MPR Delay (page 305) adjusts the delay in fine steps
STP Bus Measurement Error

Alarm Type STP
Alarmlist message STP Bus Measurement Error
The alarm is issued when any controller on the CAN has closed its GCB, or MCB
Description
feedback is active and voltage on bus is within limits.
STP Synchronization Fail

Alarm Type STP
Alarmlist message STP Synchronization Fail
Alarm evaluated During synchronization
This alarm is issued when gen-set is synchronizing to the mains/bus via GCB and
Description
Synchronization Timeout (page 358) gets elapsed.
9.2.3 Fail sensor and other types

Fls Coolant Temp 840

Fls Fuel Level 840
Fls AIN Prot 1 840
Fls AIN Protect 2 840
Fls Oil Pressure 845
For full list of Fails sensor and other types of alarms go to List of fail sensor alarms (page 839).
What Fail sensor and other types of alarms are
If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor fail will be detected and a
sensor fail message will appear in the Alarmlist. For more information see Sensor fail detection (FLS) on
page 114.

List of fail sensor alarms
Fls Coolant Temp 840

Fls Fuel Level 840
Fls AIN Prot 1 840
Fls Oil Pressure 845

Fail sensor
Fls Coolant Temp
Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls Coolant Temperature
This alarm occurs when measurement value of coolant temperature is out of range
Description
or is missing.
6 back to List of fail sensor alarms
Fls Fuel Level

Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls Fuel Level
This alarm occurs when measurement value of fuel level is out of range or is
Description
missing.
6 List of fail sensor alarms (page 839)
Fls AIN Prot 1

Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls + name of analog input 1
This alarm indicates that the value of general analog protection is out of range or is
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 2

Alarm Type Fls
This alarm occurs when measurement value of analog input 2 is out of range or is
Description
missing.

Fls AIN Protect 3
Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 4

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 5

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 6

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.

Fls AIN Protect 7
Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 8

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 9

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 10

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.

Fls AIN Protect 11
Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 12

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 13

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 14

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.

Fls AIN Protect 15
Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 16

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 17

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 18

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.

Fls AIN Protect 19
Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 20

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls Oil Pressure

Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls Oil Pressure
This alarm occurs when measurement value of oil pressure is out of range or is
Description
missing.

9.3 AVR interfaces
IMPORTANT: Read carefully AVR instructions before connecting to a controller! It is not sufficient
to use suggested wiring settings, it is necessary as well to adjust AVR settings!
9.3.1 AVR interfaces alphabetically

AVK Newage Cosimat N+
Voltage Control:
Voltage Regulator Character = NEGATIVE
Voltage Regulator Bias = 0.50 V
Voltage Regulator Low Limit = 0.00 V
Voltage Regulator High Limit = 2.00 V
AVK Newage MA330, 327, 321, 341
Voltage Control:
Voltage Regulator Character = POSITIVE
Voltage Regulator Low Limit = -2.00 V
Basler: APR 63-5, AEC 63-7, KR-FX, KR-FFX
Voltage Control:
AVRi output is connected instead of external resistor for voltage adjusting.
Basler: DECS 100
Voltage Control:

Basler: DECS 200
Voltage Control:
Catterpillar CDVR
Voltage Control:
Pin 44 on DVR – PF regulation directly from DVR is not connected.
Catterpillar DVR
Voltage Control:
Pin 44 on DVR – PF regulation directly from DVR is not connected.
Catterpillar VR6, VR3F
Voltage Control:
For VR3F link 4-7 has to be removed.
Catterpillar VR6-B
Voltage Control:

ENGGA WT- 2
Voltage Control:
ENGGA WT- 3
Voltage Control:
KATO KCR 360
Voltage Control:
KATO KCR 760
Voltage Control:
Voltage Regulator Bias = -0.20 V
KATO KCR K-65-12B
Voltage Control:

Kutai EA448
Voltage Control:
AVRi output is connected instead Remote voltage trimmer 470 Ω to terminal ST4.
Module R726 is not required.
Leroy Somer: R 129
Voltage Control:
AVRi output is connected instead Remote voltage trimmer 470 Ω to terminal J2.
module R726 is not required.
Leroy Somer: R 221, R 222
Voltage Control:
Voltage Regulator Character
= POSITIVE
Voltage Regulator Bias
= -1.00 V
Voltage Regulator Low Limit
= -2.10 V
Voltage Regulator High Limit
= 2.10 V
Module R726 is not required. AVRi trim to minimum counter clockwise +5%.

Leroy Somer: R 230
Voltage Control:
Voltage Regulator Character =
POSITIVE
Voltage Regulator Low Limit = -
2.00 V
Voltage Regulator High Limit =
2.00 V
Module R726 is not required. AVRi trim minimum counter clockwise.
Leroy Somer: R 230
Voltage Control:
Remove Link J4 and replace through R500 Voltage Regulator Character = POSITIVE
Primary voltage setting with resistors connected: 230V Voltage Regulator Bias = 0.00 V
progress hint: Voltage Regulator Low Limit =-2.00 V
Disconnect one wire (OUT 1), set voltage on running Generator to U = nom. Voltage Regulator High Limit = 2.00 V
Measure Voltage over Resistor

Depending on Value increase AVRi potentiometer to get Range
Set exact Value with Bias Voltage//PF regulation (gain = 0)
Stop gen-set and connect when equal Voltage and polarity is achieved
Set again regulation loop on demand

Leroy Somer: R 250
Voltage Control:
Leroy Somer: R 438 LS, R448
Voltage Control:
AVRi output is connected (Undefined variable: Specific.Remote Voltage trimmer 470
Ω to terminals) ST4. (Undefined variable: Specific.Module R726 is not reauired.).
Leroy Somer: R 449
Voltage Control:
Module R726 is not required..
Leroy Somer: R 450
Voltage Control:
Use Avri instead pf potentiometer 1000 Ω. Read Leroy Somer R 450 manual before
use.
Marathon DVR2000E
Voltage Control:

Marathon PM100, 200
Voltage Control:
MarelliGenerators MARK 5 (M16FA655A)
Voltage Control:
MarelliMotori (M40FA610A)
Voltage Control:
MarelliMotori Mark I (M40FA640A/A)
Voltage Control:
Mecc Alte Der 1
Voltage Control:
Voltage Regulator Low Limit =-10.00 V
Remove jumpers connecting input 27 to 28 and input 31 to 32.

Mecc Alte DSR
Voltage Control:
The Vext input (connector CN1 – terminals 10 and 11) permits analogical remote control of output voltage with a programmable variation
range of up to ±10% (parameter 16, by default the setting is ±5%) with respect to the value set. If you want to use continuous voltage, it will
be effective if it is in the range between 0 V and +2,5 V. The input tolerates voltages from –5 V to +5 V, but for values exceeding the limits
of 0 V / +2,5 V (or in the event of disconnection) it is automatically disabled and the voltage adjustment goes back to the value set through
the trimmer (if enabled) or through parameter 19 (as shown on the picture). Changing of DSR parameters requires PC with dedicated
software and DI1-DSR unit! DSR automatically detects presence of transformer for parallel operation (if used it works with droop, if not
used it works isochronous).
Mecc Alte Spa: S.R:7/2
Voltage Control:

Mecc Alte Spa U.V.R.6
Voltage Control:
AVRi output is connected instead Remote voltage trimmer 100 Kohm
(T55 OUT = top position wire and T54 COM = second top position).
Newer Leroy Somer
Voltage Control:
Regulation signal +/- 0...2,5 V
Piller
Voltage Control:
Voltage Regulator Bias = -0.44 V
AVRi output is connected instead Remote voltage trimmer 100 kΩ.
SINCRO AVR BL4 or AVR BL3
Voltage Control:
Stamford AS480
Voltage Control:

Stamfrod MX 341
Voltage Control:
Disconnect the droop CT ( terminal S1&S2) and short the droop CT leads.
Stamford SX 440, AS 440, MX 321, SX 421
Voltage Control:
PFC3 module is not required.
Stamford SX 460
Voltage Control:
6 back to Appendix

9.4 Speed governor interfaces
IMPORTANT: Read carefully Speed governor instructions before connecting controller Speed
governor interface! It is not sufficient to use suggested wiring settings, it is necessary as well to
adjust speed governor settings!
9.4.1 Electronic engines interface

All below mentioned interface examples describe analog interface even if they are (in some cases) used for
Electronic Control Units (electronic engines) with CAN data bus. There are several possibilities to connect CAN
bus interface between Electronic engine and ComAp controller. Refer to ComAp Electronic Engines Support
manual.
9.4.2 Controller Speed Regulator Output voltage limits

Setpoints Sync/Load Control: Speed Governor Low Limit [0.01 V] and Speed Governor High Limit [0.01 V]
limit low and high levels of output voltage. E.g. instead of full -10 V to +10 V Speed governor output range can be
set Speed Governor Low Limit = 0.00 V and Speed Governor High Limit = 5.00 V to reduce the output range from
0 to 5 V.
9.4.3 Speed governors interfaces alphabetically

Barber Colman DYN1 10684
Speed/Load control:
Speed Govovernor Bias = 6,00 V
Speed Regulator Character = POSITIVE
Speed Governor Low Limit = 4 V
Speed Governor High Limit = 8 V
Barber Colman DYNA 8000
Speed/Load control:
Speed Governor Bias = 6,00 V
SpeedGovernor Low Limit = 4 V
Speed Governor Hi Limit = 8 V
Caterpillar ADEM + Signal convertor
Speed/Load control:

Caterpillar ADEM
Speed/Load control:
Speed Gov overnor Bias = 5,10 V
Caterpillar PEEC + Signal convertor
Speed/Load control:
Speed Regulator Character =
POSITIVE
Caterpillar PEEC
Speed/Load control:
Speed Governor PWM rate = 500 Hz
Caterpillar Signal Converter

It is not necessary to use Caterpillar Signal Converter with InteliGen 500 Use direct PWM output instead.
Speed/Load control:
POSITIVE
Potentiometer turns clockwise (droop 0%)

Cummins ECPG
Speed/Load control:
POSITIVE
Cummins EFC
Speed/Load control:
POSITIVE
Speed Governor High Limit = 7,8 V
Spurious operation of the controller push buttons is caused by excessive interference from the
speed controller when capacitor is not connected between power supply terminals 1 and 2.
Cummins GCS
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
Speed Governor Low Limit = 2,5 V
Cummins ONAN
Speed/Load ctrl:
Speed Govovernor Bias = 2,50 V
POSITIVE
Speed Governor Low Limit = 0V

Cummins QSL9
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
Cummins QST30
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
DEUTZ BF6M
Speed/Load ctrl:
Speed Governor Bias = 2.50 V
POSITIVE
Speed Governor Low Limit = 0.5 V
Speed Governor High Limit = 4.5 V
ECON 4
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE

GAC EGS 104B
Speed/Load ctrl:
NEGATIVE
Speed Governor High Lim = 6 V
GAC ESD 5330
Speed/Load ctrl:
Speed Gov Bias = 5,00 V
NEGATIVE
GAC ESD 5500
Speed/Load ctrl:
NEGATIVE
GAC SDG 735
Speed/Load ctrl:
NEGATIVE
Tau act. = 1

Heinzmann E6
Speed/Load ctrl:
Speed Governor Bias = 5,00 V Speed
Regulator Character = POSITIVE
Heinzmann E16
Speed/Load ctrl:
Speed Governor Bias = 0,00 V Speed
Regulator Character = POSITIVE
Heinzmann KG-1-03F
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
Heinzmann PANDAROS DC6
Speed/Load ctrl:
Speed Governor Bias = 5 V
POSITIVE
For connection w/o resistor refer to the
next setting
Terminals A3 and B3 are on OEM 14-pin connector.

Mounted on Perkins 40xx engines.

Heinzmann PANDAROS DC6
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
MTU MDEC 2000, 4000
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
PERKINS 1300 EDi
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
Speed Governor Low Limit = 0,8V
PERKINS 2300, 2800
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
Above mentioned pin numbers refer to the Customer Interface Connector. The J1 connector on
ECM has the following numbering:
20 = J1/3; 24 = J1/17

TOHO
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
WOODWARD 2301A LS and Speed
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
WOODWARD 2301A Speed Control
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
WOODWARD 2301D Speed Control
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
Terminals 19 and 20 are marked as Analog inputs #1.

25,26 = Speed Signal Inputs

WOODWARD DPG 2201
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
For Woodward DPG 2223 the ILS terminal is 10.
WOODWARD EPG 1712/512 (1724/524)
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
Speed Governor Low Limit = 6,5V
WOODWARD EPG
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
Speed Governor Low Limit = - 3 V
For Woodward EPG speed governor (revision F) are limits:
Speed Governor Low Limit = -3 V
Speed Governor High Limit = + 2 V
Speed Governor Bias = - 0,5 V
WOODWARD Flo - tech Speed Control
Speed/Load ctrl:

WOODWARD L - series
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
Speed Govenor Low Limit = 0 V
WOODWARD Proact II
Speed/Load ctrl:
POSITIVE
Speed Governor Low Limit = - 2,5V
Speed GovernorHigh Limit = 2,5 V
6 back to Appendix
9.5 Modules
9.5.1 Plug-In modules 865
9.5.2 CAN modules 876
9.5.1 Plug-In modules

Communication modules 865
Extension modules 873
IMPORTANT: 2nd generation of InteliGen 500 controllers does not support new modules and 3rd
generation does not support all old modules.
The available communication plug-in modules are:

CM-RS232-485 - communication module for connection via RS232 or RS485 line
CM-4G-GPS - communication module for connection via 4G
CM-GPRS - communication module for connection via GPRS
Ethernet - communication module for internet connection via Ethernet
The available extension plug-in modules are:
EM-BIO8-EFCP - extension module with 8 binary inputs/outputs
Note: Controller has plug-in module slot.
Communication modules
CM-RS232-485 866

CM-GPRS 868
CM-4G-GPS 871
CM-RS232-485
CM-RS232-485 is optional plug-in card to enable InteliGen 500 the RS232 and RS485 communication. This is
required for computer or MODBUS connection. The CM-RS232-485 is a dual port module with RS232 and
RS485 interfaces at independent COM channels. The RS232 is connected to COM1 and RS485 to COM2.
Image 9.218 CM-RS232-485 interface
IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.
Image 9.219 Pinout of RS-232 line

Image 9.220 Pinout of RS-485 line
Image 9.221 Jumpers description
Note: Balancing resistors shall be both closed at only one device in whole RS485 network.
Maximal distance of line is 10m for RS232 line and 1200m for RS485 line.
Terminator 120Ω
Balancing resistor +5V
Technical data
40 mA / 8 VDC
26 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
14 mA / 24 VDC
10 mA / 36 VDC
Isolation Galvanic separation
Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig
Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware

you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.
CM-GPRS
Image 9.222 CM-GPRS module
IMPORTANT: CM-4G-GPS and CM-GPRS modules can't be used in one controller in the same time.
Note: GPRS and CSD services must be provided by your GSM/GPRS operator for successful operation.
Note: The GPRS and CSD connection should not be used for the firmware update process.
Technical data
32 mA / 8 VDC
18 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
10 mA / 24 VDC
12 mA / 36 VDC
SIM card settings

SIM card to be used in CM-4G-GPS or CM-GPRS modules must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled
How to start using CM-GPRS module

You will need a controller, CM-GPRS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data service.
Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. I.e. if you want to use the
module in GPRS (2,5G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card does support
2,5G network.

Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM-GPRS card
Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.
Switch off the controller.
Insert CM-GPRS module into controller
Power up the controller.
Image 9.223 Main screen of CM-GPRS module
GSM Diag Code – Diagnostic code for CM-GPRS modem
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or unknown
11
status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by locked
14
SIM card
15 Unknown modem

19 No CDMA network
25 PUK is required
43 APN not typed
Firmware upgrade

CM-4G-GPS
Image 9.224 CM-4G-GPS module
IMPORTANT: CM-4G-GPS and CM-GPRS modules cant be used in one controller in the same time.
IMPORTANT: Operating temperature of module is from -30°C to +75°C.
Note: Cellular data service must be enabled in your SIM card by your mobile operator for successful operation.
Supported 4G bands are as follows:

FDD LTE: Band 1, Band 2, Band 3, Band 4, Band 5, Band 7, Band 8, Band 20, all bands with diversity
WCDMA/HSDPA/HSUPA/HSPA+: Band 1, Band 2, Band 5, Band 8, all bands with diversity
GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz/1900 MHz
Technical data
55 mA / 8 VDC
35 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
8 mA / 24 VDC
5 mA / 36 VDC
SIM card settings

SIM card to be used in CM-4G-GPS or CM-GPRS modules must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled
How to start using CM-4G-GPS module

You will need a controller, CM-4G-GPS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data service.
Note: Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. - i.e. if you want to use
the module in LTE (4G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card supports 4G
network.
Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM-4G-GPS card

Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.
Switch off the controller.
Insert CM-4G-GPS module into controller
Power up the controller.
Image 9.225 Main screen of CM-4G-GPS module
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or unknown
11
status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by locked
14
SIM card
15 Unknown modem

19 No CDMA network
25 PUK is required
43 APN not typed
Firmware upgrade
Extension modules
EM-BIO8-EFCP 874

EM-BIO8-EFCP
EM-BIO8-EFCP is optional plug-in card. Through this card controller can accommodate up to 8 binary inputs or
outputs. In InteliConfig PC configuration tool it is possible to easily choose if particular I/O will be binary input or
output.
Image 9.226 EM-BIO8-EFCP interface
Image 9.227 Overview of EM-BIO8-EFCP

Image 9.228 EM-BIO8-EFCP wiring
EM-BIO8-EFCP technical data

Power supply
Power supply range 8-36 VDC
40 mA / 8 VDC
27 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
22 mA / 24 VDC
19 mA / 36 VDC
Binary inputs
Number Up to 8, non-isolated
0-2 VDC close contact
Close/Open indication
>6 VDC open contact
Binary outputs
Number Up to 8 , non-isolated
Max. current 0,5A
Switching to positive supply terminal
Earth fault current measurement

The Earth Fault protection is done by the extension module EM-BIO8-EFCP.
When the measured current exceeds the set value, which indicates that part of the current is dispersed to earth,
and when the set Earth Fault Delay (page 490) time elapses, the Earth Fault Current Protection (page
489), Sd Earth Fault Current (page 822) alarm and AL EARTH FAULT (PAGE 688) output are activated. Earth
Fault protection is not active when gen-set does not run and when the Earth Fault Current Protection (page
489) is disabled.
IMPORTANT: Earth fault current measurement is not intended to protect human health, but the
machines!

Image 9.229 Earth fault current protection
Firmware upgrade
9.5.2 CAN modules

Extension modules 877
The available extension CAN modules are:

Inteli AIN8 - extension CAN module with 8 analog inputs
Inteli IO8/8 - extension CAN module with 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
this CAN module can be switched to Inteli IO16/0 - extension CAN module with 16 binary inputs and 2
analog outputs
Supported combinations of modules

Slot Inteli AIN8 Inteli AIN8TC Inteli IO8/8 Inteli IO16/0 IGL-RA15 IGS-PTM Inteli AIO9/1

Slot Inteli AIN8 Inteli AIN8TC Inteli IO8/8 Inteli IO16/0 IGL-RA15 IGS-PTM Inteli AIO9/1
IMPORTANT: In slot 3, 4 and 5 CAN modules Inteli IO8/8 and Inteli IO16/0 are supported without
analog outputs. Analog outputs of these CAN modules are supported only in slot 1 and 2.
It is possible to add up to 80 binary inputs or up to 68 binary outputs or up to 32 analog inputs on CAN modules.
Extension modules
Inteli AIN8 877
Inteli AIN8TC 883
Inteli IO8/8 886
IGS-PTM 893
Inteli AIN8
Inteli AIN8 module is extension module equipped with analog inputs. Inteli AIN8 module is connected to
controller by CAN1 bus.
Image 9.230 Inteli AIN8

Image 9.231 Inteli AIN8 dimensions
Note: All dimensions are in mm.
Terminals
Analog input 8 analog Inputs

CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position “ON” - switch both switches)

Note: Impulse input is not supported.
Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
resistor three wire input
current input
voltage input
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
IMPORTANT: Impulse input is not supported in controller.
Supported sensors
Sensors
User curves NI100 [°F] (fix) 0-5V
PT100 [°C] (fix) NI1000 [°F] (fix) 0-10V
PT1000 [°C] (fix) 4-20mA passive
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-2400ohm 4-20mA active
NI1000 [°C] (fix) 0-10k ohm 0-20mA passive
PT100 [°F] (fix) +-1V +-20mA active
PT1000 [°F] (fix) 0-2.4V
CAN address
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.
Note: In case of setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.
Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Separate the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on a pins

4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv
5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli AIN8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn’t start – after 60 second the “Timeout” will be evaluated. In this
case please check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded
LED indication
LED status Description
Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn’t communicate with the controller).
Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.

Terminator
Resistance sensor - 3 wires
Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω, 0 – 10 kΩ
Resistance sensor - 2 wires
Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω, 0 – 10 kΩ
Current sensor - active
Note: Ranges: ±20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

Current sensor - passive
Note: Ranges: 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA
Voltage sensor
Note: Ranges: ±1 V, 0 – 2,5 V, 0 – 5 V, 0 – 10 V
Technical data
General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110x110x46 mm (4,3”x4,3”x1,8”)
Weight 221,5 grams
Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-10 V
Voltage
Accuracy: ± 0,25 % of actual value + ± 25 mV
Current Range: ±20 mA

Accuracy: ± 0,25 % of actual value + ± 50 µA
Range: 0- 10 kΩ
Resistive
Accuracy: ± 0,5 % of actual value + ± 2 Ω
Inteli AIN8TC
Inteli AIN8TC module is extension module equipped with 8 analog inputs dedicated for thermocouple sensors
only.
Inteli AIN8TC module is connected to controller by CAN1 bus.
Image 9.232 Inteli AIN8TC
Image 9.233 Inteli AIN8TC dimensions

Terminals
Analog input 8 analog Inputs

CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
CAN LED Tx,
Indication transmitted or received data
Rx
Status LED LED indication of correct function
Note: Impulse input is not supported.
Analog inputs
8 channels
Can be configured as thermocouple sensors only
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection
Supported sensors
Sensors
Thermocpl J [°C] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) J [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°C] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) K [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°C] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) L [°C] (fix)
Thermocpl J [°F] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) J [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl K [°F] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) K [°F] (fix)
Thermocpl L [°F] (fix) Thermocpl (nc) L [°F] (fix)

Note: “nc” means“ not cold junction compensation (by external sensor).In this case is used internal temperature
sensor on the PCB
CAN address
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.
Firmware is upgraded via AT-link (TTL). For programming it is necessary to close jumper TEST.
For programming FlashProg PC tool version 4.2 or higher must be used.
LED indication

Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address)
Fast flashing Detection of CAN communication speed
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8TC and
controller works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN
address module doesn’t communicate with the controller)
Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.
Thermocouple

Terminator
Technical data
General data
Protection IP20
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110 × 110 × 46 mm (4.3” × 4.3” × 1.8”)
Weight 237.5 grams
Analog inputs
Number of channels 8, no galvanic separated
Range: ± 100 mV
Voltage Accuracy: ± 0.1 % of actual value + ± 100 µV
(± 3 °C)
Inteli IO8/8
Inteli IO8/8 module is an extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs and analog outputs.
Inteli IO8/8 is the name of the module, but it is possible to configure the module (by internal switch) to two
configurations:
Inteli IO8/8 - 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
Inteli IO16/0 - 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
The detection of communication speed is indicated by fast flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected
the module remains set for the speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed
detection is done by reset of the module.

Image 9.234 Inteli IO8/8
Image 9.235 Inteli IO8/8 dimensions
Note: All dimensions are in mm.

Terminals
Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Binary outputs 8 binary outputs (8 binary inputs)
Analog outputs 2 analog outputs
CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
Binary inputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary input indication
Binary outputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary output indication
CAN LED Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED indication of correct function
Inputs and outputs

Binary inputs
8 channels
pull up
pull down
All 8 inputs are configured to one type together.
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Binary outputs

8 channels
High side switch
Low side switch
Always all 8 inputs are configured to one type (HSS/LSS) together. All 8 outputs can be modified to inputs by
switch on the PCB ( Inteli IO8/8 to Inteli IO16/0).
Analog outputs
2 channels
voltage 0-10V
current 0-20mA
PWM (level 5V, with adjustable frequency from 200Hz to 2400Hz, with step 1Hz)
All inputs/outputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Output state check

Output state check function evaluates in real time the state of binary outputs and adjusted (required) state. In
case of failure (different state of required state and real state) history record and alarm are issued (type of the
alarm is set by “Protection upon module failure” - (No protection / Warning / Shutdown)).
This function is designed for short-circuit or other failure, which causes change of set state of binary output.
CAN address
In Inteli IO8/8 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, CAN address for binary
output and analog outputs is determined by DIP switch B.
In Inteli IO16/0 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, first group of 8 input has
address A, second group of 8 inputs has address A+1. CAN address of analog outputs is set by DIP switch B.
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Separate the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on a pins

4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv
5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli IO8/8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn’t start – after 60 second the “Timeout” will be evaluated. In this
case please check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded
LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary output is
set. When this LED is shining, then module is configured as 8 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs. When this
LED is dark, then the module is configured as 16 binary inputs.
LED at power connector - status LED

Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli IO8/8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn’t communicate with the controller).
Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of inputs and outputs.
Binary inputs - pull up
There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see case when binary input is connected between
BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the GND (-) - dashed line).
On lower picture is case of wiring between BIN2 and GND (-). Both ways are correct.
Binary inputs - pull down
There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see case when binary input is connected between
BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the Ucc (+) - dashed line).
On lower picture is case of wiring between BIN2 and Ucc (+). Both ways are correct.

Binary outputs - high side
When high side setting of outputs is chosen - binary output must be connected to the minus potential directly
Terminal VHS (voltage High side) has to be connected to positive potential directly. Maximal current of each
binary output is 500 mA. Size of fuse depends on load.
Binary outputs - low side
When low side setting of outputs is chosen - binary output must be connected to the plus potential of power
supply directly. Minus potential is connected internally - dashed line.
Analog outputs
Note: Limit of analog ground (AGND) is 100mA.
IMPORTANT: Terminator for analog output has special analog ground (AGND), which must not be
connected to the GND.
Technical data
General data
Protection IP20

Dimensions (WxHxD) 110x110x46 mm (4,3”x4,3”x1,8”)
Weight 240 grams
Analog outputs
Range 0-10 V
Voltage Accuracy: ± 20 mV + ±0,5 % of actual value
Imax 5 mA
Range: 0-20 mA
Current Accuracy: ± 100 µA + ±0,5 % of actual value
Rmax 500 Ω
Level 5 V
PWM Frequency - adjustable 200÷2400 Hz
Imax 20 mA
Binary inputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 16 for Inteli IO16/0
Input resistance 4400 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for close contact indication 6 to 36 V DC
Binary outputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 0 for Inteli IO16/0
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC
IGS-PTM
IGS-PTM module is extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs, analog inputs and analog
output. IGS-PTM module is connected to controller by CAN1 bus.

Image 9.236 IGS-PTM
Image 9.237 IGS-PTM dimensions

Terminals
Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Analog inputs 4 analog inputs
Analog outputs 1 analog output
Binary outputs 8 binary outputs
CAN CAN1 line
RS232-TTL Interface for programming
Power Power supply
Analog inputs
Analog inputs can be configured for:
Resistance measurement
Current measurement
Voltage measurement
The type of analog inputs is configured via jumpers RUI located on lower PCB.
RUI Analog input configuration

1-2 Resistance measuring
2-3 Current measuring
no jumper Voltage measuring
Supported sensors
Sensors
PT100 [°C] (fix) User curves
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-100 mV
PT100 [°F] (fix) 0-2400 ohm
NI100 [°F] (fix) ±20 mA

CAN address
Controller type selection
The type of controller to be used with IGS-PTM must be selected via jumper labeled IGS accessible at the lower
PCB.
IGS jumper Controller type

OPEN IL-NT, IC-NT
CLOSE IG-NT, IS-NT, InteliGen
Address configuration
If InteliGen controller type is selected (by IGS jumper), address of IGS-PTM could be modified via jumpers
labeled ADR1 and ADR2.
ADR1 ADR2 ADR offset BIN module BOUT module AIN module
Open Open 0 (default) 1 1 1
Close Open 1 2 2 2
Open Close 2 3 3 3
Close Close 3 4 4 4
Programing firmware
Firmware upgrade is via AT-link (TTL). For programming is necessary to close jumper BOOT. RESET jumper is
used to reset the device. Close jumper to reset the device. For programming is used FlashProg PC tool.
LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary output is
set.
LED at power connector - status LED
Dark No required power connected.
Quick flashing Program check failure.
One flash and pause Compensation fail.
Three flashes and
Compensation successful.
pause
Flashes There is no communication between IGS-PTM and the controller.
Power supply is in the range and communication between IGS-PTM and controller
Lights
properly works.

Wiring
Binary inputs
Binary outputs
Resistance sensor
Note: Range: 0- 2400 Ω
IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-250 Ω. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is

necessary to chose 0-2400 Ω sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.
Voltage sensor
Note: Range 0-100 mV

Current sensor - passive
Note: Range: ± 0-20 mA
IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-20mA. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is

necessary to chose +- 20mA active sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.
Analog outputs
Note: Range: 0 to 20 mA ± 0,33 mA
Technical data
General data
Current consumption 100 mA at 24V ÷ 500 mA
Protection IP20
Dimensions (WxHxD) 95×96×43 mm (3.7’×3.8’×1.7’)
Analog inputs
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1,5 % ± 1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ± 0,5 ohm out of measured value
Range: 0- 250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ± 2 ohm out of measured value

Analog outputs
Range: 0 to 20 mA ± 0,33 mA
Current
Resolution 10 bit
Binary inputs
Input resistance 4700 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for close contact indication 8 to 36 V DC
Binary outputs
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1,5 % ± 1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ± 0,5 ohm out of measured value
Range: 0- 250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ± 2 ohm out of measured value
IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator (IGL-RA15) is designed as an extension signaling unit.
The unit is equipped with a fully configurable tri color (red, orange, green) LED for intuitive operation
together with high functionality.
Image 9.238 IGL-RA15

Image 9.239 IGL-RA15 dimensions
Terminals
Horn Horn
CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
CAN address
Address Jumper A Jumper B

1 OPEN OPEN
5+6 CLOSED OPEN
Customer defined CLOSED CLOSED
SW changing of CAN1 address is enabled only when both jumpers are closed. Any one of these addresses (1+2
or 3+4 or 5+6 or 7+8) can be set by following steps:
Switch to programming mode (Hold the Horn reset and Lamp test when unit is powering on). Status led is
yellow
Press Lamp test sixteen times
Set the address up by pressing Horn reset.
The number of red luminous LEDs means the CAN1 addresses (two for addresses 1+2, four for
addresses 3+4, six for addresses 5+6 and eight for addresses 7+8)
Press Lamp test
LED indication
Each LED color is adjusted independently of controller output settings. If controller output 1 is set as “Common
Shutdown” it doesn’t mean red LED1 color for iGL-RA15. The LEDs color can by adjust by following steps:
yellow
Press Horn reset to change the LED1 color (green, yellow, red)

Press Lamp test to switch to the next LED color adjusting
Continue to adjust all LEDs color
After LED15 color adjusting press three times Lamp test
Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns to
normal operation without changes saving.
Status LED
The signals LEDs are handled like binary outputs. It means all what can be configured to binary outputs can be
also configured to the LEDs of IGL-RA15.
Lights Configured logical output is active on the controller
Dark green LED Configured logical output is not active on the controller
Configured logical output is not active on the controller and horn reset was
Dark yellow or red LED
pressed.
Configured logical output is not active on the controller and horn reset was still
Yellow or red LED blinks
not pressed.
Power LED
Blinking green The unit is OK and the communication to the master controller is OK.
Blinking red The unit is OK, but the communication to the master controller is not running.
Blinking yellow EEPROM check not passed OK after power on
Yellow Horn timeout or controller address adjustment
Horn setting
The horn output is activated if any of red or yellow LED is on. Output is on until pressing Horn reset or horn
timeout counts down. The timeout can by set by following steps:
yellow
Press Lamp test fifteen times
Set the horn timeout by pressing Horn reset.
The number of green luminous LEDs means timeout in 10 s (any for disabling horn output, 1 for 10s
timeout, 2 for 10s timeout, 15 for disabling horn timeout).
Press Lamp test two times
Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns to
normal operation without changes saving.
The horn is activated if:

Some of red or yellow LED lights up or
At the end of the extended lamp test. See chapter Lamp and horn test (page 902)
The horn can be silenced:

By pressing horn reset button or
It silences automatically after adjusted time
Lamp and horn test

Pressing and holding lamp test button for less than 2 s execute the basic lamp test. All LEDs light up with the
configured colour. If the button is hold longer than 2 s, an extended test is started. Every LED is tested step-by-
step in green colour and then in red colour. The horn is activated at the end of the test. After that the unit returns
to normal operation. The horn can be silenced with horn reset.
Wiring
* terminator resistor only when iGL-RA 15 is the last unit on the CAN1 bus.
Note: The shielding of the CAN bus cable has to be grounded at one point only!
Note: See the section Technical data (page 902) for recommended CAN bus cable type
Technical data
General data
Current consumption 0.35-0.1A (+1Amax horn output) depends on supply voltage
Protection IP65
Humidity 85%
Dimensions (WxHxD) 180x120x55 mm
Weight 950 g

Horn output
Maximum current 1.0 A
Maximum switching voltage 36 V DC
CAN bus interface

Galvanic separated
Maximal CAN bus length 200 m
Speed 250 kBd
Nominal impedance 120 Ω
Cable type twisted pair (shielded)
Following dynamic cable parameters are important especially for maximal 200 meters CAN bus length
Nominal Velocity of Propagation min. 75 % (max. 4,4 ns/m)
Wire crosscut min.0,25 mm2
Maximal attenuation (at 1 MHz) 2 dB/100m
Recommended Industrial Automation & Process Control Cables
3082A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3086A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
BELDEN (www.belden.com) 3087A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
3105A Paired EIA Industrial RS485 cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Trunk Cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Drop Cable
LAPP CABLE (www.lappcable.com)
Unitronic BUS CAN
Unitronic-FD BUS P CAN UL/CSA

InteliGen 500 Global Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

InteliGen 500 Global Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

InteliGen 500 Global Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

InteliGen 500

Controller for parallel gen-set

Copyright © 2019 ComAp a.s.

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 2

4 Installation and wiring 23

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 3

6 Graphical User Interface 157

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 4

8 Technical data 217

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 5

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 6

6 back to Table of contents

1.1 Clarification of notation

1.2 About this Global Guide

1.3 Legal notice

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 7

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 8

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 9

1.4 General warnings

1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

1.4.3 Dangerous voltage

1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 10

1.5 Certifications and standards

1.6 Document history

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 11

Fuse switch Relay coil

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 12

6 back to Table of contents

2.1 General description

2.1.1 The key features of InteliGen 500

2.2 True RMS measurement

2.3 Configurability and monitoring

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 13

2.3.2 Configuration parts

Image 2.1 Principle of binary inputs and outputs configuration

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 14

This tool provides the following functions:

This tool provides the following functions:

WebSupervisor available at: www.websupervisor.net

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 15

This tool provides the following functions:

2.5 Plug-in modules

Wireless integrated solution

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 16

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 17

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 18

2.6.3 Inteli IO8/8

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 19

6 back to System overview

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 20

6 back to Table of contents

Image 3.1 Single parallel to mains application

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 21

Image 3.2 Multiple island-parallel application without mains

6 back to Applications overview

InteliGen 500 1.0.0 Global Guide 22

6 back to Table of contents

4.1 Package content